Foreword
Congratulations on choosing a SUBARU vehicle. This Owner’s Man-
ual has all the information necessary to keep your SUBARU in excel-
lent condition and to properly maintain the emission control system
for minimizing emission pollutants. We urge you to read this manual
carefully so that you may understand your vehicle and its operation.
For information not found in this Owner’s Manual, such as details
concerning repairs or adjustments, please contact the dealer from
whom you purchased your SUBARU or the nearest SUBARU dealer.
The information, specifications and illustrations found in this manual
are those in effect at the time of printing. FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES
LTD. reserves the right to change specifications and designs at any
time without prior notice and without incurring any obligation to
make the same or similar changes on vehicles previously sold. This
Owner’s Manual applies to all models and covers all equipment, in-
cluding factory installed options. Some explanations, therefore may
be for equipment not installed in your vehicle.
Please leave this manual in the vehicle at the time of resale. The next
owner will need the information found herein.
FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD., TOKYO, JAPAN
is a registered trademark of FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD.
© copyright 2004 FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD.
UBF046AA
1
– CONTINUED –
Warranties
Warranties for U.S.A.
All SUBARU vehicles distributed by Subaru of Ameri-
ca, Inc. and sold at retail by an authorized SUBARU
dealer in the United States come with the following
warranties:
y SUBARU Limited Warranty
y Emission Control Systems Warranty
y Emissions Performance Warranty
All warranty information, including details of coverage
and exclusions, is in the “Warranty and Maintenance
Booklet”. Please read these warranties carefully.
Warranties for Canada
All SUBARU vehicles distributed by Subaru Canada,
Inc. and sold at retail by an authorized SUBARU deal-
er in Canada come with the following warranties:
y SUBARU Limited Warranty
y Anti-Corrosion Warranty
y Emission Control Warranty
All warranty information, including details of coverage
and exclusions, is in the “Warranty and Service Book-
let”. Please read these warranties carefully.
This vehicle does not contain mer-
cury devices or parts.
2
How to use this owner’s manual
Using your Owner’s manual
Before you operate your vehicle, carefully read this
manual. To protect yourself and extend the service life
of your vehicle, follow the instructions in this manual.
Failure to observe these instructions may result in se-
rious injury and damage to your vehicle.
This manual is composed of fourteen chapters. Each
chapter begins with a brief table of contents, so you
can usually tell at a glance if that chapter contains the
information you want.
Chapter 1: Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
This chapter informs you how to use the seat and seat-
belt and contains precautions for the SRS airbags.
Chapter 2: Keys and doors
This chapter informs you how to operate the keys,
locks and windows.
Chapter 3: Instruments and controls
This chapter informs you about the operation of instru-
ment panel indicators and how to use the instruments
and other switches.
Chapter 4: Climate control
This chapter informs you how to operate the climate
control.
Chapter 5: Audio
This chapter informs you how to operate your audio
system.
Chapter 6: Interior and exterior equipments
This chapter informs you how to operate interior and
exterior equipments.
Chapter 7: Starting and operating
This chapter informs you how to start and operate your
SUBARU.
Chapter 8: Driving tips
This chapter informs you how to drive your SUBARU
in various conditions and explains some safety tips on
driving.
Chapter 9: In case of emergency
This chapter informs you what to do if you have a prob-
lem while driving, such as a flat tire or engine over-
heating.
Chapter 10: Appearance care
This chapter informs you how to keep your SUBARU
looking good.
Chapter 11: Maintenance and service
This chapter informs you when you need to take your
SUBARU to the dealer for scheduled maintenance
and informs you how to keep your SUBARU running
properly.
Chapter 12: Specifications
This chapter informs you about dimension and capac-
ities of your SUBARU.
3
– CONTINUED –
Chapter 13: Consumer information and Reporting
safety defects
This chapter informs you about Tire information, Uni-
form tire quality grading standards and Reporting
safety defects.
Chapter 14: Index
This is an alphabetical listing of all that’s in this manu-
al. You can use it to quickly find something you want
to read.
Safety warnings
You will find a number of WARNINGs, CAUTIONs and
NOTEs in this manual.
These safety warnings alert you to potential hazards
that could result in injury to you or others.
Please read these safety warnings as well as all other
portions of this manual carefully in order to gain a bet-
ter understanding of how to use your SUBARU vehicle
safely.
A WARNING indicates a situation in which seri-
ous injury or death could result if the warning is
ignored.
A CAUTION indicates a situation in which injury
or damage to your vehicle, or both, could result
if the caution is ignored.
NOTE
A NOTE gives information or suggestions how to
make better use of your vehicle.
Safety symbol
You will find a circle with a slash through it in this man-
HSF019AA
4
ual. This symbol means “Do not”, “Do not do this”, or
“Do not let this happen”, depending upon the context.
Safety precautions when driving
Seatbelt and SRS airbag
y All persons in the vehicle should fasten their
seatbelts BEFORE the vehicle starts to move.
Otherwise, the possibility of serious injury be-
comes greater in the event of a sudden stop or
accident.
y To obtain maximum protection in the event of
an accident, the driver and all passengers in the
vehicle should always wear seatbelts when the
vehicle is moving. The SRS (Supplemental Re-
straint System) airbag does not do away with
the need to fasten seatbelts. In combination
with the seatbelts, it offers the best combined
protection in case of a serious accident.
Not wearing a seatbelt increases the chance of
severe injury or death in a crash even when the
vehicle has the SRS airbag.
y The SRS airbags deploy with considerable
speed and force. Occupants who are out of
proper position when the SRS airbag deploys
could suffer very serious injuries. Because the
SRS airbag needs enough space for deploy-
5
– CONTINUED –
ment, the driver should always sit upright and
well back in the seat as far from the steering
wheel as practical while still maintaining full ve-
hicle control and the front passenger should
move the seat as far back as possible and sit
upright and well back in the seat.
Carefully read the sections “Seat, seatbelt and SRS
airbags” in chapter 1 of this owner’s manual for in-
structions and precautions concerning the seatbelt
system and SRS airbag system.
Child safety
y Never hold a child on your lap or in your arms
while the vehicle is moving. The passenger
cannot protect the child from injury in a colli-
sion, because the child will be caught between
the passenger and objects inside the vehicle.
y While riding in the vehicle, infants and small
children should always be placed in the REAR
seat in an infant or child restraint system which
is appropriate for the child’s age, height and
weight. If a child is too big for a child restraint
system, the child should sit in the REAR seat
and be restrained using the seatbelts. Accord-
ing to accident statistics, children are safer
when properly restrained in the rear seating po-
sitions than in the front seating positions. Nev-
er allow a child to stand up or kneel on the seat.
y Put children aged 12 and under in the REAR
seat properly restrained at all times in a child
restraint device or in a seatbelt. The SRS airbag
deploys with considerable speed and force and
can injure or even kill children, especially if
they are 12 years of age and under and are not
restrained or improperly restrained. Because
children are lighter and weaker than adults,
their risk being injured from deployment is
greater.
y NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FACING
CHILD SAFETY SEAT IN THE FRONT SEAT.
DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH
TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE CHILD’S
HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.
y Always use the child safety locks whenever a
child rides in the rear seat. Serious injury could
result if a child accidentally opened the door
and fell out. Refer to the “Door locks” section in
chapter 2.
y Always lock the passenger’s windows using
6
the lock switch when children are riding in the
vehicle. Failure to follow this procedure could
result in injury to a child operating the power
window. Refer to the “Power windows” section
in chapter 2.
y Never leave unattended children in the vehi-
cle. They could accidentally injure themselves
or others through inadvertent operation of the
vehicle. Also, on hot or sunny days, tempera-
ture in a closed vehicle could quickly become
high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal
injuries to them.
Carefully read the sections “Child restraint sys-
tems”,“*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System
airbag)”, and “Seatbelts” in chapter 1 of this owner’s
manual for instructions and precautions concerning
the child restraint system, seatbelt system and SRS
airbag system.
Engine exhaust gas (carbon monox-
ide)
y Never inhale engine exhaust gas. Engine ex-
haust gas contains carbon monoxide, a color-
less and odorless gas which is dangerous, or
even lethal, if inhaled.
y Always properly maintain the engine exhaust
system to prevent engine exhaust gas from en-
tering the vehicle.
y Never run the engine in a closed space, such
as a garage, except for the brief time needed to
drive the vehicle in or out of it.
y Avoid remaining in a parked vehicle for a
lengthy time while the engine is running. If that
is unavoidable, then use the ventilation fan to
force fresh air into the vehicle.
y Always keep the front ventilator inlet grille
free from snow, leaves or other obstructions to
ensure that the ventilation system always
works properly.
y If at any time you suspect that exhaust fumes
are entering the vehicle, have the problem
checked and corrected as soon as possible. If
you must drive under these conditions, drive
only with all windows fully open.
7
– CONTINUED –
Drinking and driving
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.
Alcohol in the bloodstream delays your reac-
tion and impairs your perception, judgment and
attentiveness. If you drive after drinking – even
if you drink just a little – it will increase the risk
of being involved in a serious or fatal accident,
injuring or killing yourself, your passengers
and others. In addition, if you are injured in the
accident, alcohol may increase the severity of
that injury.
Please don’t drink and drive.
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents. Since alcohol affects all people differently,
you may have consumed too much alcohol to drive
safely even if the level of alcohol in your blood is below
the legal limit. The safest thing you can do is never
drink and drive. However if you have no choice but to
drive, stop drinking and sober up completely before
getting behind the wheel.
Drugs and driving
There are some drugs (over the counter and
prescription) that can delay your reaction time
and impair your perception, judgment and at-
tentiveness. If you drive after taking them, it
may increase your, your passengers’ and other
persons’ risk of being involved in a serious or
fatal accident.
If you are taking any drugs, check with your doctor or
pharmacist or read the literature that accompanies the
medication to determine if the drug you are taking can
impair your driving ability. Do not drive after taking any
medications that can make you drowsy or otherwise
affect your ability to safely operate a motor vehicle. If
you have a medical condition that requires you to take
drugs, please consult with your doctor.
Never drive if you are under the influence of any illicit
mind-altering drugs. For your own health and well-be-
ing, we urge you not to take illegal drugs in the first
place and to seek treatment if you are addicted to
those drugs.
8
Driving when tired or sleepy
When you are tired or sleepy, your reaction will
be delayed and your perception, judgment and
attentiveness will be impaired. If you drive
when tired or sleepy, your, your passengers’
and other persons’ chances of being involved
in a serious accident may increase.
Please do not continue to drive but instead find a safe
place to rest if you are tired or sleepy. On long trips,
you should make periodic rest stops to refresh your-
self before continuing on your journey. When possible,
you should share the driving with others.
Car phone/mobile phone and driving
Do not use a hand-held phone while driving; it
may distract your attention from driving and
can lead to an accident. If you use a hand-held
phone, pull off the road and park in the safe
place before using your phone. In some States/
Provinces, only hands-free phones may legally
be used while driving.
Modification of your vehicle
Your vehicle should not be modified. Modifica-
tion could affect its performance, safety or du-
rability, and may even violate governmental
regulations. In addition, damage or perfor-
mance problems resulting from modification
may not be covered under warranties.
Driving with pets
Unrestrained pets can interfere with your driving and
distract your attention from driving. In a collision or
sudden stop, unrestrained pets or cages can be
thrown around inside the vehicle and hurt you or your
passengers. Besides, the pets can be hurt under
these situations. It is also for their own safety that pets
should be properly restrained in your vehicle. Restrain
a pet with a special traveling harness which can be se-
cured to the rear seat with a seatbelt or use a pet car-
9
– CONTINUED –
rier which can be secured to the rear seat by routing a
seatbelt through the carrier’s handle. Never restrain
pets or pet carriers in the front passenger’s seat. For
further information, consult your veterinarian, local an-
imal protection society or pet shop.
Tire pressures
Driving at high speeds with excessively low tire
pressures can cause the tires to deform severe-
ly and to rapidly become hot. A sharp increase
in temperature could cause tread separation,
and destruction of the tires. The resulting loss
of vehicle control could lead to an accident.
Check and, if necessary, adjust the pressure of each
tire (including the spare) at least once a month and be-
fore any long journey.
Check the tire pressure when the tires are cold.
Use a pressure gauge to adjust the tire pressures to
the values shown on the tire placard.
Refer to the “Tires and wheels” section in chapter 11
for detailed information.
California proposition 65 warning
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and
certain vehicle components contain or emit
chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other repro-
ductive harm. In addition, certain fluids in vehi-
cles and certain components of product wear
contain or emit chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects or
other reproductive harm.
14
9
12
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
13
10
11
Table of contents
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
Keys and doors
Instruments and controls
Climate control
Audio
Interior equipment
Starting and operating
Driving tips
In case of emergency
Appearance care
Maintenance and service
Specifications
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
Index
12
Illustrated index
Exterior
13 12 11 10 9 8
123 564
7
UBF047BB
1) Hood lock release knob (page
11-5)
2) Headlight switch (page 3-18)
3) Bulb replacement (page 11-64)
4) Wiper switch (page 3-25)
5) Moonroof (page 2-31)
6) Roof rail (page 6-24)
7) Door locks (page 2-3)
8) Tire pressure (page 11-46)
9) Flat tires (page 9-12)
10) Tire chains (page 8-15)
11) Fog light button (page 3-23)
12) Tie-down hooks (page 9-23)
13) Towing hook (page 9-23)
18
Instrument panel
12 3 4 5 67
891011121314151617
UBF021BB
1) Door locks (page 2-3)
2) Outside mirror (page 3-30)
3) Light control lever (page 3-18)
4) Combination meter (page 3-6)
5) Wiper control lever (page 3-23)
6) Hazard warning flasher switch
(page 3-5)
7) Climate control (page 4-1)
8) Gear shift lever (MT) (page 7-
12)/Selector lever (AT) (page 7-
15)
9) Audio (page 5-1)
10) Cruise control (page 7-38)
11) Horn (page 3-34)
12) SRS airbag (page 1-47)
13) Tilt steering (page 3-33)
14) Fuse box (page 11-57)
15) Hood lock release knob (page
11-5)
16) Power door locking switch (page
2-5)
17) Power window (page 2-22)
19
– CONTINUED –
Light control and wiper control levers/switches
1
2
3
4
5
7
6
8
9
10
11
UBF023DB
1) Parking light switch (page 3-22)
2) Windshield wiper (page 3-23)
3) Mist (page 3-25)
4) Windshield washer (page 3-25)
5) Wiper control lever (page 3-25)
6) Illumination brightness control
(page 3-21)
7) Light control lever (page 3-18)
8) Headlight ON/OFF (page 3-18)
9) Headlight flasher High/Low
beam change (page 3-18)
10) Turn signal (for lane change)
(page 3-20)
11) Turn signal (page 3-20)
20
Combination meter
T Non-turbo models
12 3 4
56789
UBF063BB
1) Fuel gauge (page 3-8)
2) Speedometer (page 3-6)
3) Tachometer (page 3-7)
4) Temperature gauge (page 3-8)
5) Clock setting knob (page 3-17)
6) Clock and outside temperature
indicator (page 3-17, 3-7)
7) Selector lever position indicator
(page 3-15)
8) Trip meter A/B selection and trip
meter reset knob (page 3-6)
9) Trip meter and odometer (page
3-6)
21
– CONTINUED –
T Turbo models
12 435
678910
UBF064BB
1) Fuel gauge (page 3-8)
2) Speedometer (page 3-6)
3) Gear position indicator (page 3-
16)
4) Tachometer (page 3-7)
5) Temperature gauge (page 3-8)
6) Clock setting knob (page 3-17)
7) Clock and outside temperature
indicator (page 3-17, 3-7)
8) Selector lever position indicator
(page 3-15)
9) Trip meter A/B selection and trip
meter reset knob (page 3-6)
10) Trip meter and odometer (page
3-6)
22
T Warning and indicator light
Mark Name Page
Seatbelt warning light 3-9
SRS airbag system warning
light
3-10
CHECK ENGINE warning
light/Malfunction indicator
lamp
3-10
Charge warning light 3-11
Oil pressure warning light 3-12
AT OIL temperature warning
light (if equipped)
3-12
or
ABS warning light 3-12
or
Brake system warning light 3-13
Door ajar warning light 3-14
Low fuel warning light 3-14
All-Wheel Drive warning
light (if equipped)
3-14
Switchback door indicator 3-14
Security system indicator
light (if equipped)
3-15
Cargo lamp indicator 3-16
Turn signal indicator lights 3-16
High beam indicator light 3-16
Cruise control set indicator
light
7-38
Mark Name Page
1-1
1
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
Front seats .................................................... 1-2
Fore and aft adjustment ................................... 1-3
Seat cushion angle and height adjustment
(Power seat only) ........................................... 1-4
Reclining the seatback ..................................... 1-5
Head restraint adjustment ................................ 1-6
Lumbar support (if equipped) .......................... 1-7
Seat heater (if equipped) .............................. 1-7
Rear seats ..................................................... 1-9
Rear headrest .................................................... 1-9
Folding down the rear seat .............................. 1-10
Seatbelts ....................................................... 1-14
Seatbelt safety tips ........................................... 1-14
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) .............. 1-16
Automatic/Emergency Locking Retractor
(A/ELR) ............................................................ 1-16
Seatbelt warning light and chime .................... 1-17
Fastening the seatbelt ...................................... 1-17
Seatbelt maintenance ....................................... 1-21
Seatbelt extender ......................................... 1-22
Front seatbelt pretensioners ....................... 1-24
System monitors ............................................... 1-25
System servicing .............................................. 1-26
Precautions against vehicle modification ...... 1-27
Child restraint systems ................................ 1-28
Where to place a child restraint system ......... 1-29
Choosing a child restraint system .................. 1-31
Installing child restraint systems with A/ELR
seatbelt ............................................................ 1-32
Installation of child restraint systems by use
of lower and tether anchorages (LATCH) .... 1-40
Installing a booster seat ................................... 1-45
*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint
System airbag) ........................................... 1-47
Vehicle with driver’s and front passenger’s
SRS airbags and lap/shoulder restraints ..... 1-47
SRS frontal airbag ............................................ 1-52
SRS airbag system monitors ........................... 1-60
SRS airbag system servicing .......................... 1-61
Precautions against vehicle modification ...... 1-62
1-2
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
Seat, seat belt and SRS airba gs
Front seats
y Never adjust the seat while driving to avoid
the possibility of loss of vehicle control and of
personal injury.
y Before adjusting the seat, make sure the
hands and feet of rear seat passengers are
clear of the adjusting mechanism.
y Seatbelts provide maximum restraint when
the occupant sits well back and upright in the
seat. To reduce the risk of sliding under the
seatbelt in a collision, the front seatbacks
should be always used in the upright position
while the vehicle is running. If the front seat-
backs are not used in the upright position in a
collision, the risk of sliding under the lap belt
and of the lap belt sliding up over the abdomen
will increase, and both can result in serious in-
ternal injury or death.
y The SRS airbags deploy with considerable
speed and force. Occupants who are out of
proper position when the SRS airbag deploys
could suffer very serious injuries. Because the
SRS airbag needs enough space for deploy-
ment, the driver should always sit upright and
well back in the seat as far from the steering
wheel as practical while still maintaining full ve-
hicle control and the front passenger should
move the seat as far back as possible and sit
upright and well back in the seat.
Put children aged 12 and under in the rear seat
properly restrained at all times. The SRS airbag
deploys with considerable speed and force and
can injure or even kill children, especially if
they are 12 years of age and under and are not
HS1034BA
1-3
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
– CONTINUED –
restrained or improperly restrained. Because
children are lighter and weaker than adults,
their risk of being injured from deployment is
greater. For that reason, we strongly recom-
mend that ALL children (including those in
child seats and those that have outgrown child
restraint devices) sit in the REAR seat properly
restrained at all times in a child restraint device
or in a seatbelt, whichever is appropriate for the
child’s age, height and weight.
Secure ALL types of child restraint devices (in-
cluding forward facing child seat) in the REAR
seats at all times.
NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FACING CHILD
SEAT IN THE FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS
SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD
BY PLACING THE CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE
TO THE SRS AIRBAG.
According to accident statistics, children are
safer when properly restrained in the rear seat-
ing positions than in the front seating posi-
tions. For instructions and precautions con-
cerning child restraint systems, see the “Child
restraint systems” section in this chapter.
Fore and aft adjustment
T Power seat (if equipped)
To adjust the seat forward or backward, move the con-
trol switch forward or backward.
UB1060BA
1-4
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
T Manual type
Pull the lever upward and slide the seat to the desired
position. Then release the lever and move the seat-
back and forth to make sure that it is securely locked
into place.
Seat cushion angle and height adjust-
ment (Power seat only)
UB1058BA
UB1078BA
1-5
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
– CONTINUED –
To adjust the angle and height of the seat cushion,
move the control switch in the corresponding direction.
Reclining the seatback
Pull the reclining lever up and adjust the seatback to
the desired position. Then release the lever and make
sure the seat is securely locked into place.
The seatback placed in a reclined position can spring
back upward with force when released. When operat-
ing the reclining lever to return the seatback, hold it
lightly so that it may be raised back gradually.
UB1062BA
UB1072BA
1-6
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
To prevent the passenger from sliding under
the seatbelt in the event of a collision, always
put the seatback in the upright position while
the vehicle is in motion. Also, do not place ob-
jects such as cushions between the passenger
and the seatback. If you do so, the risk of slid-
ing under the lap belt and of the lap belt sliding
up over the abdomen will increase, and both
can result in serious internal injury or death.
Head restraint adjustment
To raise the head restraint, pull it up. To lower it, push
the head restraint down while pressing the release
button on the top of the seatback.
The head restraint should be adjusted so that the cen-
ter of the head restraint is closest to the top of the oc-
cupant’s ears.
Never drive the vehicle with the head restraints
removed because they are designed to reduce
the risk of serious neck injury in the event that
HS1037BA
UB1016BA
1-7
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
– CONTINUED –
the vehicle is struck from the rear.
Lumbar support (if equipped)
Pull the lever forward or backward.
Pulling the lever forward will increase the amount of
support for your lower back.
Seat heater (if equipped)
1) Heating element
The seat heater operates when the ignition switch is
either in the “ACC” or “ON” position.
UB1059BA
1
UB1073BB
1-8
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
1) Indicator light
To turn on the seat heater, push the “LO” or “HI” posi-
tion on the switch, as desired, depending on the tem-
perature. Selecting the “HI” position will make the seat
to heat up quickly.
LO: Normal heating
HI: Rapid heating
The indicator located on the switch comes on when
the seat heater is in operation. When the vehicle’s in-
terior is warmed enough or before you leave the vehi-
cle, be sure to turn the switch off.
y There is a possibility that people with delicate
skin may suffer slight burns even at low tem-
peratures if they use the seat heater for a long
period of time. When using the heater, always
be sure to warn the persons concerned.
y Do not put anything on the seat which insu-
lates against heat, such as a blanket, cushion,
or similar items. This may cause the seat heater
to overheat.
NOTE
y Use of the seat heater for a long period of time
while the engine is not running can cause battery
discharge.
y When cleaning the seat, do not use benzine,
paint thinner, or any similar materials.
1
LO
HI
UB1093BB
1-9
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
– CONTINUED –
Rear seats
y Seatbelts provide maximum restraint when
the occupant sits well back and upright in the
seat. Do not put cushions or any other materi-
als between occupants and seatbacks or seat
cushions. If you do so, the risk of sliding under
the lap belt and of the lap belt sliding up over
the abdomen will increase, and both can result
in serious internal injury or death.
y To avoid the possibility of serious injury or
death, passengers must never be allowed to sit
on the rear center console while the vehicle is
in motion. The rear seat of this vehicle is de-
signed for no more than two passengers and is
equipped with only two seatbelts.
y Make sure that the rear seatback is securely
locked. When it is securely locked, the red
marking on the lock is no longer visible. If it is
not locked, the seatback may move forward
when the vehicle is operated.
Rear headrest
Rear headrest are not adjustable, nor removable.
UB0302
UB1153AA
1-10
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
Folding down the rear seat
y After returning the rear seat to its original po-
sition, be certain to place all of the seatbelts
and the tab attached to the seat cushion above
the seat cushion. And make certain that the
shoulder belts are fully visible.
y Make sure that the rear seatback is securely
locked after returning the seatback to its origi-
nal position. When securely locked, the red
marking on the lock is no longer visible. If it is
not locked securely, the rear seatback may fold
down during driving.
y Never allow passengers to ride on the folded
rear seatback. Doing so may result in serious
injury or death.
y Secure skis and other lengthy items properly
to prevent them from being thrown around in-
side the vehicle and causing serious injury dur-
ing a sudden stop, a sudden steering maneuver
or a rapid acceleration.
Never stack luggage or other cargo higher than
the top of the front seatback because it could
tumble forward and injure passengers in the
event of a sudden stop or accident.
HS8005BA
1-11
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
– CONTINUED –
T Folding down the seatback
Before folding down the seatback, check that
there is nothing in the seatback pocket. If there
is something in the pocket, it could be damaged
or cause damage to the seatback and rear cen-
ter console when the seatback is folded.
A) LOCK
B) UNLOCK
1) Red
1. Unlock the seatback by pulling the release knob up
and then fold the seatback down.
1
AB
UB1109BB
UB1110BA
1-12
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
T Folding down the seat cushion and seatback
Before folding down the seatback, check that
there is nothing in the seatback pocket. If there
is something in the pocket, it could be damaged
or cause damage to the seatback and rear cen-
ter console when the seatback is folded.
1. Move the front seat forward.
2. Store the seatbelts in the seatbelt pockets to pre-
vent them from falling below the cushion.
3. Raise the seat cushion by pulling up the tab.
UB1111BA
UB1171BA
UB1172BA
1-13
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
– CONTINUED –
A) LOCK
B) UNLOCK
1) Red
4. Unlock the seatback by pulling the release knob up
and fold the seatback down. Confirm that the pin locat-
ed at the bottom of the seat cushion is inserted into the
slot at the top of the seatback.
Be careful not to pinch your hand or fingers
with the seat cushion or the seatback when per-
forming the fold down operation.
5. To return the rear seat to its original position, raise
the seatback and seat cushion until they lock into
1
AB
UB1112CB UB1113BA
1-14
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
place and make sure that they are securely locked.
Make sure that the rear seatbelt buckles are not under
the seat cushion or seatback, when returning the seat
cushion and the seatback to their original position.
Confirm that the rear seatbelts are stored in the
seatbelt pocket prior to returning the seat cush-
ion to its original position.
Seatbelts
Seatbelt safety tips
y All persons in the vehicle should fasten their
seatbelts BEFORE the vehicle starts to move.
Otherwise, the possibility of serious injury be-
comes greater in the event of a sudden stop or
accident.
y All belts should fit snugly in order to provide
full restraint. Loose fitting belts are not as ef-
fective in preventing or reducing injury.
y Each seatbelt is designed to support only
one person. Never use a single belt for two or
more persons – even children. Otherwise, in an
accident, serious injury or death could result.
y Replace all seatbelt assemblies including re-
tractors and attaching hardware worn by occu-
pants of a vehicle that has been in a serious ac-
cident. The entire assembly should be replaced
even if damage is not obvious.
y Put children aged 12 and under in the rear
seat properly restrained at all times. The SRS
airbag deploys with considerable speed and
force and can injure or even kill children, espe-
1-15
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
– CONTINUED –
cially if they are 12 years of age and under and
are not restrained or improperly restrained. Be-
cause children are lighter and weaker than
adults, their risk of being injured from deploy-
ment is greater. For all these reasons, we
strongly recommend that ALL children (includ-
ing those in child seats and those that have out-
grown child restraint devices) sit in the REAR
seat properly restrained at all times in a child
restraint device or in a seatbelt, whichever is
appropriate for the child’s height and weight.
Secure ALL types of child restraint devices (in-
cluding forward facing child seats) in the REAR
seats at all times.
NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FACING CHILD
SEAT IN THE FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS
SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD
BY PLACING THE CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE
TO THE SRS AIRBAG.
According to accident statistics, children are
safer when properly restrained in the rear seat-
ing positions than in the front seating posi-
tions. For instructions and precautions con-
cerning the child restraint system, see the
“Child restraint systems” section in this chap-
ter.
T Infants or small children
Use a child restraint system that is suitable for your ve-
hicle. See information on “Child restraint systems” in
this chapter.
T Children
If a child is too big for a child restraint system, the child
should sit in the rear seat and be restrained using the
seatbelts. According to accident statistics, children are
safer when properly restrained in the rear seating po-
sitions than in the front seating positions. Never allow
a child to stand up or kneel on the seat.
If the shoulder portion of the belt crosses the face or
neck, move the child closer to the belt buckle to help
provide a good shoulder belt fit. Care must be taken to
securely place the lap belt as low as possible on the
hips and not on the child’s waist. If the shoulder portion
of the belt cannot be properly positioned, a child re-
straint system should be used. Never place the shoul-
der belt under the child’s arm or behind the child’s
back.
1-16
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
T Expectant mothers
Expectant mothers also need to use the seatbelts.
They should consult their doctor for specific recom-
mendations. The lap belt should be worn securely and
as low as possible over the hips, not over the waist.
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)
The driver’s seatbelt has an Emergency Locking Re-
tractor (ELR).
The emergency locking retractor allows normal body
movement but the retractor locks automatically during
a sudden stop, impact or if you pull the belt very quick-
ly out of the retractor.
Automatic/Emergency Locking Retrac-
tor (A/ELR)
Each passenger’s seatbelt has an Automatic/Emer-
gency Locking Retractor (A/ELR). The Automatic/
Emergency Locking Retractor normally functions as
an Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR). The A/ELR
has an additional locking mode “Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) mode” intended to secure a child re-
straint system. When the seatbelt is once drawn out
completely and is then retracted even slightly, the re-
tractor locks the seatbelt in that position and the seat-
belt cannot be extended. As the belt is rewinding,
clicks will be heard which indicate the retractor func-
tions as ALR. When the seatbelt is retracted fully, ALR
mode is released.
When securing a child restraint system on the passen-
gers’ seats, the seatbelt must be changed over to the
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode.
When the child restraint system is removed, make
sure that the retractor is restored to the Emergency
Locking Retractor (ELR) function by allowing the seat-
belt to retract fully.
For instructions on how to convert the retractor to the
ALR mode and restore it to the ELR mode, see the
“Child restraint systems” section in this chapter.
HS1107AA
1-17
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
– CONTINUED –
Seatbelt warning light and chime
Your vehicle is equipped with a seatbelt warning de-
vice at the driver’s seat.
This device causes the seatbelt warning light on the
instrument panel to light up for about six seconds
when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position
to remind the driver to wear the seatbelt. If the driver’s
seatbelt is not fastened, a warning chime sounds at
the same time.
Fastening the seatbelt
y Never use a belt that is twisted or reversed. In
an accident, this can increase the risk or sever-
ity of injury.
y Keep the lap belt as low as possible on your
hips. In a collision, this spreads the force of the
lap belt over stronger hip bones instead of
across the weaker abdomen.
y Seatbelts provide maximum restraint when
the occupant sits well back and upright in the
seat. To reduce the risk of sliding under the
seatbelt in a collision, the front seatbacks
should be always used in the upright position
while the vehicle is running. If the front seat-
backs are not used in the upright position in a
collision, the risk of sliding under the lap belt
and of the lap belt sliding up over the abdomen
will increase, and both can result in serious in-
ternal injury or death.
y Do not put cushions or any other materials
between occupants and seatbacks or seat
cushions. If you do so, the risk of sliding under
the lap belt and of the lap belt sliding up over
the abdomen will increase, and both can result
in serious internal injury or death.
HS1049BA
1-18
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
Never place the shoulder belt under the arm or
behind the back. If an accident occurs, this can
increase the risk or severity of injury.
Metallic parts of the seatbelt can become very
hot in a vehicle that has been closed up in sun-
ny weather; they could burn an occupant. Do
not touch such hot parts until they cool.
T Front seatbelts
1. Adjust the seat position:
Driver’s seat: Adjust the seatback to the upright posi-
tion. Move the seatback as far from the steering wheel
as practical while still maintaining full vehicle control.
Front passenger’s seat: Adjust the seatback to the
upright position. Move the seat as far back as possi-
ble.
2. Sit well back in the seat.
3. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the belt out slowly.
Do not let it get twisted. If the belt stops before reach-
ing the buckle, return the belt slightly and pull it out
more slowly. If the belt still cannot be unlocked, let the
belt retract slightly after giving it a strong pull, then pull
it out slowly again.
4. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle until you
hear a click.
HS1050BA
1-19
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
– CONTINUED –
5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the shoulder
belt.
6. Place the lap belt as low as possible on your hips,
not on your waist.
V Adjusting the front seat shoulder belt anchor
height
The shoulder belt anchor height should be adjusted to
the position best suited for you. To lower the anchor
height, push the release button and slide the anchor
down. To raise the anchor height, slide the anchor up.
Pull down on the anchor to make sure that it is locked
in place.
Always adjust the anchor height so that the shoulder
belt passes over the middle of the shoulder without
touching the neck.
HS1051BA
HS1052BA
1-20
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
When wearing the seatbelts, make sure the
shoulder portion of the webbing does not pass
over your neck. If it does, adjust the seatbelt an-
chor to a lower position. Placing the shoulder
belt over the neck may result in neck injury dur-
ing sudden braking or in a collision.
V Unfastening the seatbelt
Push the button on the buckle.
Before closing the door, make sure that the belts are
retracted properly to avoid catching the belt webbing
in the door.
T Rear seatbelts
1. Sit well back in the seat.
2. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the belt out slowly.
Do not let it get twisted. If the belt stops before reach-
ing the buckle, return the belt slightly and pull it out
more slowly. If the belt still cannot be unlocked, let the
belt retract slightly after giving a strong pull on it, then
pull it out slowly again.
3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle until you
hear a click.
HS1053BA
HS1050BA
1-21
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
– CONTINUED –
4. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the shoulder
belt.
5. Place the lap belt as low as possible on your hips,
not on your waist.
V Unfastening the seatbelt
Push the button on the buckle.
Before closing the door, make sure that the belts are
retracted properly to avoid catching the belt webbing
in the door.
Seatbelt maintenance
y Keep the belts free of polishes, oils, chemi-
cals and particularly battery acid.
y Never attempt to make modifications or
HS1051BA
HS1053BA
1-22
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
changes that will prevent the seatbelt from op-
erating properly.
To clean the seatbelts, use a mild soap and lukewarm
water. Never bleach or dye the belts because this
could seriously affect their strength.
Inspect the seatbelts and attachments including the
webbing and all hardware periodically for cracks, cuts,
gashes, tears, damage, loose bolts or worn areas. Re-
place the seatbelts even if only minor damage is
found.
Seatbelt extender
If the front seatbelts are not long enough to permit the
tongue plate to engage with the seatbelt buckle, an
optional seatbelt extender is available from your
SUBARU dealer. When ordering an extender, only or-
der one particularly designed for your vehicle. Several
different types of extenders are available to match var-
ious varieties of front seatbelt designs. See your
SUBARU dealer for assistance.
The extender adds approximately 8 in (200 mm) of
length and it can be used for either the driver or front
passenger seating position.
Be sure to observe the following when using
the seatbelt extender.
Failure to follow these instructions and warn-
ings could reduce the effectiveness of the seat-
belt and result in more serious injury in the
event of a collision.
y Never use the extender when the belt itself is
long enough to permit it to be buckled properly.
If removal of heavy clothing is all that is needed
to permit the seatbelt to be buckled properly,
remove the heavy clothing and do not use the
1-23
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
– CONTINUED –
extender.
y Do not use the extender if the buckle of the
extender rests over the abdomen.
y Do not let someone else use the extender.
Use of an extender when it is not needed could
reduce the effectiveness of the seatbelt and re-
sult in more serious injury in the event of a col-
lision.
y Use the extender only for the front seatbelts
and only for the model for which it was original-
ly provided. Never use the extender for the rear
seatbelts or for a different model.
NOTE
When the seatbelt extender is used by a pregnant
passenger, consult a doctor to get approval in ad-
vance.
To connect the extender to the seatbelt, insert the
tongue plate into the seatbelt buckle so that the
“PRESS” signs on the buckle-release buttons of the
extender and the seatbelt are both facing outward as
shown in the diagram. You will hear a click when the
tongue plate locks into the buckle.
When releasing the seatbelt, press on the buckle-re-
lease button on the extender, not on the seatbelt. This
helps to prevent damage to the vehicle interior and ex-
tender itself.
For the safety of others, the extender should be re-
moved after each use, especially if the next person us-
ing the seatbelt does not need one.
UZS000BA
1-24
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
Front seatbelt pretensioners
The driver’s and front passenger’s seatbelts have a
seatbelt pretensioner. The seatbelt pretensioners are
designed to be activated in the event of an accident in-
volving a moderate to severe frontal collision.
The pretensioner sensor also serves as a SRS frontal
airbag sensor. If the sensor detects a certain predeter-
mined amount of force during a frontal collision, the
front seatbelt is quickly drawn back in by the retractor
to take up the slack so that the belt more effectively re-
strains the front seat occupant.
When a seatbelt pretensioner is activated, an operat-
ing noise will be heard and a small amount of smoke
will be released. These occurrences are normal and
not harmful. This smoke does not indicate a fire in the
vehicle.
Once the seatbelt pretensioner has been activated,
the seatbelt retractor remains locked. Consequently,
the seatbelt can not be pulled out and retracted and
therefore must be replaced.
NOTE
y Seatbelt pretensioners are not designed to acti-
vate in minor frontal impacts, in side or in rear im-
pacts or in roll-over accidents.
y The driver’s seat and passenger’s seat preten-
sioners and frontal airbag operate simultaneous-
ly.
y Pretensioners are designed to function on a
one-time-only basis. In the event that a preten-
sioner is activated, both the driver’s and front pas-
senger’s seatbelt retractor assemblies must be re-
placed and only by an authorized SUBARU dealer.
When replacing seatbelt retractor assemblies, use
only genuine SUBARU parts.
y If either front seatbelt does not retract or cannot
be pulled out due to a malfunction or activation of
the pretensioner, contact your SUBARU dealer as
soon as possible.
HS1067BA
1-25
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
– CONTINUED –
y If the front seatbelt retractor assembly or sur-
rounding area has been damaged, contact your
SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
y When you sell your vehicle, we urge you to ex-
plain to the buyer that it has seatbelt pretension-
ers by alerting the buyer to the contents of this
section.
y To obtain maximum protection, occupants
should sit in an upright position with their seat-
belts properly fastened. Refer to “Seatbelts”
section in this chapter.
y Do not modify, remove or strike the front
seatbelt retractor assemblies or surrounding
area. This could result in accidental activation
of the seatbelt pretensioners or could make the
system inoperative, possibly resulting in seri-
ous injury. Seatbelt pretensioners have no
user-serviceable parts. For required servicing
of front seatbelt retractors equipped with seat-
belt pretensioners, see your nearest SUBARU
dealer.
y When discarding front seatbelt retractor as-
semblies or scrapping the entire vehicle due to
collision damage or for other reasons, consult
your SUBARU dealer.
System monitors
SRS airbag system warning light
A diagnostic system continually monitors the readi-
ness of the seatbelt pretensioner while the vehicle is
being driven. The seatbelt pretensioners share the
control module with the airbag system. Therefore, if
any malfunction occurs in a seatbelt pretensioner, the
SRS airbag system warning light will illuminate. The
SRS airbag system warning light will show normal sys-
tem operation by lighting for about 6 seconds when
UB4010EA
1-26
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
the ignition key is turned to the “ON” position.
The following components are monitored by the indi-
cator:
y Front sub sensor (Right hand side)
y Front sub sensor (Left hand side)
y Airbag control module (including impact sensors)
y Seatbelt pretensioner (Driver’s side)
y Seatbelt pretensioner (Passenger’s side)
y All related wiring
If the warning light exhibits any of the following
conditions, there may be a malfunction in the
seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS airbag sys-
tem. Immediately take your vehicle to your
nearest SUBARU dealer to have the system
checked. Unless checked and properly re-
paired, the seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS
airbag will not operate properly in the event of
a collision, which may increase the risk of inju-
ry.
y Flashing or flickering of the indicator light.
y No illumination of the warning light when the
ignition switch is first turned to the “ON” posi-
tion.
y Continuous illumination of the warning light.
y Illumination of the warning light while driv-
ing.
System servicing
y When discarding a seatbelt retractor assem-
bly or scrapping the entire vehicle damaged by
a collision, consult your SUBARU dealer.
y Tampering with or disconnecting the sys-
tem’s wiring could result in accidental activa-
tion of the seatbelt pretensioner and/or airbag
or could make the system inoperative, which
may result in serious injury. The wiring har-
nesses of the seatbelt pretensioner and SRS
airbag systems are covered with yellow insula-
tion and the connectors of the system are yel-
low for easy identification. Do not use electrical
test equipment on any circuit related to the
seatbelt pretensioner and airbag systems. For
required servicing of the seatbelt pretensioner,
see your nearest SUBARU dealer.
1-27
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
– CONTINUED –
The front sub sensors are located in both front
fenders and the airbag control module includ-
ing the impact sensors is located under the
center console. If you need service or repair in
those areas or near the front seatbelt retrac-
tors, we recommend that you have an autho-
rized SUBARU dealer perform the work.
NOTE
If the front part of the vehicle is damaged in an ac-
cident to the extent that the seatbelt pretensioner
does not operate, contact your SUBARU dealer as
soon as possible.
Precautions against vehicle modifica-
tion
Always consult your SUBARU dealer if you want to in-
stall any accessory parts to your vehicle.
Do not perform any of the following modifica-
tions. Such modifications can interfere with
proper operation of the seatbelt pertensioners.
y Attachment of any equipment (bush bar,
winches, snow plow, skid plate, etc.) other than
genuine SUBARU accessory parts to the front
end.
y Modification of the suspension system or
front end structure.
y Installation of a tire of different size and con-
struction from the tires specified on the tire
placard attached to the door jamb.
1-28
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
Child restraint systems
Infants and small children should always be placed in
an infant or child restraint system in the rear seat while
riding in the vehicle. You should use an infant or child
restraint system that meets Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards or Canada Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards, is compatible with your vehicle and is ap-
propriate for the child’s age and size. All child restraint
systems are designed to be secured in vehicle seats
by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt
(except those covered under the section in this manu-
al, entitled “Installation of child restraint systems by
use of lower and tether anchorages (LATCH)”).
Children could be endangered in an accident if their
child restraints are not properly secured in the vehicle.
When installing the child restraint system, carefully fol-
low the manufacturer’s instructions.
According to accident statistics, children are safer
when properly restrained in the rear seating positions
than in the front seating positions.
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces require that in-
fants and small children be restrained in an approved
child restraint system at all times while the vehicle is
moving.
UB1173BA
HS1069BA
1-29
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
– CONTINUED –
Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her
lap while the vehicle is moving. The passenger
cannot protect the child from injury in a colli-
sion, because the child will be caught between
the passenger and objects inside the vehicle.
Additionally, holding a child in your lap or arms
in the front seat exposes that child to another
serious danger. Since the SRS airbag deploys
with considerable speed and force, the child
could be injured or even killed.
Children should be properly restrained at all
times. Never allow a child to stand up, or to
kneel on any seat. Unrestrained children will be
thrown forward during sudden stop or in an ac-
cident and can be injured seriously.
Additionally, children standing up or kneeling
on or in front of the front seat are exposed an-
other serious danger. Since the SRS airbag de-
ploys with considerable speed and force, the
child could be injured or even killed.
Where to place a child restraint system
The following are SUBARU’s recommendations on
where to place a child restraint system in your vehicle.
HS1070BA
1-30
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
A: Front passenger’s seat
You should not install a child restraint system due to
the hazard to children posed by the passenger’s air-
bag.
B: Rear seat
Recommended positions for all types of child restraint
systems.
In these positions, Automatic/Emergency Locking Re-
tractor (A/ELR) seatbelts and lower anchorage bars
are provided for installing a child restraint system.
y Put children aged 12 and under in the rear
seat properly restrained at all times. The SRS
airbag deploys with considerable speed and
force and can injure or even kill children, espe-
cially if they are 12 years of age and under and
are not restrained or improperly restrained. Be-
cause children are lighter and weaker than
adults, their risk of being injured from deploy-
ment is greater.
For that reason, be sure to secure ALL types of
child restraint devices (including forward fac-
ing child seats) in the REAR seats at all times.
You should choose a restraint device which is
appropriate for the child’s age, height and
weight. According to accident statistics, chil-
dren are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the front seating
positions.
UB1170AA
1-31
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
– CONTINUED –
SINCE YOUR VEHICLE IS EQUIPPED WITH A
PASSENGER’S SRS AIRBAG, DO NOT IN-
STALL A REARWARD FACING CHILD SAFETY
SEAT IN THE FRONT PASSENGER’S SEAT.
DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH
TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE CHILD’S
HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.
Choosing a child restraint system
Choose a child restraint system that is appropriate for
the child’s age and size (weight and height) in order to
provide the child with proper protection. The child re-
straint system should meet all applicable requirements
of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards for United
States or Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standards for
Canada. It can be identified by locking for the label on
the child restraint system or the manufacture’s state-
ment of compliance in the document attached to the
system. Also it is important for you to make sure that
the child restraint system is compatible with the vehi-
cle in which it will be used.
HS1072BA
UBS108AA
1-32
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
Installing child restraint systems with
A/ELR seatbelt
y Child restraint systems and seatbelts can be-
come hot in a vehicle that has been closed up
in sunny weather; they could burn a small child.
Check the child restraint system before you
place a child in it.
y Do not leave an unsecured child restraint
system in your vehicle. Unsecured child re-
straint systems can be thrown around inside of
the vehicle in a sudden stop, turn or accident; it
can strike and injure vehicle occupants as well
as result in serious injuries or death to the
child.
When you install a child restraint system, fol-
low the manufacturer’s instructions supplied
with it. After installing the child restraint sys-
tem, check to ensure that it is held securely in
position. If it is not held tight and secure, the
danger of your child suffering personal injury in
the event of an accident may be increased.
T Installing a rearward facing child restraint
1. Place the child restraint system in the rear seating
position.
2. Run the lap and shoulder belt through or around
the child restraint system following the instructions
provided by its manufacturer.
3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle until you
hear a click.
UBS109BA
1-33
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
– CONTINUED –
4. Take up the slack in the lap belt.
5. Pull out the seatbelt fully from the retractor to
change the retractor over from the Emergency Lock-
ing Retractor (ELR) to the Automatic Locking Retrac-
tor (ALR) function. Then, allow the belt to rewind into
the retractor. As the belt is rewinding, clicks will be
heard which indicate the retractor functions as ALR.
6. Push and pull the child restraint system forward
and from side to side to check if it is firmly secured.
Sometimes a child restraint can be more firmly se-
cured by pushing it down into the seat cushion and
then tightening the seatbelt.
7. Pull at the shoulder portion of the belt to confirm
that it cannot be pulled out (ALR properly functioning).
UBS110BA UBS111BA
1-34
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
8. To remove the child restraint system, press the re-
lease button on the seatbelt buckle and allow the belt
to retract completely. The belt will return to the ELR
mode.
NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FACING CHILD
SEAT IN THE FRONT PASSENGER’S SEAT.
DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH
TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE CHILD’S
HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.
NOTE
When the child restraint system is no longer in
use, remove it and restore the ELR function of the
retractor. The function is restored by retracting
the seatbelt fully.
T Installing forward facing child restraint sys-
tems with seatbelt and tether anchorages
When you install a child restraint system, fol-
low the manufacturer’s instructions supplied
with it. After installing the child restraint sys-
tem, check to ensure that it is held securely in
UG1089BA
UB1148BA
1-35
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
– CONTINUED –
position. If it is not held tight and secure, the
danger of your child suffering personal injury in
the event of an accident may be increased.
1. Place the child restraint system in the seating posi-
tion on the rear seat cushion.
2. Pull the seatback locking knob and fold the seat-
back forward to see the tether anchorage on the back-
side of the seatback.
UB1134CA
1-36
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
3. Connect the tether belt hook onto the tether an-
chorage on the backside of the seatback. Take up any
slack in the tether belt after connecting it to the tether
anchorage.
4. Put the other end of the tether belt through under
the headrest.
5. Return the seatback to the locked position. Confirm
that the red mark on the locking knob is no longer vis-
ible and check that the seatback is securely locked by
moving it back and forth.
6. Run the lap and shoulder belt through the child re-
straint system following the instructions provided by its
manufacturer.
UB1144BA UB1146BA
1-37
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
– CONTINUED –
7. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle.
8. Take up the slack in the lap belt.
9. Pull out the seatbelt fully from the retractor to
change the retractor over from the Emergency Lock-
ing Retractor (ELR) to the Automatic Locking Retrac-
tor (ALR) function. Then allow the belt to rewind into
the retractor. As the belt is rewinding, clicks will be
heard which indicate the retractor function as ALR.
10.While pushing the child restraint into the seat cush-
ion and moving it back and forth and right and left,
tighten the seatbelt securely by taking up the slack in
the belt.
UB1145BA
UB1155BA
UB1156CA
1-38
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
11.While pushing the child restraint into the seat cush-
ion and moving it back and forth, pull the upper tether
belt straight up to secure the child restraint system
firmly by taking up the slack in the belt.
12.The loose end of the tether belt should be placed
into the gap on the backside of the seatback.
13.Before having a child sit in the child restraint sys-
tem, move it back and forth and right and left to check
if it is firmly secured.
14.To remove the child restraint system, follow the re-
verse procedures of installation. Unbuckle the seatbelt
and allow the belt to retract completely. The belt will
return to the ELR mode.
If you have any question concerning proper child re-
straint system installation, ask your SUBARU dealer.
NOTE
When the child restraint system is no longer in
use, remove it and restore the ELR function of the
retractor. The function is restored by retracting
the seatbelt fully.
T Installation of forward facing child restraint by
seatbelt only
1. Place the child restraint system on the seat.
2. Run the lap and shoulder belt through or around
the child restraint system following the instructions
provided by its manufacturer.
UB1147BA
UB1148CA
1-39
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
– CONTINUED –
3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle.
4. Take up the slack in the lap belt.
5. Pull out the seatbelt fully from the retractor to
change the retractor over from the Emergency Lock-
ing Retractor (ELR) to the Automatic Locking Retrac-
tor (ALR) function. Then allow the belt to rewind into
the retractor. As the belt is rewinding, clicks will be
heard which indicate the retractor function as ALR.
6. While pushing the child restraint into the seat cush-
ion and moving it back and forth and right and left,
tighten the seatbelt securely by taking up the slack in
the belt.
7. Before having a child sit in the child restraint sys-
tem, move it back and forth and right and left to check
if it is firmly secured.
UB1145BA
UB1155CA
UB1156BA
1-40
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
8. To remove the child restraint system, press the re-
lease button on the seatbelt buckle and allow the belt
to retract completely. The belt will return to ELR mode.
If you have any question concerning proper child re-
straint system installation, ask your SUBARU dealer.
NOTE
When the child restraint system is no longer in
use, remove it and restore the ELR function of the
retractor. The function is restored by retracting
the seatbelt fully.
Installation of child restraint systems
by use of lower and tether anchorages
(LATCH)
y Child restraint systems and seatbelts can be-
come hot in a vehicle that has been closed up
in sunny weather; they could burn a small child.
Check the child restraint system before you
place a child in it.
y Do not leave an unsecured child restraint
system in your vehicle. Unsecured child re-
straint systems can be thrown around inside of
the vehicle in a sudden stop, turn or accident; it
can strike and injure vehicle occupants as well
as result in serious injuries or death to the
child.
When you install a child restraint system, fol-
low the manufacturer’s instructions supplied
with it. After installing the child restraint sys-
tem, check to ensure that it is held securely in
position. If it is not held tight and secure, the
danger of your child suffering personal injury in
the event of an accident may be increased.
1-41
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
– CONTINUED –
Some types of child restraint systems can be installed
on the rear seat of your vehicle without use of the seat-
belts. Such child restraint systems are secured to the
dedicated anchorages provided on the vehicle body.
The lower and tether anchorages are sometimes re-
ferred to as the LATCH system (Lower Anchors and
Tethers for CHildren).
Your vehicle is equipped with four lower anchorages
(bars) on the back panel behind the markings on the
bottom part of the rear seatback and two upper an-
chorages (tether anchorages) on the back side of the
seatback for accommodating such child restraint sys-
tems.
The lower anchorages (bars) are used for installing a
child restraint system on the rear seat. For each seat-
ing position of the rear seat, two lower anchorages are
provided.
The tether anchorages (upper anchorages) are also
provided for each seating position of the rear seat.
You will find marks “ ” at the bottom of the rear
seat seatbacks. These marks indicate the positions of
the lower anchorages (bars).
UB1154CA
UB1174BA
1-42
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
Each lower anchorage is located where the seat cush-
ion meets the seatback.
1. Place the child restraint system on the rear seat
cushion.
2. Unlock the rear seatback locking knob and fold the
seatback forward to see the tether anchorages on the
backside of the seatback.
UB1133BA
UB1134CA
1-43
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
– CONTINUED –
3. Connect the hook of the upper tether belt onto the
tether anchorage on the backside of the seatback. Do
not allow slack in the tether belt.
4. Put the other end of the tether belt through under
the headrest.
5. Return the seatback to the locked position. Confirm
that the red mark on the locking knob is no longer vis-
ible and check if the seatback has been securely
locked by moving it back and forth.
UB1144BA UB1146BA
1-44
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
6. While following the instructions supplied by the
child restraint system manufacturer, connect the lower
hooks onto the lower anchorages located at “ ”
marks on the bottom of the rear seatback. When the
hooks are connected, make sure the adjacent seat-
belts are not caught.
7. [If your child restraint system is of a flexible attach-
ment type (which uses tether belts to connect the child
restraint system properly to the lower anchorages)]
While pushing the child restraint into the seat cushion,
pull both left and right lower tether belts up to secure
the child restraint system firmly by taking up the slack
in the belt.
UB1158BA
UB1131BA
1-45
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
– CONTINUED –
8. Pull the upper tether belt straight up to secure the
child restraint system firmly by taking up the slack in
the belt.
9. Put the loose end of the tether belts behind the
seatback.
10.Before seating a child in the child restraint system,
try to move seatback and forth and left and right to ver-
ify that it is held securely in position.
11.To remove the child restraint system, follow the re-
verse procedures of installation.
If you have any question concerning proper child re-
straint system installation, ask your SUBARU dealer.
Installing a booster seat
y Child restraint systems and seatbelts can be-
come hot in a vehicle that has been closed up
in sunny weather; they could burn a small child.
Check the child restraint system before you
place a child in it.
y Do not leave an unsecured child restraint
system in your vehicle. Unsecured child re-
straint systems can be thrown around inside of
the vehicle in a sudden stop, turn or accident; it
can strike and injure vehicle occupants as well
as result in serious injuries or death to the
child.
When you install a child restraint system, fol-
low the manufacturer’s instructions supplied
with it. After installing the child restraint sys-
tem, check to ensure that it is held securely in
position. If it is not held tight and secure, the
danger of your child suffering personal injury in
UB1147BA
1-46
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
the event of an accident may be increased.
1. Place the booster seat in the rear seating position
and sit the child on it. The child should sit well back on
the booster seat.
2. Run the lap and shoulder belt through or around
the booster seat and the child following the instruc-
tions provided by its manufacturer.
3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle until you
hear a click. Take care not to twist the seatbelt.
Make sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the
center of child’s shoulder and that the lap belt is posi-
tioned as low as possible on the child’s hips.
4. To remove the booster seat, press the release but-
ton on the seatbelt buckle and allow the belt to retract.
y Never use a belt that is twisted or reversed. In
an accident, this can increase the risk or sever-
ity of injury to the child.
y Never place the shoulder belt under the
child’s arm or behind the child’s back. If an ac-
cident occurs, this can increase the risk or se-
verity of injury to the child.
y The seatbelt should fit snugly in order to pro-
vide full restraint. Loose fitting belts are not as
UB1128BA
UB1152BA
1-47
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
– CONTINUED –
effective in preventing or reducing injury.
y Place the lap belt as low as possible on the
child’s hips. A high-positioned lap belt will in-
crease the risk of sliding under the lap belt and
of the lap belt sliding up over the abdomen, and
both can result in serious internal injury or
death.
y Make sure the shoulder belt is positioned
across the center of child’s shoulder. Placing
the shoulder belt over the neck may result in
neck injury during sudden braking or in a colli-
sion.
*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint
System airbag)
*SRS: This stands for supplemental restraint system.
This name is used because the airbag system supple-
ments the vehicle’s seatbelts.
Vehicle with driver’s and front passen-
ger’s SRS airbags and lap/shoulder re-
straints
Your vehicle is equipped with a supplemental restraint
system in addition to a lap/shoulder belt at each front
seating position.
The supplemental restraint system (SRS) consists of
two airbags (driver’s and front passenger’s frontal air-
bags).
These SRS airbags are designed only as a supple-
ment to the primary protection provided by the
seatbelt.
The system also controls front seatbelt pretensioners.
For operation, instructions are precautions concerning
the seatbelt pretensioner, see the “Front seatbelt pre-
tensioners” section in this chapter.
1-48
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
y To obtain maximum protection in the event of
an accident, the driver and all passengers in the
vehicle should always wear seatbelts when the
vehicle is moving. The SRS airbag is designed
only as a supplement to the primary protection
provided by the seatbelt. It does not do away
with the need to fasten seatbelts. In combina-
tion with the seatbelts, it offers the best com-
bined protection in case of a serious accident.
Not wearing a seatbelt increases the chance of
severe injury or death in a crash even when the
vehicle has the SRS airbag.
For instructions and precautions concerning
the seatbelt system, see the “Seatbelts” sec-
tions in this chapter.
y Do not sit or lean unnecessarily close to the
SRS airbag. Because the SRS airbag deploys
with considerable speed – faster than the blink
of an eye – and force to protect in high speed
collisions, the force of an airbag can injure an
occupant whose body is too close to SRS air-
bag.
It is also important to wear your seatbelt to help
avoid injuries that can result when the SRS air-
bag contacts an occupant not in proper posi-
tion such as one thrown forward during pre-ac-
cident braking.
Even when properly positioned, there remains
a possibility that an occupant may suffer minor
injury such as abrasions and bruises to the
face or arms because of the SRS airbag deploy-
ment force.
y The SRS airbags deploy with considerable
speed and force. Occupants who are out of
proper position when the SRS airbag deploys
could suffer very serious injuries. Because the
SRS airbag needs enough space for deploy-
ment, the driver should always sit upright and
well back in the seat as far from the steering
wheel as practical while still maintaining full ve-
hicle control and the front passenger should
move the seat as far back as possible and sit
upright and well back in the seat.
y Do not place any objects over or near the
SRS airbag cover or between you and the SRS
airbag. If the SRS airbag deploys, those objects
could interfere with its proper operation and
could be propelled inside the vehicle and cause
injury.
1-49
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
– CONTINUED –
Put children aged 12 and under in the rear seat
properly restrained at all times. The SRS airbag
deploys with considerable speed and force and
can injure or even kill children, especially if
they are 12 years of age and under and are not
restrained or improperly restrained. Because
children are lighter and weaker than adults,
their risk of being injured from deployment is
greater.
For that reason, we strongly recommend that
ALL children (including those in child seats and
those that have outgrown child restraint devic-
es) sit in the REAR seat properly restrained at
all times in a child restraint device or in a seat-
belt, whichever is appropriate for the child’s
age, height and weight.
Secure ALL types of child restraint devices (in-
cluding forward facing child seats) in the REAR
seats at all times.
According to accident statistics, children are
safer when properly restrained in the rear seat-
ing positions than in the front seating posi-
tions.
For instructions and precautions concerning
the child restraint system, see the “Child re-
straint systems” section in this chapter.
y NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FACING
CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT SEAT. DOING SO
RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO THE
CHILD BY PLACING THE CHILD’S HEAD TOO
CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.
y Never allow a child to stand up, or to kneel on
the front passenger’s seat, or never hold a child
on your lap or in your arms. The SRS airbag de-
ploys with considerable force and can injure or
even kill the child.
HS1034BA
1-50
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
y When the SRS airbag deploys, some smoke
will be released. This smoke could cause
breathing problems for people with a history of
asthma or other breathing trouble. If you or
your passengers have breathing problems after
SRS airbag deploys, get fresh air promptly.
y A deploying SRS airbag releases hot gas. Oc-
cupants could get burnt if they come into direct
contact with the hot gas.
NOTE
When you sell your vehicle, we urge you to explain
to the buyer that it is equipped with SRS airbags
by alerting him to the applicable section in this
owner’s manual.
1-51
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
– CONTINUED –
T Components
21
4
3
5
7
6
UB1135BB
1) Airbag control module (including
impact sensors)
2) Airbag module (driver’s side)
3) Airbag module (passenger’s
side)
4) Front sub sensor (left hand side)
5) Front sub sensor (right hand
side)
6) Seatbelt pretensioner (driver’s
side)
7) Seatbelt pretensioner (passen-
ger’s side)
1-52
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
SRS frontal airbag
The driver’s SRS frontal airbag is stowed in the center
portion of the steering wheel. The passenger’s SRS
frontal airbag is stowed near the top of the dashboard
under an “SRS AIRBAG” mark.
In a moderate to severe frontal collision, the driver’s
and front passenger’s SRS frontal airbags deploy and
supplement the seatbelts by reducing the impact on
the driver’s and front passenger’s head and chest.
NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FACING CHILD
SAFETY SEAT IN THE FRONT SEAT. DOING SO
RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO THE
CHILD BY PLACING THE CHILD’S HEAD TOO
CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.
Never allow a child to stand up, or to kneel on
the front passenger’s seat. The SRS airbag de-
ploys with considerable force and can injure or
even kill the child.
HS1072BA
HS1070BA
1-53
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
– CONTINUED –
Never hold a child on your lap or in your arms.
The SRS airbag deploys with considerable
force and can injure or even kill the child.
The SRS airbag deploys with considerable
speed and force. Occupants who are out of
proper position when the SRS airbag deploys
could suffer very serious injuries. Because the
SRS airbag needs enough space for deploy-
ment, the driver should always sit upright and
well back in the seat as far from the steering
wheel as practical while still maintaining full ve-
hicle control and the front passenger should
move the seat as far back as possible and sit
upright and well back in the seat.
It is also important to wear your seatbelt to help
HS1069BA HS1084BA
1-54
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
avoid injuries that can result when the SRS air-
bag contacts an occupant not in proper posi-
tion such as one thrown toward the front of the
vehicle during pre-accident braking.
Do not put any objects over the steering wheel
pad and dashboard. If the SRS frontal airbag
deploys, those objects could interfere with its
proper operation and could be propelled inside
the vehicle and cause injury.
Do not attach accessories to the windshield, or
fit an extra-wide mirror over the rear view mir-
ror. If the SRS airbag deploys, those objects
could become projectiles that could seriously
injure vehicle occupants.
HS1085BA
HS1086BA
1-55
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
– CONTINUED –
T Operation
A) Driver’s side
B) Passenger’s side
1) SRS airbags deploy as soon as a collision occurs.
2) After deployment, SRS airbags start to deflate immediately so that the driver’s vision is not obstructed.
A
B
1
2
HS1087BB
1-56
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
The SRS airbag can function only when the ignition
switch is in the “ON” position.
If the front sub sensors inside the both front fenders
and the impact sensors in the airbag control module
detect a certain predetermined amount of force during
a frontal collision, the control module sends signals to
the frontal airbag modules instructing them to inflate
the SRS frontal airbags. Then both airbag modules
produce gas, which instantly inflates driver’s and pas-
senger’s SRS frontal airbags. After the deployment,
the SRS airbags immediately start to deflate so that
the driver’s vision is not obstructed. The time required
from detecting impact to the deflation of the SRS air-
bag after deployment is shorter than the blink of an
eye.
The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag deploys to-
gether with driver’s SRS frontal airbag even when no
one occupies the front passenger’s seat.
When the SRS frontal airbags deploy, the driver’s and
front passenger’s seatbelt pretensioners operate at
the same time.
Although it is highly unlikely that the SRS airbag would
activate in a non-accident situation, should it occur,
the SRS airbag will deflate quickly, not obscuring vi-
sion and will not interfere with the driver’s ability to
maintain control of the vehicle.
When the SRS airbag deploys, a sudden, fairly loud
inflation noise will be heard and some smoke will be
released. These occurrences are normal result of the
deployment. This smoke does not indicate a fire in the
vehicle.
Do not touch the SRS airbag system compo-
nents around the steering wheel and dash-
board with bare hands right after deployment.
Doing so can cause burns because the compo-
nents can be very hot as a result of deployment.
The SRS frontal airbag is designed to deploy in the
event of an accident involving a moderate to severe
frontal collision. It is basically not designed to deploy
in lesser frontal impacts because the necessary pro-
tection can be achieved by the seatbelt alone. Also, it
is basically not designed to deploy in side or rear im-
pacts or in roll-over accidents because deployment of
the SRS frontal airbag would not help the occupant in
those situations. The SRS airbag is designed to func-
tion on a one-time-only basis.
SRS airbag deployment depends on the level of force
1-57
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
– CONTINUED –
experienced in the passenger compartment during a
collision. That level differs from one type of collision to
another, and it may have no bearing on the visible
damage done to the vehicle itself.
V Examples of accident in which the SRS frontal
airbag will most likely deploy.
A head-on collision against a thick concrete wall at a
vehicle speed of 12 to 19 mph (20 to 30 km/h) or high-
er activates the SRS frontal airbag. The SRS frontal
airbag will also be activated when the vehicle is ex-
posed to a frontal impact similar in fashion and magni-
tude to the above-mentioned collision.
V Examples of the types of accidents in which it
is possible that the SRS frontal airbag will de-
ploy.
UB1136BA
UB1137BA
1-58
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
The SRS frontal airbag may be activated when the ve-
hicle sustains a hard impact in the undercarriage area
from the road surface (such as when the vehicle
plunges into a deep ditch, is severely bumped or
knocked hard against an obstacle on the road such as
a curb).
V Examples of the types of accidents in which the
SRS frontal airbag is unlikely to deploy.
There are many types of collisions which might not
necessarily require SRS frontal airbag deployment. If
the vehicle strikes an object, such as a telephone pole
UB1138BA
UB1161BA
1-59
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
– CONTINUED –
or sign pole, or if it slides under a truck’s load bed, or
if it sustains an oblique offset frontal impact, the SRS
frontal airbag may not deploy depending on the level
of accident forces involved.
V Examples of the types of accidents in which the
SRS frontal airbag will basically not deploy.
The SRS frontal airbag is basically not designed to de-
ploy if the vehicle is struck from side or from behind, or
if it rolls onto its side or roof, or if it is involved in a low-
UB1162BA
1-60
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
speed frontal collision.
1) First impact!
2) Second impact!!
In an accident where the vehicle is impacted more
than once, the SRS frontal airbag deploys only once.
Example: In the case of a double collision, first with an-
other vehicle, then against a concrete wall in immedi-
ate succession, once the SRS frontal airbag is activat-
ed on the first impact, it will not be activated on the
second.
SRS airbag system monitors
SRS airbag system warning light
A diagnostic system continually monitors the readi-
ness of the SRS airbag system (including front seat-
belt pretensioners) while the vehicle is being driven.
The SRS airbag system warning light “AIRBAG” will
show normal system operation by lighting for about 6
seconds when the ignition key is turned to the “ON”
position.
The following components are monitored by the indi-
cator:
y Front sub sensor (Right hand side)
1
2
UB1143BB
UB4010EA
1-61
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
– CONTINUED –
y Front sub sensor (Left hand side)
y Airbag control module (including impact sensors)
y Frontal airbag module (Driver’s side)
y Frontal airbag module (Front passenger’s side)
y Seatbelt pretensioner (Driver’s side)
y Seatbelt pretensioner (Front passenger’s side)
y All related wiring
If the warning light exhibits any of the following
conditions, there may be a malfunction in the
seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS airbag sys-
tem. Immediately take your vehicle to your
nearest SUBARU dealer to have the system
checked. Unless checked and properly re-
paired, the seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS
airbag will not operate properly in the event of
a collision, which may increase the risk of inju-
ry.
y Flashing or flickering of the indicator light.
y No illumination of the warning light when the
ignition switch is first turned to the “ON” posi-
tion.
y Continuous illumination of the warning light.
y Illumination of the warning light while driv-
ing.
SRS airbag system servicing
y When discarding an airbag module or scrap-
ping the entire vehicle damaged by a collision,
consult your SUBARU dealer.
y The SRS airbag has no user-serviceable
parts. Do not use electrical test equipment on
any circuit related to the SRS airbag system.
For required servicing of the SRS airbag, see
your nearest SUBARU dealer. Tampering with
or disconnecting the system’s wiring could re-
sult in accidental inflation of the SRS airbag or
could make the system inoperative, which may
result in serious injury. The wiring harnesses of
the SRS airbag system are covered with yellow
insulation and system connectors are yellow
for easy identification.
If you need service or repair in areas listed be-
1-62
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
low, we recommend that you have an autho-
rized SUBARU dealer perform the work. The
SRS airbag control module, impact sensors
and airbag modules are stored in these areas.
y Under the center console
y Inside each front fender
y Steering wheel and column and nearby areas
y Top of the dashboard on front passenger’s
side and nearby areas
y Inside each center pillar
In the event that the SRS airbag is deployed, re-
placement of the system should be performed
only by an authorized SUBARU dealer. When the
components of the SRS airbag system are re-
placed, use only genuine SUBARU parts.
To ensure their long-term reliability, the SRS airbags
must be inspected by a SUBARU dealer ten years af-
ter the date of manufacture, which is shown on the cer-
tification label attached to the driver’s door.
NOTE
In the following cases, contact your SUBARU deal-
er as soon as possible.
y The front part of the vehicle was involved in an
accident in which the SRS frontal airbags did not
deploy.
y The pad section of the steering wheel or front
passenger’s frontal airbag cover is scratched,
cracked, or otherwise damaged.
Precautions against vehicle modifica-
tion
y To avoid accidental activation of the system
or rendering the system inoperative, which may
result in serious injury, no modifications
should be made to any components or wiring of
the SRS airbag system.
This includes following modifications:
y Installation of custom steering wheels
y Attachment of additional trim materials to
the dashboard
y Installation of additional electrical/electronic
equipment such as a mobile two-way radio on
or near the SRS airbag system components
and/or wiring is not advisable. This could inter-
fere with proper operation of the SRS airbag
system.
1-63
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
– CONTINUED –
Do not perform any of the following modifica-
tions. Such modifications can interfere with
proper operation of the SRS airbag system.
y Attachment of any equipment (brush bar,
winches, snow plow, skid plate, etc.) other than
genuine SUBARU accessory parts to the front
end.
y Modification of the suspension system or
front end structure.
y Installation of a tire of different size and con-
struction from the tires specified on the tire
placard attached to the driver’s door jamb.
Always consult your SUBARU dealer if you want to in-
stall any accessory parts to your vehicle.
2-1
2
Keys and doors
Keys ............................................................... 2-2
Key number ....................................................... 2-2
Door locks ..................................................... 2-3
Locking and unlocking from the outside ........ 2-3
Locking and unlocking from the inside .......... 2-4
Power door locking switches ...................... 2-5
Remote keyless entry system
(if equipped) .............................................. 2-7
Locking the doors ............................................. 2-8
Unlocking the doors ......................................... 2-8
Illuminated entry ............................................... 2-9
Vehicle finder function ..................................... 2-9
Sounding a panic alarm ................................... 2-9
Selecting audible signal operation .................. 2-9
Replacing the battery ....................................... 2-10
Replacing lost transmitters .............................. 2-11
Security system (if equipped) ..................... 2-15
System operation .............................................. 2-15
Arming the system ............................................ 2-15
Disarming the system ....................................... 2-17
Sounding a panic alarm ................................... 2-18
Valet mode ......................................................... 2-18
Passive arming .................................................. 2-18
Child safety locks ......................................... 2-21
Windows ........................................................ 2-22
Power windows ................................................. 2-22
Tailgate .......................................................... 2-25
License plate bracket ....................................... 2-26
Switchback door ........................................... 2-27
Switchback door indicator light ...................... 2-31
Moonroof (if equipped) ................................. 2-31
Tilting/sliding moonroof ................................... 2-32
Sun shade .......................................................... 2-33
2-2
Keys and doors
Keys and doors
Keys
1) Master key
2) Submaster key
3) Valet key
4) Key number plate
Three types of keys are provided for your vehicle.
Master key, submaster key and valet key.
The master key and submaster key fit all locks on your
vehicle.
y Ignition switch
y Doors
y Glove box
The valet key fits only the ignition switch and door
locks. You can keep glove box locked when you leave
your vehicle and valet key at a parking facility.
NOTE
If the key is attached to a keyholder or to a large
bunch of other keys, centrifugal force may act on
it as the vehicle moves, resulting in unwanted
turning of the ignition switch. Also, if a large key-
holder is attached to the key, your knees or hands
may accidentally touch it in a way that turns the ig-
nition switch.
Key number
The key number is stamped on the metal plate at-
tached to the key set. Write down the key number and
keep it in another safe place, not in the vehicle. This
number is needed to make a replacement key if you
lose your key or lock it inside the vehicle.
1
2
3
4
HS2011BB
2-3
Keys and doors
– CONTINUED –
Door locks
Locking and unlocking from the out-
side
To lock the door from the outside with the key, insert
the key into the keyhole and turn the key toward the
rear. To unlock the door, turn the key toward the front.
Lift the outside door handle to open an unlocked door.
Locking without the key
1) Rotate the lock lever rearward.
2) Close the door.
OM-U2394
1
2
UB2024BD
2-4
Keys and doors
Locking without the key
1) Push the power door locking switch forward.
2) Close the door.
To lock the door from the outside without the key, ro-
tate the lock lever rearward and then close the door.
To lock the door from the outside using the power door
locking switch, push the switch forward (“LOCK” side)
and then close the door. In this case, all closed doors
are locked at the same time.
Always make sure that all doors are locked before
leaving your vehicle.
NOTE
Make sure that you do not leave the key inside the
vehicle before locking the doors from the outside
without the key.
Locking and unlocking from the inside
Keep all doors locked when you drive, especial-
ly when small children are in your vehicle.
Along with the proper use of seatbelts and child
restraints, locking the doors reduces the
chance of being thrown out of the vehicle in an
accident.
It also helps prevent passengers from falling
out if a door is accidentally opened, and intrud-
ers from unexpectedly opening doors and en-
tering your vehicle.
1
2
UB2024CB
2-5
Keys and doors
– CONTINUED –
1) Lock
2) Unlock
To lock the door from the inside, rotate the lock lever
rearward. To unlock the door from the inside, rotate
the lock lever forward.
The red mark on the lock lever appears when the door
is unlocked.
Pull the inside door handle to open an unlocked door.
Always make sure that all doors are closed and locked
before starting to drive.
Power door locking switches
Driver’s switch
1) Lock
2) Unlock
12
UB2001BC
1
2
UB2008CB
2-6
Keys and doors
Front passenger’s switch
1) Lock
2) Unlock
All doors can be locked and unlocked by the power
door locking switches located at the driver’s side and
the front passenger’s side doors.
To lock the doors, push the switch forward.
To unlock the doors, push the switch rearward.
When you close the doors after you set the door locks,
the doors remain locked.
NOTE
Make sure that you do not leave the key inside the
vehicle before locking the doors from the outside
using power door locking switches.
1
2
UB2009BB
2-7
Keys and doors
– CONTINUED –
Remote keyless entry system (if
equipped)
y Do not expose the transmitter to severe
shocks, such as those experienced as a result
of dropping or throwing.
y Do not take the transmitter apart except when
replacing the battery.
y Do not get the transmitter wet. If it gets wet,
wipe it dry with a cloth immediately.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Oper-
ation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
This device may not cause harmful interference,
and (2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Two transmitters are provided for your vehicle.
The keyless entry system has the following functions.
y Locking and unlocking the doors without a key
y Sounding a panic alarm
y Arming and disarming the security system (if your
vehicle is equipped with an optional security system).
See the next section “Security system (if equipped)”
for detailed information.
The operable distance of the keyless entry system is
approximately 30 feet (10 meters). However, this dis-
tance will vary depending on environmental condi-
tions. The system’s operable distance will be shorter
in areas near a facility or electronic equipment emitting
strong radio waves such as a power plant, broadcast
station, TV tower, or remote controller of home elec-
tronic appliances.
The keyless entry system does not operate when the
key is inserted in the ignition switch.
2-8
Keys and doors
A: “LOCK/ARM” button (Orange)
Press to lock all doors.
Press and Hold to activate panic alarm.
Press three times in a five second period to use vehi-
cle finder function.
B: “UNLOCK/DISARM” button (Blue)
1) Press once to Unlock driver’s door.
2) Press a second time to Unlock all other doors.
C: LED
Locking the doors
Briefly press the “LOCK/ARM” button (for less than
two seconds) to lock all doors. An electronic chirp will
sound once and the turn signal lights will flash once.
If any of the doors is not fully closed, an electronic
chirp will sound five times and the turn signal lights will
flash five times to alert you that the doors are not prop-
erly closed. When you close the door, it will automati-
cally lock.
NOTE
If the “LOCK/ALARM” button is pressed for two
seconds or longer, the panic alarm will sound.
When locking the doors in normal circumstances,
press the “LOCK/ALARM” button for less than two
seconds. For details on the panic alarm, refer to
“Sounding a panic alarm”.
Unlocking the doors
Briefly press the “UNLOCK/DISARM” button (for less
than two seconds) to unlock the driver’s door. An elec-
tronic chirp will sound twice and the turn signal lights
will flash twice. To unlock all doors, briefly press the
“UNLOCK/DISARM” button a second time within 5
seconds.
NOTE
If the interval between the first and second press-
es of the “UNLOCK/DISARM” button (for unlock-
ing of all of the doors) is extremely short, the sys-
tem may not respond.
C
A
B1
B2
HS2016BB
2-9
Keys and doors
– CONTINUED –
Illuminated entry
The interior (dome) light will illuminate when the “UN-
LOCK/DISARM” button is pressed. These lights stay
illuminated for approximately 30 seconds if any of the
doors is not opened.
If the “LOCK/ARM” button is pressed before 30 sec-
onds have elapsed, these lights will go out. Also, these
lights will go out if the key is inserted in the ignition
switch. The interior light switch must be set to the mid-
dle position in order for this function to operate.
Vehicle finder function
Use this function to find your vehicle parked among
many vehicles in a large parking lot. Provided you are
within 30 feet (10 meters) of the vehicle, pressing the
“LOCK/ARM” button three times in a five-second peri-
od will cause your vehicle’s horn to sound once and its
turn signal lights to flash three times.
Sounding a panic alarm
To activate the alarm, keep the “LOCK/ARM” button
pressed for more than two seconds.
The horn will sound and the turn signal lights will flash.
To deactivate it, press the “LOCK/ARM” button or
“UNLOCK/DISARM” button. Unless a button on the re-
mote is pressed, the alarm will be deactivated after ap-
proximately 30 seconds.
Selecting audible signal operation
Using an electronic chirp, the system will give you an
audible signal when the doors lock and unlock. If de-
sired, you may turn the audible signal off.
To turn the audible signal off, unlock the doors by
pushing “UNLOCK/DISARM” button and then simulta-
neously depress “LOCK/ARM” and “UNLOCK/DIS-
ARM” buttons for more than two seconds. An electron-
ic chirp will sound twice and the turn signal lights will
flash twice to inform you that the audible signal has
been turned off.
To turn the audible signal on, unlock the doors by
pushing “UNLOCK/DISARM” button and then simulta-
neously depress “LOCK/ARM” and “UNLOCK/DIS-
ARM” buttons for more than two seconds. An electron-
ic chirp will sound once and the turn signal lights will
flash once to inform you that the audible signal has
been turned on.
2-10
Keys and doors
Replacing the battery
Do not let dust, oil or water get on or in the
transmitter when replacing the battery.
When the transmitter battery begins to get weak,
transmitter range will begin to decrease and the LED
will not illuminate. Replace the battery as soon as pos-
sible.
To replace the battery:
1. Remove the two screws on the back of the trans-
mitter case by using a Phillips screwdriver.
2. Separate the case.
3. Remove the old battery from the holder.
1) Positive (+) side facing up
4. Replace with a new battery (Type CR2032 or
equivalent) making sure to install the new battery with
the positive (+) side facing up.
5. Install the back half of the transmitter case.
6. Reinstall the two screws on the back of the trans-
mitter case.
After the battery is replaced, the transmitter must
be synchronized with the keyless entry system’s
control unit. Press either the “LOCK/ARM” or “UN-
HS2017BA
1
HS2018BB
2-11
Keys and doors
– CONTINUED –
LOCK/DISARM” button six times to synchronize
the unit.
Replacing lost transmitters
If you lose a transmitter or want to purchase additional
transmitters (up to four can be programmed), you
should re-program all of your transmitters for security
reasons. It is recommended that you have your dealer
program all of your transmitters into your system.
T Programming the transmitters
The keyless entry system is equipped with a special
code learning feature that allows you to program new
transmitter codes into the system or to delete old
ones. The system can learn up to four unique transmit-
ter codes. The four transmitter codes may be the
same or different.
To enter the programming mode:
0
1. Press “UNLOCK/DISARM” button to disarm the se-
curity system. (if your vehicle is equipped with the op-
tional security system.)
HS2016CA
2-12
Keys and doors
2. Open the driver’s door and sit in the driver’s seat.
3. Close the driver’s door.
1) ON
2) LOCK
4. Place the ignition key into the ignition switch and
cycle the switch from LOCK to ON ten times within 15
seconds. Be sure to stop at the LOCK position. The
horn will sound once to indicate that you are in the
transmitter programming mode.
NOTE
You must finish the next step (opening the driver’s
door) within 45 seconds of starting this proce-
dures.
3
2
HS2019BD
1
2
HS2020BB
2-13
Keys and doors
– CONTINUED –
To program the transmitters:
0
1. Open the driver’s door.
2. Close the driver’s door.
1) Press any button.
3. Press and release any button on the transmitter
that you wish to program into the system. The horn will
sound twice to indicate that the transmitter has been
programmed.
Any additional transmitters can also be programmed
at this time. Repeat steps 1 through 3 for an additional
transmitter.
To exit the programming mode:
1. After all of your transmitters are programmed, re-
move the key from the ignition switch.
The horn will sound three times to indicate that the
1
2
HS2019BE
1
HS2016DB
2-14
Keys and doors
system has exited the programming mode.
2. Make sure that the keyless entry system properly
operates by operating each transmitter.
T Deleting old transmitter codes
The control unit of the keyless entry system has four
memory locations to store transmitter codes, giving it
the ability to operate with up to four transmitters. When
you lose a transmitter, the lost transmitter’s code re-
mains in the memory. For security reasons, lost trans-
mitter codes should be deleted from the memory.
To delete old transmitter codes, program four trans-
mitter codes into the system. If you have only one cur-
rent transmitter, program it four times. If you have two
current transmitters, program each one twice. If you
have three current transmitters, program two of them
once and the third one twice. This process will leave
only current transmitter codes in the system’s memo-
ry.
NOTE
Make sure no one else is operating their keyless
entry system within range of your vehicle when
programming transmitters. If someone else were
to operate their remote transmitter while you are
programming your transmitters, it is possible that
their transmitter code will be programmed into
your system, allowing them unauthorized access
to your vehicle.
2-15
Keys and doors
– CONTINUED –
Security system (if equipped)
The security system helps to protect your vehicle and
valuables from theft. The horn sounds and the turn
signal lights flash if someone attempts to break into
your vehicle. The starter motor is also interrupted to
prevent starting the vehicle without a key.
The system can be armed and disarmed with the re-
mote transmitter.
The system does not operate when the key is inserted
into the ignition switch.
System operation
The security system will give the following alarm indi-
cations when triggered:
y The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will
sound intermittently. In addition, the starter motor will
not operate.
y The alarm automatically resets after 30 seconds;
however, the alarm will reactivate if the vehicle is tam-
pered with again. The alarm will continue for six times
if any sensor continues to be activated.
The alarm is triggered by:
y Opening a door.
y Application of physical shock to the vehicle (e.g.
breaking glass or forced entry). Note that there are two
alarm levels for shock: warning and alarm. In warning
mode, the alarm detects lower level vibrations and
triggers 2 warning chirps on the horn and two flashes
on the lights as a deterrent to would be vandals. In
alarm mode, higher levels of shock are detected and
the system will go into full alarm.
y Ignition switch being turned on while in armed state.
NOTE
y The alarm will not be triggered by opening the
switchback door.
y The alarm may not be triggered when the win-
dow is broken with a sharp-edged tool.
y With the valet mode selected, the security sys-
tem does not operate and the turn signal lights do
not flash when the remote transmitter is used for
locking and unlocking.
The security system indicator light in the combi-
nation meter flashes twice per second to show
that the valet mode is selected.
For details, refer to “Valet mode” in this section.
Arming the system
T To arm the system using remote transmitter
1. Close all windows and moonroof.
2-16
Keys and doors
2. Remove the key from the ignition switch.
3. Open the doors and get out of the vehicle.
4. Make sure that the engine hood and switchback
door are locked.
5. Close all doors.
1) Press to Arm the system.
2) Press to Disarm the system.
1) Security system indicator light
6. Briefly press the “LOCK/ARM” button (for less than
two seconds). All doors will lock, an electronic chirp
will sound once, the turn signal lights will flash once
and the indicator light starts flashing slowly (approxi-
mately once every two seconds).
If any of the doors (except the switchback door) is not
fully closed, an electronic chirp sounds five times, the
turn signal lights flash five times to alert you that the
doors are not properly closed. When you close the
door, the system will automatically arm and doors will
automatically lock.
1
2
HS2016EB
1
UB2033BB
2-17
Keys and doors
– CONTINUED –
T To arm the system using power door locking
switches
1. Close all windows and moonroof.
2. Remove the key from the ignition switch.
3. Open the doors and get out of the vehicle.
4. Make sure that the engine hood and switchback
door are locked.
5. Close the doors but leave only the driver’s door or
the front passenger’s door open.
6. Push the power door locking switch forward
(“LOCK” side) to set the door locks.
7. Close the door. An electronic chirp will sound once,
the turn signal lights will flash once and the indicator
light will start flashing slowly (approximately once ev-
ery two seconds) to inform you that the system has
armed.
NOTE
The system can be armed even if the engine hood,
the windows, the switchback door and/or moon-
roof are open. Always make sure that they are fully
closed before arming the system.
Disarming the system
Briefly press the “UNLOCK/DISARM” button (for less
than two seconds) on the remote transmitter. The driv-
er’s door will unlock, an electronic chirp will sound
twice, the turn signal lights will flash twice and the in-
dicator light will go off.
To unlock all other doors, briefly press the “UNLOCK/
DISARM” button a second time.
T Emergency disarming
If you cannot disarm the system using the transmitter
(i.e. the transmitter is lost, broken or the transmitter
battery is too weak), you can disarm the system with-
out using the transmitter.
To disarm the system:
1. Unlock the door with the key and then open the
door.
6
7
UB2024CC
2-18
Keys and doors
2. The alarm will sound.
3. Insert the key into the ignition switch and cycle it
from “LOCK” to “ON” three (3) times within 5 sec-
onds.
Sounding a panic alarm
To activate the alarm, keep the “LOCK/ARM” button
pressed for more than two seconds.
The horn will sound and the turn signal lights will flash.
To deactivate it, press the “LOCK/ARM” button or
“UNLOCK/DISARM” button.
Unless a button on the remote is pressed, the alarm
will be deactivated after approximately 30 seconds.
Valet mode
When you choose the valet mode, the security system
does not operate. In valet mode, the remote transmit-
ter is used only for locking and unlocking the doors
and panic activation.
To enter the valet mode, open the driver’s door and
keep the “UNLOCK/DISARM” button depressed for
more than two seconds. The security system indica-
tor light will continue to flash 2 times per second indi-
cating that the system is in the valet mode.
To exit valet mode, open the driver’s door and keep
the “UNLOCK/DISARM” button pressed for more
than two seconds. The indicator will stop flashing.
Passive arming
When passive arming mode has been programmed by
the dealer, arming of the system is automatically ac-
complished without using the remote transmitter. Note
that in this mode, DOORS MUST BE MANUALLY
LOCKED.
T To enter the passive mode
Since programming the passive arming mode is a
complicated procedure, have it done by your nearest
SUBARU dealer.
T Arming the system
In passive mode, the system will automatically
activate the alarm but WILL NOT automatically
lock the doors. In order to lock the doors you
must either lock them as indicated in step 4 be-
low or with the key once they have been closed.
Failure to lock the doors manually will result in
a higher security risk.
2-19
Keys and doors
– CONTINUED –
1. Turn the ignition switch to “ON”.
1) ON
2) LOCK
2. Turn the ignition switch from “ON” to “LOCK” and
remove the key from the ignition switch.
3. Open the doors and get out of the vehicle.
4. Before closing the doors, lock all doors with the in-
side door lock levers.
5. Close the doors. The system will automatically arm
after one minute.
In the passive mode, the system can also be armed
with the remote transmitter or with the power door
locking switches. If the remote transmitter or power
door lock switch is used to lock the vehicle, arming will
take place immediately regardless of whether or not
the passive mode has been selected.
T Disarming the system
To disarm the system, briefly press the “UNLOCK/
1
2
HS2024BC
4
3
5
UB2024DC
2-20
Keys and doors
DISARM” button on the transmitter.
T Tripped sensor identification
If an electronic chirp sounds four times and the turn
signal lights flash four times when you disarm the sys-
tem, this indicates that the alarm was triggered. The
number of times the indicator light flashes indicates
what sensor caused the alarm condition.
To enter identification mode:
1. Open the driver’s door and leave it open.
2. Turn the ignition switch to “ON” twice. (“LOCK” →
“ON” → “LOCK” → “ON” → “LOCK”)
3. The indicator light will start flashing.
The indicator light provides the following indications.
Flashing once: Any door has been opened.
Flashing three times: The impact sensor in the sys-
tem’s unit has been activated. This may indicate that
your vehicle has been shocked or tampered with by
some outside force and/or unauthorized person.
Flashing four times: The ignition switch has been
turned on or the battery has been disconnected.
NOTE
The battery must be reconnected before the indi-
cator light will flash.
To exit this mode, close the door and turn the ignition
switch to “ON”.
2-21
Keys and doors
– CONTINUED –
Child safety locks
Always use the child safety lock whenever a
child rides in the rear seat. Serious injury could
result if a child accidentally opened the door
and fell out.
1) Lock
2) Unlock
Each rear door has a child safety lock that prevents
the doors from being opened even if the inside door
handle is pulled.
When the child safety lock lever is in the lock position,
the door cannot be opened from inside regardless of
the position of the inner door handle lock lever. The
door can only be opened from the outside.
1
2
UB2002BB
2-22
Keys and doors
Windows
Power windows
To avoid serious personal injury caused by en-
trapment, you must do the following.
y When operating the power windows, be ex-
tremely careful to prevent anyone’s fingers,
arms, neck or head from being caught in the
window.
y Always lock the passengers’ windows using
the lock switch when children are riding in the
vehicle.
y Before leaving the vehicle, always remove
the key from the ignition switch for safety and
never allow an unattended child to remain in
the vehicle. Failure to follow this procedure
could result in injury to a child operating the
power window.
The power windows operate only when the ignition
switch is in the “ON” position.
T Driver’s side switches
1) Lock switch
2) For driver’s window
3) For rear left passenger’s window
4) For front passenger’s window
5) For rear right passenger’s window
All door windows can be controlled by the power win-
dow switch cluster at the driver side door.
1
2
3
4
5
UB2008BB
2-23
Keys and doors
– CONTINUED –
V Operating the driver’s window
1) Lock
2) Unlock
3) Close
4) Open
5) Automatically open
To open:
Push the switch down lightly and hold it. The window
will open as long as the switch is held.
This switch also has a one-touch auto down feature
that allows the window to be opened fully without hold-
ing the switch.
Push the switch down until it clicks and release it, and
the window will fully open. To stop the window half-
way, pull the switch up lightly.
To close:
Pull the switch up lightly and hold it. The window will
close as long as the switch is held.
V Operating the passengers’ windows
To open the passengers’ windows, push the appropri-
ate switch down and hold it until the window reaches
the desired position. To close the window, pull the
switch up and hold it until it reaches the desired posi-
tion.
V Locking the passengers’ windows
To lock the passengers’ windows, push the lock
switch. When the lock switch is in the “LOCK” position,
the passengers’ windows cannot be opened or closed.
1
2
3
4
5
3
4
UB2008DB
2-24
Keys and doors
T Passengers’ side switches
Front passenger’s window switch
1) Open
2) Close
Rear passenger’s window switches
1) Open
2) Close
To open the window, push the switch down and hold it
until the window reaches the desired position. To
close the window, pull the switch up and hold it until
the window reaches the desired position.
When the lock switch on the power window switch
cluster, located on the driver’s side door, is in the
“LOCK” position, the passengers’ windows cannot be
operated with the passengers’ switches.
1
2
UB2009CB
2
1
UB2005BB
2-25
Keys and doors
– CONTINUED –
Tailgate
Keep the tailgate closed when the vehicle is
moving. If you must drive with the tailgate
open, use the optional SUBARU Bed Extender
and place the License Plate Bracket at its fully
lowered/open position. Cargo must not stick
out beyond the Extender. Otherwise a danger-
ous road hazard or personal injury could result.
Before opening the tailgate, remove any object on the
upper surface of the rear bumper to avoid damaging
the tailgate.
To open the tailgate, lift up on its handle while pulling
the tailgate toward you. The support cables hold the
tailgate open.
See “Loading your vehicle” section in Chapter 8 for
precautions in loading cargo.
To close the tailgate, firmly push it upward until it latch-
es.
After you put the tailgate back up, pull it back toward
you to be sure it latches securely.
UB2050BA
2-26
Keys and doors
License plate bracket
When you drive with the tailgate open and with the bed
extender used, the license plate bracket must be
placed at its fully lowered/open position to make the
rear license plate visible.
In order to avoid damaging the license plate
bracket or the bumper, the license plate bracket
must be in its fully lowered/open position be-
fore the tailgate is lowered.
To use the license plate bracket at its lowered/open
UB2051BA
UBB096BA
UB2053BA
2-27
Keys and doors
– CONTINUED –
position, push the two release buttons and pull the li-
cense plate bracket up until it clicks. And then open
the tailgate.
If your vehicle is equipped with a trailer hitch, remove
the ball mount from the hitch receiver tube before
opening the tailgate. Failure to follow this procedure
could result in damage to the license plate bracket.
When you drive with the tailgate closed, the license
plate bracket must be restored to its original position.
To restore the license plate bracket to its original posi-
tion, close the tailgate, and then pull the license plate
bracket down until it clicks.
If the license plate bracket is hard to be restored to its
original position, mud may have accumulated on the
back of the license plate bracket. Remove accumulat-
ed mud before pulling the license bracket down.
In order to avoid damaging the license plate
bracket or the bumper, the license plate bracket
must be restored to its original position until it
clicks.
Switchback door
With the switchback door open, you can increase the
usable cargo space and can carry long objects.
Secure long objects properly to prevent them
from sliding forward and causing serious injury
during a sudden stop or sharp cornering. Tie
long objects down with a rope or something
equivalent.
UB2052BA
2-29
Keys and doors
– CONTINUED –
2. Unlock the rear seatback by pulling up on the knob
and fold down the rear seatback. Confirm that the pins
located at the bottom of the seat cushion is inserted
into the slots at the top of the seatback.
3. Fold down the switchback door by releasing the
UB1113BA UB1114BA
UB1115BA
2-30
Keys and doors
lock knob. Then you can have a flat and larger cargo
space.
4. Place the long object on the cargo bed through the
switchback door opening.
Be sure all items are secured in place.
NOTE
y When opening the switchback door in snow, ac-
cumulated snow in the cargo bed may enter the
passenger compartment which could result in
dampness in the passenger compartment. Prior to
opening of the switchback door, brush off the
snow completely.
y Close the switchback door whenever you leave
the vehicle to prevent unauthorized entry.
The switchback door should be kept complete-
ly shut when the vehicle is idling in an enclosed
or partially enclosed area to avoid the possibil-
ity of exhaust gas entering the passenger com-
partment. Engine exhaust gas contains carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas which
is extremely dangerous, or even lethal if in-
haled. To ensure that exhaust gas cannot pen-
etrate the switchback door, make certain that
there are no obstructions between the door and
the vehicle body that prevent the door from ful-
ly closing or that crimp the weather strip
around the door.
To close the switchback door, firmly push it upward
until it latches.
Return the seatback and seat cushion to their original
positions and make sure they are securely locked.
After returning the seatback to its original posi-
tion, make sure that the rear seatback has been
securely locked. When securely locked, the red
marks on the locking knobs are no longer visi-
ble.
2-31
Keys and doors
– CONTINUED –
Switchback door indicator light
While the ignition switch is in the “ON” position, the
switchback door indicator light comes on when the
switchback door is open.
While the ignition switch is in the “LOCK” or “ACC” po-
sition, the switchback door indicator light flashes for
about 20 seconds and goes off when the switchback
door is open.
Moonroof (if equipped)
Never let anyone’s hands, arms, head or any
objects protrude from the moonroof. A person
could be seriously injured if the vehicle stops
suddenly or turns sharply or if the vehicle is in-
volved in an accident.
To avoid serious personal injury caused by en-
trapment, you must do the following.
y Before closing the moonroof, make sure that
no one’s hands, arms, neck, head or other ob-
jects will be accidentally caught in the moon-
roof.
y Before leaving the vehicle, always remove
the key from the ignition switch for safety and
never allow an unattended child to remain in
the vehicle. Failure to follow this procedure
could result in injury to a child operating the
moonroof.
y Do not sit on the edge of the open moonroof.
UB7023EA
2-32
Keys and doors
y Do not operate the moonroof if falling snow
or extremely cold conditions have caused it to
freeze shut.
Tilting/sliding moonroof
The moonroof has both tilting and sliding functions.
The moonroof operates only when the ignition switch
is in the “ON” position.
1) Open/Close switch
2) Tilt switch
T To raise or lower the moonroof
The tilting function will only operate when the moon-
roof is fully closed.
Push the rear side of the “Tilt” switch to raise the
moonroof.
Push the front side of the “Tilt” switch to lower the
moonroof.
Release the switch after the moonroof has been
raised or has been lowered completely. Pushing the
switch continuously may cause damage to the moon-
roof.
T To open or close the moonroof
Push the “Open/Close” switch rearward to open the
moonroof. The sun shade will be also opened together
with the moonroof.
Push the “Open/Close” switch forward to close the
moonroof. The moonroof will stop halfway if you con-
tinue to press on the switch.
Release the switch once and push it again to close the
moonroof completely.
After washing the vehicle or after it rains, wipe away
water on the roof prior to opening the moonroof to pre-
vent water drops from falling into the passenger com-
partment.
NOTE
If the moonroof cannot be closed through the
switch operation because of system failure, it can
1
2
UB2034BB
2-33
Keys and doors
– CONTINUED –
be closed manually using a hex-headed wrench.
For the procedure, refer to “Moonroof – if the
moonroof cannot be closed” in Chapter 9 “In case
of emergency”.
Sun shade
The sun shade can be slid forward or backward by
hand while the moonroof is closed.
If the moonroof is opened, the sun shade also moves
back.
UG2510BA
3-1
3
Instruments and controls
Ignition switch .............................................. 3-2
LOCK .................................................................. 3-2
ACC .................................................................... 3-3
ON ....................................................................... 3-3
START ................................................................ 3-4
Key reminder chime .......................................... 3-4
Ignition switch light (if equipped) .................... 3-4
Key interlock release (AT vehicles) ................. 3-4
Hazard warning flasher ................................ 3-5
Meters and gauges ....................................... 3-6
Speedometer ..................................................... 3-6
Odometer/Trip meter ........................................ 3-6
Tachometer ........................................................ 3-7
Outside temperature indicator (if equipped) .. 3-7
Fuel gauge ......................................................... 3-8
Temperature gauge ........................................... 3-8
Warning and indicator lights ....................... 3-9
Seatbelt warning light and chime .................... 3-9
SRS airbag system warning light .................... 3-10
CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction
indicator lamp ................................................. 3-10
Charge warning light ........................................ 3-11
Oil pressure warning light ................................ 3-12
AT OIL TEMPerature warning light
(AT vehicles) ................................................... 3-12
ABS warning light ............................................. 3-12
Brake system warning light ............................. 3-13
Door ajar warning lights ................................... 3-14
Switchback door indicator light ...................... 3-14
Low fuel warning light ...................................... 3-14
All-Wheel Drive warning light (AT vehicles) ... 3-14
Security system status indicator light
(if equipped) .................................................... 3-15
Selector lever position indicator
(AT vehicles) ................................................... 3-15
Gear position indicator (Turbo-AT vehicles) .. 3-16
Turn signal indicator lights .............................. 3-16
High beam indicator light ................................. 3-16
Cargo lamp indicator light ............................... 3-16
Cruise control set indicator light .................... 3-16
Clock .............................................................. 3-17
Light control switch ...................................... 3-18
Headlights ......................................................... 3-18
High/low beam change (dimmer) .................... 3-19
Headlight flasher ............................................... 3-19
Daytime running light system ......................... 3-20
Turn signal lever ........................................... 3-20
Illumination brightness control ................... 3-21
Parking light switch ...................................... 3-22
Fog light button ............................................. 3-23
Wiper and washer ......................................... 3-23
Windshield wiper and washer switches ......... 3-25
Rear window defogger button ..................... 3-26
Windshield wiper deicer (if equipped) ........ 3-27
Mirrors ............................................................ 3-28
Inside mirror ...................................................... 3-28
Outside mirrors ................................................. 3-30
Tilt steering wheel ......................................... 3-33
Horn ................................................................ 3-34
3-2
Instruments and controls
Instrume nts and c ontrols
Ignition switch
Never turn the ignition switch to “LOCK” while
the vehicle is being driven or towed because
that will lock the steering wheel, preventing
steering control. And when the engine is turned
off, it takes a much greater effort than usual to
steer.
The ignition switch has four positions: LOCK, ACC,
ON and START.
NOTE
y Keep the ignition switch in the “LOCK” position
when the engine is not running.
y Using electrical accessories for a long time with
the ignition switch in the “ON” or “ACC” position
can cause the battery to go dead.
If the ignition switch will not move from the
“LOCK” position to the “ACC” position, turn the
steering wheel slightly to the left and right as you
turn the ignition switch.
y If the key is attached to a keyholder or to a large
bunch of other keys, centrifugal force may act on
it as the vehicle moves, resulting in unwanted
turning of the ignition switch. Also, if a large key-
holder is attached to the key, your knees or hands
may accidentally touch it in a way that turns the ig-
nition switch.
LOCK
The key can only be inserted or removed in this posi-
tion. The ignition switch will lock the steering wheel
when you remove the key.
If turning the key is difficult, turn the steering wheel
slightly to the right and left as you turn the key.
UB4000CA
3-3
Instruments and controls
– CONTINUED –
T Automatic transmission vehicles The key can be turned from “ACC” to “LOCK” only
when the selector lever is in the “P” position.
T Manual transmission vehicles
The key can be turned from “ACC” to “LOCK” only
when the key is pushed in while turning it.
ACC
In this position the electrical accessories (radio, ciga-
rette lighter socket, etc.) can be used.
ON
This is the normal operating position after the engine
HS3015BA
HS2020CA
HS2020DA
3-4
Instruments and controls
is started.
START
Do not turn the ignition switch to the “START”
position while the engine is running.
The engine is started in this position. The starter
cranks the engine to start it. When the key is released
(after the engine has started), the key automatically
returns to the “ON” position.
Key reminder chime
The reminder chime sounds when the driver’s door
opens and the key is in the “LOCK” or “ACC” positions.
The chime stops when the key is removed from the ig-
nition switch.
Ignition switch light (if equipped)
For easy access to the ignition switch in the dark, the
ignition switch light comes on when driver’s door is
opened. The light remains on for 10 seconds and goes
out after driver’s door is closed or if the key is turned
to the “ON” position.
Key interlock release (AT vehicles)
If the key can not be turned to the “LOCK” position
even when the selector lever is in the “P” position:
1. Take out the screwdriver from the tool bag.
2. Remove the cover under the steering column using
a Phillips screwdriver.
HS3016BA
3-5
Instruments and controls
– CONTINUED –
3. Turn the ignition key while pressing the key inter-
lock release lever.
Take your vehicle to the nearest SUBARU dealer im-
mediately to have the key interlock system repaired.
Hazard warning flasher
The hazard warning flasher is used to warn other driv-
ers when you have to park your vehicle under emer-
gency conditions. The hazard warning flasher works
with the ignition switch in any position.
To turn on the hazard warning flasher, push the haz-
ard warning button on the instrument panel. To turn off
the flasher, push the button again.
NOTE
When the hazard warning flasher is on, the turn
signals do not work.
UG3025BA
UB8002BA
3-6
Instruments and controls
Meters and gauges
Speedometer
The speedometer shows the vehicle speed.
Odometer/Trip meter
To ensure safety, do not attempt to change the
function of the indicator during driving, as an
accident could result.
1) Trip meter
2) Odometer
T Odometer
The odometer shows the total distance that the vehicle
has been driven.
1
2
UB3026BB
3-7
Instruments and controls
– CONTINUED –
T Double trip meter
1) A trip meter
2) B trip meter
The trip meter shows the distance that the vehicle has
been driven since you last set it to zero.
To change the mode indication, briefly push the knob.
Each press of the knob changes the function alter-
nately.
To set the trip meter to zero, select either the A trip or
B trip meter and push the knob and keep it pushed for
more than 1 second.
NOTE
If the connection between the combination meter
and battery is broken for any reason such as vehi-
cle maintenance or fuse replacement, the data re-
corded on the trip meter will be lost.
Tachometer
Do not operate the engine with the pointer of
the tachometer in the red zone. In this range,
fuel injection will be cut by the engine control
module to protect the engine from overrevving.
The engine will resume running normally after
the engine speed is reduced below the red
zone.
The tachometer shows the engine speed in thousands
of revolutions per minute.
Outside temperature indicator (if
equipped)
The outside temperature indicator shows the outside
1
2
UB3027BB
A trip meter B trip meter
3-8
Instruments and controls
temperature in a range from –22 to 122°F (–30 to
50°C).
The indicator can give a false reading under any of the
following conditions:
y When there is too much sun.
y During idling; while running at low speeds in a traffic
jam; when the engine is restarted immediately follow-
ing a shutdown.
y When the actual outside temperature falls outside
the specified indicator range.
Fuel gauge
The fuel gauge shows the approximate amount of fuel
remaining in the tank.
The gauge does not return to “E” even though the ig-
nition switch is in the “ACC” or “LOCK” position.
The gauge may move slightly during braking, turning
or acceleration due to fuel level movement in the tank.
Temperature gauge
If the pointer exceeds the normal operating
range, safely stop the vehicle as soon as possi-
ble.
See “In case of emergency” in chapter 9.
1) Normal operating range
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temper-
ature when the ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
The coolant temperature will vary in accordance with
the outside temperature and driving conditions.
We recommend that you drive moderately until the
pointer of the temperature gauge reaches near the
middle of the range. Engine operation is optimum with
1
UB2012BB
3-9
Instruments and controls
– CONTINUED –
the engine coolant at this temperature range and high
revving operation when the engine is not warmed up
enough should be avoided.
Warning and indicator lights
Several of the warning and indicator lights come on
momentarily and then go out when the ignition switch
is initially turned to the “ON” position. This permits
checking the operation of the bulbs.
Apply the parking brake and turn the ignition switch to
the “ON” position. The following lights come on:
Seatbelt warning light
SRS airbag system warning light
CHECK ENGINE warning light / Malfunction indica-
tor lamp
Charge warning light
Oil pressure warning light
AT OIL temperature warning light (AT vehicles)
ABS warning light
Brake system warning light
All-Wheel Drive warning light (AT vehicles)
If any lights fail to come on, it indicates a burned-out
bulb or a malfunction of the corresponding system.
Consult your authorized SUBARU dealer for repair.
Seatbelt warning light and chime
When the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position,
the seatbelt warning light will come on and the remind-
3-10
Instruments and controls
er chime will sound for about six seconds to remind the
driver to fasten the seatbelt.
The seatbelt warning light remains on for about six
seconds and turns off automatically after six seconds.
The seatbelt reminder chime will turn off when the
driver’s side seatbelt is buckled or it will turn off auto-
matically after six seconds.
SRS airbag system warning
light
If the warning light exhibits any of the following
conditions, there may be a malfunction in the
seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS airbag sys-
tem. Immediately take your vehicle to your
nearest SUBARU dealer to have the system
checked. Unless checked and properly re-
paired, the seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS
airbag will not operate properly in the event of
a collision, which may increase the risk of inju-
ry.
y Flashing or flickering of the indicator light.
y No illumination of the warning light when the
ignition switch is first turned to the “ON” posi-
tion.
y Continuous illumination of the warning light.
y Illumination of the warning light while driv-
ing.
When the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position,
the SRS airbag system warning light will come on for
about six seconds and go out. This shows the SRS
frontal airbag and seatbelt pretensioners are in normal
operation.
CHECK ENGINE warning light/
Malfunction indicator lamp
If the CHECK ENGINE light comes on while you
are driving, have your vehicle checked/repaired
by your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
Continued vehicle operation without having the
emission control system checked and repaired
as necessary could cause serious damage,
which may not be covered by your vehicle’s
warranty.
If this light comes on steadily or blinks while the engine
3-11
Instruments and controls
– CONTINUED –
is running, it may indicate that there is a problem or po-
tential problem somewhere in the emission control
system.
T If the light comes on steadily:
If the light comes on steadily while driving or does not
go out after the engine starts, an emission control sys-
tem malfunction has been detected.
You should have your vehicle checked by an autho-
rized SUBARU dealer immediately.
NOTE
This light also comes on when the fuel filler cap is
not tightened until it clicks.
If you have recently refueled your vehicle, the cause of
the CHECK ENGINE warning light/malfunction indica-
tor lamp coming on could be a loose or missing fuel fill-
er cap. Remove the cap and retighten it until it clicks.
Make sure nothing is interfering with the sealing of the
cap. Tightening the cap will not make the CHECK EN-
GINE warning light turn off immediately. It may take
several driving trips. If the light does not go out, take
your vehicle to your authorized SUBARU dealer im-
mediately.
T If the light is blinking:
If the light is blinking while driving, an engine misfire
condition has been detected which may damage the
emission control system.
To prevent serious damage to the emission control
system, you should do the following:
y Reduce vehicle speed.
y Avoid hard acceleration.
y Avoid steep uphill grades.
y Reduce the amount of cargo, if possible.
y Stop towing a trailer as soon as possible.
The CHECK ENGINE warning light may stop blinking
and come on steadily after several driving trips. You
should have your vehicle checked by an authorized
SUBARU dealer immediately.
Charge warning light
If this light comes on when the engine is running, it
may indicate that the charging system is not working
properly.
If the light comes on while driving or does not go out
after the engine starts, stop the engine at the first safe
opportunity and check the alternator belt. If the belt is
loose, broken or if the belt is in good condition but the
light remains on, contact your nearest SUBARU deal-
er immediately.
3-12
Instruments and controls
Oil pressure warning light
Do not operate the engine with the oil pressure
warning light on. This may cause serious en-
gine damage.
If this light comes on when the engine is running, it
may indicate that the engine oil pressure is low and the
lubricating system is not working properly.
If the light comes on while driving or does not go out
after the engine starts, stop the engine at the first safe
opportunity and check the engine oil level. If the oil lev-
el is low, add oil immediately. If the engine oil is at the
proper level but the light remains on, contact your
nearest SUBARU dealer immediately.
AT OIL TEMPerature warning
light (AT vehicles)
The AT oil temperature warning light comes on when
the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position and
goes out after about two seconds.
If this light comes on when the engine is running, it
may indicate that the automatic transmission fluid tem-
perature is too hot.
If the light comes on while driving, it is unnecessary to
stop the vehicle, but avoid driving up steep grades or
in stop and go traffic.
T Automatic transmission control system warn-
ing
If the light flashes after the engine starts, it may indi-
cate that the automatic transmission control system is
not working properly. Contact your nearest SUBARU
dealer for service immediately.
ABS warning light
The ABS warning light comes on when the ignition
switch is turned to the “ON” position and goes out after
about two seconds.
This is an indication that the ABS system is working
properly.
If the warning light behaves as follows, the ABS
system may not work properly.
When the warning light is on, the ABS function
shuts down; however, the conventional brake
system continues to operate normally.
y The warning light does not come on when the
ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position.
(U.S.)
(Canada)
3-13
Instruments and controls
– CONTINUED –
y The warning light comes on when the ignition
switch is turned to the “ON” position, but it
does not go out even when the vehicle speed
exceeds approximately 8 mph (12 km/h).
y The warning light comes on during driving.
If these occur, have the ABS system repaired at
the first available opportunity by your SUBARU
dealer.
NOTE
If the warning light behavior is as described be-
low, the ABS system may be considered normal.
y The warning light comes on right after the en-
gine is started but goes out immediately, remain-
ing off.
y The warning light remains on after the engine
has been started, but it goes out when the vehicle
speed reaches about 8 mph (12 km/h).
y The warning light comes on during driving, but
it goes out immediately and remains off.
When driving with an insufficient battery voltage such
as when the engine is jump started, the ABS warning
light may come on. This is due to the low battery volt-
age and does not indicate a malfunction. When the
battery becomes fully charged, the light will go out.
Brake system warning light
y Driving with the brake system warning light
on is dangerous. This indicates your brake sys-
tem may not be working properly. If the light re-
mains on, have the brakes inspected by a
SUBARU dealer immediately.
y If at all in doubt about whether the brakes are
operating properly, do not drive the vehicle.
Have your vehicle towed to the nearest
SUBARU dealer for repair.
This light has the following two functions:
T Parking brake warning
The light comes on with the parking brake applied
while the ignition switch is in the “ON” position. It goes
out when the parking brake is fully released.
T Brake fluid level warning
This light comes on when the brake fluid level has
dropped to near the “MIN” level of the brake fluid res-
ervoir with the ignition switch in the “ON” position and
with the parking brake fully released.
(U.S.)
(Canada)
3-14
Instruments and controls
If the brake system warning light should come on while
driving (with the parking brake fully released and with
the ignition switch positioned in “ON”), it could be an
indication of leaking of brake fluid or worn brake pads.
If this occurs, immediately stop the vehicle at the near-
est safe place and check the brake fluid level. If the flu-
id level is below the “MIN” mark in the reservoir, do not
drive the vehicle. Have the vehicle towed to the near-
est SUBARU dealer for repair.
Door ajar warning lights
The specific door ajar warning light comes on if any
door is not fully closed.
Always make sure this light is out before you start to
drive.
Switchback door indicator light
While the ignition switch is in the “ON” position, the
switchback door indicator light comes on when the
switchback door is open.
While the ignition switch is in the “LOCK” or “ACC” po-
sition, the switchback door indicator light flashes for
about 20 seconds and goes off when the switchback
door is open.
Low fuel warning light
The low fuel warning light comes on when the tank is
nearly empty about 2.6 US gal (10.0 liters, or 2.2 Imp
gal). It only operates when the ignition switch is in the
“ON” position.
NOTE
This light does not go out unless the tank is re-
plenished up to an internal fuel quantity of about
3.7 US gal (14 liters, 3.1 Imp gal).
Promptly put fuel in the tank whenever the low
fuel warning light comes on. If the engine mis-
fired as a result of an empty tank, resulting cat-
alyzer damage could cause damage to the tur-
bocharger.
All-Wheel Drive warning light
(AT vehicles)
The All-Wheel Drive warning light comes on when the
ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position and goes
out after about two seconds.
3-15
Instruments and controls
– CONTINUED –
T Turbo models
This light flashes if the vehicle is driven with tires of dif-
ferent diameters or with the air pressure excessively
low in any of its tires.
T Non-turbo models
This light comes on when All-Wheel Drive is disen-
gaged and the drive mechanism is switched to Front
Wheel Drive for maintenance or similar purposes.
This light flashes if the vehicle is driven with tires of dif-
ferent diameters or with the air pressure excessively
low in any of its tires.
Continued driving with the AWD warning light
flashing can lead to powertrain damage. If the
AWD warning light flashes, promptly park in a
safe place then check whether all four tires are
the same diameter and whether any of the tires
has a puncture or has lost air pressure for
some other reason.
Security system status indicator
light (if equipped)
This light is found at the bottom center of the combina-
tion meter panel.
On vehicles equipped with a security system, it blinks
to show the driver the operational status of the security
system. For detailed information, refer to the “Security
system (if equipped)” in Chapter 2.
Selector lever position indicator (AT
vehicles)
This indicator shows the position of the selector lever.
UB3025AA
3-16
Instruments and controls
Gear position indicator (Turbo-AT ve-
hicles)
When the selector lever is in the manual gate, this in-
dicator shows the currently selected gear.
Turn signal indicator lights
These lights show the operation of the turn signal or
lane change signal.
If the indicator lights do not blink or blink rapidly, the
turn signal bulb may be burned out. Replace the bulb
as soon as possible. Refer to the “Replacing bulbs”
section in chapter 11.
High beam indicator light
This light shows that the headlights are in the high
beam mode.
This indicator light also comes on when the headlight
flasher is operated.
Cargo lamp indicator light
Do not switch on the cargo lamp while driving
to avoid distracting other drivers.
This indicator light shows that the cargo lamp comes
on.
Cruise control set indicator light
T Non-turbo models
The light comes on when vehicle speed has been set.
T Turbo models
The cruise set indicator light comes on when the igni-
tion switch is turned to the “ON” position and goes out
after about three seconds.
The light comes on when vehicle speed has been set.
UBS094AA
3-17
Instruments and controls
– CONTINUED –
NOTE
y If you move the cruise control lever while turn-
ing the ignition switch “ON”, the cruise control
function is deactivated and the cruise control set
indicator light flashes. To reactivate the cruise
control function, turn the ignition switch back to
the “ACC” or “LOCK” position, and then turn it
again to the “ON” position.
y If this indicator light and the “ ” indicator
light flash simultaneously during driving, have the
vehicle checked by your nearest SUBARU dealer.
Clock
To set the time, turn the setting knob clockwise to ad-
vance and counterclockwise to retard the time.
To ensure safety, do not attempt to set the time
while driving, as an accident from inadequate
attention to the road could result.
UB2013BA
3-18
Instruments and controls
Light control switch
To prevent battery discharge resulting from ac-
cidentally leaving your lights on when your ve-
hicle is parked, the light switch operates only
when the ignition switch is in the “ON” posi-
tion. In any other position, the vehicle’s lights
will be out.
If you park your vehicle on a roadside at night,
use the hazard warning flasher to alert the other
drivers.
The light switch operates only when the ignition switch
is in the “ON” position.
Headlights
To turn on the headlights, turn the knob on the end of
the turn signal lever.
first position
Parking lights, instrument panel illumination, tail lights
and license plate light are on.
second position
Headlights, parking lights, instrument panel illumina-
tion, tail lights, and license plate light are on.
HS3026BA
3-19
Instruments and controls
– CONTINUED –
High/low beam change (dimmer)
To change from low beam to high beam, push the turn
signal lever forward. When the headlights are on high
beam, the high beam indicator light “ ” on the in-
strument panel is also on.
To switch back to low beam, pull the lever back to the
detent position.
Headlight flasher
Do not hold the lever in the flashing position for
more than just a few seconds.
To flash the headlights, pull the lever toward you and
then release it. The high beam will stay on for as long
as you hold the lever. The headlight flasher works
even though the lighting switch is in the “OFF” posi-
tion.
When the headlights are on high beam, the high beam
HS3026CA HS3026DA
3-20
Instruments and controls
indicator light “ ” on the instrument panel also
comes on.
Daytime running light system
The tail lights, parking lights, and side marker
lights are not turned on by the daytime running
light system. The light switch must always be
turned to the “ ” position when it is dark
outside.
The low beam headlights will automatically come on at
reduced brightness when the engine has started, un-
der the following conditions:
y The parking brake is fully released.
y The light switch is in the “OFF” or “ ” position.
Turn signal lever
1) Right turn
2) Left turn
To activate the right turn signal, push the turn signal le-
ver up. To activate the left turn signal, push the turn
signal lever down. When the turn is finished, the lever
will return automatically. If the lever does not return af-
ter cornering, return the lever to the neutral position by
hand.
To signal a lane change, push the turn signal lever up
or down slightly and hold it during the lane change.
The turn signal indicator lights will flash in the direction
1
2
HS3027BC
3-21
Instruments and controls
– CONTINUED –
of the turn or lane change. The lever will return auto-
matically to the neutral position when you release it.
Illumination brightness control
1) Brighten
2) Darken
When the lighting switch is in the “ ” or “ ”
position, you can adjust brightness of the instrument
panel illumination for better visibility.
To brighten, turn the control dial counterclockwise.
To darken, turn the control dial clockwise.
1
2
HS3028BB
3-22
Instruments and controls
Parking light switch
The parking light switch operates regardless of the ig-
nition switch position.
By pushing the front end of this switch, following lights
will come on.
– Parking lights
– Front and rear side marker lights
– Tail lights
– License plate lights
To turn off, push the rear end of the parking light
switch.
Avoid leaving these lights on for a long time because
that will run down the battery.
P
HS3029BA
3-23
Instruments and controls
– CONTINUED –
Fog light button
The fog lights operate only when the headlights are on
low beam. Push the fog light button to turn the fog
lights on.
Press the button again to turn them off.
The indicator light located on the button will illuminate
when the fog lights are on.
Wiper and washer
In freezing weather, do not use the windshield
washer until the windshield is sufficiently
warmed by the defroster.
Otherwise the washer fluid can freeze on the
windshield, blocking your view.
y Do not operate the washer continuously for
more than ten seconds, or when the washer flu-
id tank is empty. This may cause overheating of
the washer motor. Check the washer fluid level
frequently, such as at fuel stops.
y Do not operate the wipers when the wind-
shield or rear window is dry. This may scratch
the glass, damage the wiper blades and cause
the wiper motor to burn out. Before operating
the wiper on a dry windshield or rear window,
always use the windshield washer.
y In freezing weather, be sure that the wiper
blades are not frozen to the windshield or rear
window before switching on the wipers. At-
UB3030BA
3-24
Instruments and controls
tempting to operate the wiper with the blades
frozen to the window glass could cause not
only the wiper blades to be damaged but also
the wiper motor to burn out. If the wiper blade
is frozen to the window glass, be sure to oper-
ate the defroster, wiper deicer (if equipped) or
rear window defogger before turning on the
wiper.
y If the wipers stop during operation because
of ice or some other obstruction on the window,
the wiper motor could burn out even if the wiper
switch is turned off. If this occurs, promptly
stop the vehicle in a safe place, turn the ignition
switch to the “LOCK” position and clean the
window glass to allow proper wiper operation.
y Use clean water if windshield washer fluid is
unavailable. In areas where water freezes in
winter, use SUBARU Windshield Washer Fluid
or the equivalent. (See “Windshield washer flu-
id” section in chapter 11.)
Also, when driving the vehicle when there are
freezing temperatures, use non-freezing type
wiper blades.
y Do not clean the wiper blades with gasoline
or a solvent, such as paint thinner or benzene.
This will cause deterioration of the wiper
blades.
NOTE
y The wiper operates only when the ignition
switch is in the “ON” or “ACC” position.
y Clean your wiper blades and window glass peri-
odically with a washer solution to prevent streak-
ing, and to remove accumulations of road salt or
road film. Keep the washer button depressed at
least for 1 second so that washer solution will be
sprinkled all over the windshield or rear window.
y Grease, wax, insects or other material on the
windshield or the wiper blades results in jerky wip-
er operation and streaking on the glass. If you can-
not remove those streaks after operating the
washer or if the wiper operation is jerky, clean the
outer surface of the windshield or rear window
and the wiper blades using a sponge or soft cloth
with a neutral detergent or mild-abrasive cleaner.
After cleaning, rinse the window glass and wiper
blades with clean water. The glass is clean if no
beads form on the glass when you rinse with wa-
ter.
y If you cannot eliminate the streaking even after
following this procedure, replace the wiper blades
with new ones. Refer to the “Replacement of wind-
3-25
Instruments and controls
– CONTINUED –
shield wiper blades” section (chapter 11) for re-
placement instructions.
Windshield wiper and washer switches
T Windshield wipers
1) MIST
To turn the wipers on, push the wiper control lever
down.
: Intermittent
LO: Low speed
HI: High speed
To turn the wipers off, return the lever to the “OFF” po-
sition.
T Mist (for a single wipe)
For a single wipe of the wipers, pull the lever toward
you. The wipers operate until you release the lever.
T Wiper intermittent time control (if equipped)
When the wiper switch is in the “ ” position, turn
the dial to adjust the operating interval of the wiper.
The operating interval can be adjusted continuously
from the shortest interval to the longest.
Two click stop positions of the dial may help you to aim
at your desired interval.
PULLL
PULLL
M
IST
OFF
INT
LO
HI
1
UB3022BB
PULLL
MIST
UB3024BA
3-26
Instruments and controls
T Washer
To wash the windshield, push the washer button at the
end of the wiper control lever. The washer fluid sprays
until you release the washer button. The wipers oper-
ate while you push the button.
Rear window defogger button
y Do not use sharp instruments or window
cleaner containing abrasives to clean the inner
surface of the rear window. They may damage
the conductors printed on the window.
y To prevent the battery from being dis-
charged, do not operate the defogger continu-
ously for any longer than necessary.
The rear window defogger operates only when the ig-
nition switch is in the “ON” position.
The rear window defogger button is located on the cli-
mate control panel.
The defogger will automatically shut off after about 15
minutes. If the window clears before that time, push
the button to turn it off. It also turns off when the igni-
tion switch is turned to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position.
If defrosting or defogging is desired when you restart
your vehicle, you have to push the button to turn it on
again.
P
U
L
L
L
PULLL
M
IST
UB3023BA
3-27
Instruments and controls
– CONTINUED –
To turn on the defogger, push the button. To turn it off,
push the button again.
The indicator light located on the button lights up while
the rear window defogger is operating.
Windshield wiper deicer (if equipped)
To prevent the battery from being discharged,
do not operate the windshield wiper deicer con-
tinuously for any longer than necessary.
The windshield wiper deicer operates only when the
ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
Before turning on the windshield wiper deicer, remove
any snow from the windshield. To turn on the wind-
UB3028BA
UB3029BA
3-28
Instruments and controls
shield wiper deicer, push the button. The indicator light
located on the button lights up while the windshield
wiper deicer is operating.
The windshield wiper deicer will automatically shut off
after about 15 minutes. If the wiper blades have been
deiced completely before that time, push the button to
turn it off. It also turns off when the ignition switch is
turned to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position. If deicing is
not complete when you restart your vehicle, you have
to push the button to turn the deicer on again.
Mirrors
Always check that the inside and outside mirrors are
properly adjusted before you start driving.
Inside mirror
1) Tab
The inside mirror has a day and night position. Pull the
tab at the bottom of the mirror toward you for the night
position. Push it away for the day position. The night
position reduces glare from headlights.
1
HS3036BB
3-29
Instruments and controls
– CONTINUED –
T Auto-dimming mirror/compass (if equipped)
1) Left button
2) Auto dimming indicator
3) Photosensor
4) Right button
The auto-dimming mirror/compass has an anti-glare
feature which automatically reduces glare coming
from headlights of vehicles behind you. It also con-
tains a built-in compass.
y By pressing and releasing the left button, the auto-
matic dimming function is toggled on or off. When the
automatic dimming function is on, the auto dimming in-
dicator light (green) located to the right of the button
will illuminate.
y By pressing and releasing the right button, the com-
pass display is toggled on or off. When the compass is
on, an illuminated compass reading will appear in the
lower part of the mirror.
Even with the mirror in anti-glare mode, the mirror sur-
face turns bright if the transmission is shifted into re-
verse. This is to ensure good rearward visibility during
reversing.
V Photosensors
The mirror has a photosensor attached on both the
front and back sides. If the glare from the headlights of
vehicles behind you strikes the mirror, these sensors
1
23
4
HS3037BB
HS3038BA
3-30
Instruments and controls
detect it and make the reflection surface of the mirror
dimmer to help prevent you from being blinded. For
this reason, use care not to cover the sensors with
stickers, or other similar items. Periodically wipe the
sensors clean using a piece of dry soft cotton cloth or
an applicator.
V Compass calibration
1. For optimum calibration, switch off all nonessential
electrical accessories (rear window defogger, heater/
air conditioning system, spotlight, etc.) and ensure all
doors are shut.
2. Drive to an open, level area away from large metal-
lic objects or structures and make certain the ignition
switch is in the “ON” position.
3. Press and hold the left button for 3 seconds then re-
lease, and the compass will enter the calibration
mode. “CAL” and direction will be displayed.
4. Drive slowly in a circle until “CAL” disappears from
the display (about two or three circles). The compass
is now calibrated.
5. Further calibration may be necessary should out-
side influences cause the mirror to read inaccurately.
You will know that this has occurred if your compass
begins to read in only limited directions. Should you
encounter this situation, return to step one of the
above procedure and recalibrate the mirror.
V Compass zone adjustment
1. The zone setting is factory preset to Zone 8. Refer
to the “Compass calibration zone” map at the end of
this manual to verify that the compass zone setting is
correct for your geographical location.
2. Press and hold the right button for 3 seconds then
release, and the word “ZONE” will briefly appear and
then the zone number will be displayed.
3. Press the right hand button repeatedly to cycle the
display through all possible zone settings. Stop cycling
when the correct zone setting for your location is dis-
played.
4. Releasing the button for 3 seconds will exit the
zone setting mode.
Outside mirrors
T Convex mirror (Passenger side)
Objects look smaller in a convex mirror and far-
ther away than when viewed in a flat mirror. Do
not use the convex mirror to judge the distance
of vehicles behind you when changing lanes.
Use the inside mirror (or glance backwards) to
determine the actual size and distance of ob-
3-31
Instruments and controls
– CONTINUED –
jects that you view in convex mirror.
T Adjusting mirrors
To adjust the mirrors by hand, push where indicated
by the arrows.
T Remote control mirror switch
The remote control mirrors operate only when the ig-
nition switch is in the “ON” or “ACC” position.
1) Selection switch
2) Direction control switch
1. Press either end of the selection switch, “L” for the
left, “R” for the right.
2. Move the direction control switch in the direction
you want to move the mirror.
3. Return the selection switch to the neutral position
to prevent unintentional operation.
The mirrors can also be adjusted manually.
OM-U2737
1
2
UB4004BB
3-32
Instruments and controls
T Outside mirror defogger (if equipped)
To prevent the battery from being discharged,
do not operate the defogger continuously for
any longer than necessary.
The outside mirror defogger operates only when the
ignition switch is in the “ON” or “ACC” position.
1) Indicator light
To turn on the outside mirror defogger, push the but-
ton while the engine is running.
The indicator light located on the button will come on
when the outside mirror defogger heater in operation.
To turn it off, push the button again.
1
UB4004CB
3-33
Instruments and controls
– CONTINUED –
Tilt steering wheel
Do not adjust the steering wheel tilt position
while driving. This may cause loss of vehicle
control and result in personal injury.
1. Adjust the seat position. Refer to the “Front seats”
section (chapter 1).
2. Pull the tilt lock lever down.
3. Move the steering wheel to the desired level.
4. Push the lever up to lock the steering wheel in
place.
5. Make sure that the steering wheel is securely
locked by moving it up and down.
HS3043BA
3-34
Instruments and controls
Horn
To sound the horn, push the horn pad.
HS3044BA
4-1
4
Climate control
Ventilator ....................................................... 4-2
Driver’s side ventilators ................................... 4-2
Center ventilators ............................................. 4-2
Front passenger’s side ventilators ................. 4-3
Air flow selection .............................................. 4-4
Manual heating and air conditioning
system ........................................................ 4-5
Control panel ..................................................... 4-5
Heater operation ............................................... 4-7
Air conditioner operation ................................. 4-10
Operating tips for heater and air
conditioner ................................................. 4-11
Air filtration system (if equipped) ................ 4-13
4-2
Climate control
Climate con trol
Ventilator
Driver’s side ventilators
1) Open
2) Close
Move the thumb-wheel up and down or right and left to
adjust the flow direction.
Center ventilators
Move the thumb-wheel up and down or right and left to
adjust the flow direction.
12
UB4038BB
UB4039BA
4-3
Climate control
– CONTINUED –
Front passenger’s side ventilators
1) Open
2) Close
Move the thumb-wheel up and down or right and left to
adjust the flow direction.
1
2
UB4040BB
4-4
Climate control
Air flow selection
UB4036BA
4-5
Climate control
– CONTINUED –
Manual heating and air conditioning
system
Control panel
1) Temperature control dial
2) Fan speed control dial
3) Air flow control dial
4) Air conditioner button
5) Air inlet selection button
6) Rear window defogger button (Refer to “Rear window
defogger button” in chapter 3.)
T Temperature control dial
This dial regulates the temperature of air flow from the
air outlets over a range from the blue area (cool) to red
area (warm).
T Fan speed control dial
The fan operates only when the ignition switch is
turned to the “ON” position. The fan speed control dial
is used to select four fan speeds.
T Air flow control dial
This dial has the following five positions:
: Air flows through the instrument panel outlets.
: Air flows through the instrument panel outlets
and the foot outlets.
: Air flows through the foot outlets and some
through the windshield defroster outlets.
: Air flows through the windshield defroster outlets
and foot outlets.
: Air flows through the windshield defroster out-
lets.
1
65 4
2
3
UB5004BC
4-6
Climate control
NOTE
When the dial is placed in the “ ” or “ ” po-
sition, the air conditioner compressor operates
automatically regardless of the position of the air
conditioner button to defog the windshield quick-
ly. At the same time, the air inlet selection is auto-
matically set to “Outside air” mode.
In this state, you cannot select “recirculation”
mode by manually pressing the air inlet selection
button.
T Air conditioner button
The air conditioner operates only when the engine is
running.
Push the air conditioner button while the fan is in op-
eration to turn on the air conditioner. The indicator light
will come on.
Push it again to turn off the air conditioner.
T Air inlet selection button
Continued operation in the ON position may fog
up the windows. Switch to the OFF position as
soon as the outside dusty condition clears.
UG4507BA
UB4041BA
4-7
Climate control
– CONTINUED –
ON position (Recirculation): Interior air is recirculat-
ed inside the vehicle. Push the air inlet selection but-
ton to the ON position. The indicator light will come on.
Push the air inlet selection button to the ON position
for fast cooling with the air conditioner or when driving
on a dusty road.
OFF position (Outside Air): Outside air is drawn into
the passenger compartment. Push the air inlet selec-
tion button again to the OFF position. The indicator
light will go off.
Push the air inlet selection button to the OFF position
when the interior has cooled to a comfortable temper-
ature and the road is no longer dusty.
Heater operation
T Defrosting or defogging the windshield
To direct warm air to the windshield and front door win-
dows:
1. Set the air flow control dial to “ ”.
2. Turn the temperature control dial all the way to the
right.
3. Set the fan speed control dial to the highest speed.
NOTE
Warm air also comes out from the right and left air
outlets. To stop warm air flow from these outlets,
turn the corresponding thumb-wheel to the
UB5011AA
4-8
Climate control
“” position.
T Heating and defrosting
To direct warm air toward the floor and the windshield:
1. Set the air flow control dial to “ ”.
2. Set the temperature control dial to the desired tem-
perature level.
3. Set the fan speed control dial to the desired speed.
NOTE
Warm air also comes out from the right and left air
outlets. To stop warm air flow from these outlets,
turn the corresponding thumb-wheel to the
“” position.
T Heating
To direct warm air toward the floor:
1. Set the air inlet selection button to the “OFF” posi-
tion.
2. Set the air flow control dial to “ ”.
3. Set the temperature control dial to the desired tem-
perature level.
4. Set the fan speed control dial to the desired speed.
NOTE
Warm air also comes out from the right and left air
outlets. To stop warm air flow from these outlets,
turn the corresponding thumb-wheel to the
“ ” position.
UB5012AA
UB5013AA
4-9
Climate control
– CONTINUED –
T Bi-level heating
This setting allows you to direct air of different temper-
atures from the instrument panel and foot outlets. The
air from the foot outlets is slightly warmer than from the
instrument panel outlets.
1. Set the air inlet selection button to the “OFF” posi-
tion.
2. Set the air flow control dial to “ ”.
3. Set the temperature control dial to the desired tem-
perature level.
4. Set the fan speed control dial to the desired speed.
Setting the temperature control dial fully turned to the
red area or blue area decreases the temperature dif-
ference between the air from the instrument panel out-
lets and the air from the foot outlets.
T Ventilation
To force outside air through the instrument panel out-
lets:
1. Set the air inlet selection button to the “OFF” posi-
tion.
2. Set the air flow control dial to “ ”.
3. Set the temperature control dial all the way left.
4. Set the fan speed control dial to the desired speed.
When driving on a dusty road, set the air inlet control
button to the “ON” position.
UB5014AA
UB5015AA
4-10
Climate control
Continued operation with the air inlet selection
button in the ON position may fog up the win-
dows. Switch to the OFF position as soon as
the outside dusty condition clears.
Air conditioner operation
T Cooling or dehumidifying
1) ON position
For cooling and dehumidification of the passenger
compartment, performing the following steps will allow
air to flow through the instrument panel outlets:
1. Set the air inlet selection button to the “OFF” posi-
tion.
2. Set the air flow control dial to “ ”.
3. Set the air conditioner button to the “ON” position.
4. Set the temperature control dial to the blue area.
5. Set the fan speed control dial at the desired speed.
T Defrosting or defogging
1) ON position
To direct warm air to the windshield and front door win-
dows:
1. Set the air outlet control dial to “ ”.
1
UB5016BB
1
UB5011BB
4-11
Climate control
– CONTINUED –
2. Set the temperature control dial to the red area.
3. Set the fan speed control dial at the highest speed.
Operating tips for heater and air con-
ditioner
T Cleaning ventilator grille
Always keep the front ventilator inlet grille free of
snow, leaves, or other obstructions to ensure efficient
heating and defrosting. Since the condenser is located
in front of the radiator, this area should be kept clean
because cooling performance is impaired by any ac-
cumulation of insects and leaves on the condenser.
T Efficient cooling after parking in direct sunlight
After parking in direct sunlight, drive with the windows
UB4037BA
4-12
Climate control
open for a few minutes to allow outside air to circulate
into the heated interior. This results in quicker cooling
by the air conditioner. Keep the windows closed during
the operation of the air conditioner for maximum cool-
ing efficiency.
T Lubrication oil circulation in the refrigerant cir-
cuit
Operate the air conditioner compressor at a low en-
gine speed (at idle or low driving speeds) a few min-
utes each month during the off-season to circulate its
oil.
T Checking air conditioning system before sum-
mer season
Check the air conditioner unit for refrigerant leaks,
hose conditions, and proper operation each spring.
This check is best performed by your SUBARU dealer.
T Cooling and dehumidifying in high humidity
and low temperature weather condition
Under certain weather conditions (high relative humid-
ity, low temperatures, etc.) a small amount of water
vapor emission from the air outlets may be noticed.
This condition is normal and does not indicate any
problem with the air conditioning system.
T Air conditioner compressor shut-off when en-
gine is heavily loaded
To improve acceleration and gas mileage, the air con-
ditioner compressor is designed to temporarily shut off
during air conditioner operation whenever the acceler-
ator is fully depressed such as during rapid accelera-
tion or when driving on a steep upgrade.
T Refrigerant for your climate control system
Your air conditioner uses ozone friendly refrigerant
HFC134a. Therefore, the method of adding, changing
or checking the refrigerant is different from the method
for CFC12 (freon). Consult your SUBARU dealer for
service. Repairs needed as a result of using the wrong
refrigerant are not covered under warranty.
4-13
Climate control
– CONTINUED –
Air filtration system (if equipped)
If your vehicle’s air conditioning system is equipped
with a optional air filtration system, replace the filter el-
ement according to the replacement schedule shown
below. This schedule should be followed to maintain
the filter’s dust collection ability. Under extremely
dusty conditions, the filter should be replaced more
frequently. Have your filter checked or replaced by
your SUBARU dealer.
Replacement schedule:
Every 12 months or 9,300 miles (15,000 km) whichev-
er comes first
NOTE
The filter can influence the air conditioning, heat-
ing and defroster performance if not properly
maintained.
5-1
5
Audio
Antenna system ............................................ 5-2
Pillar mounted antenna (Non-turbo models) .. 5-2
Roof mounted antenna (Turbo models) ......... 5-2
FM reception ..................................................... 5-3
Installation of accessories ........................... 5-4
Audio set ........................................................ 5-4
Type A audio set ............................................... 5-4
Type B audio set ............................................... 5-5
In-dash 6 CD auto changer
(Optional audio unit – if equipped) ............... 5-5
AM/FM radio with CD player ........................ 5-6
Radio operation ................................................ 5-6
Compact disc player operation ....................... 5-11
CD changer control (if optional in dash CD
changer is connected) ................................... 5-13
Type B audio set (if equipped) ..................... 5-17
Radio operation ................................................ 5-17
Built-in CD changer operation ......................... 5-23
In-dash 6 CD auto changer (if equipped) .... 5-27
Precautions to observe when handling
a compact disc .......................................... 5-30
5-2
Audio
Audio
Antenna system
Pillar mounted antenna (Non-turbo
models)
Pull the antenna out to extend it to its full length.
Roof mounted antenna (Turbo models)
UB5070BA
UB5073BA
UB5074BA
5-3
Audio
– CONTINUED –
Stand the roof antenna up for use. You can detach the
roof antenna by turning it counterclockwise. When fit-
ting the roof antenna, turn it clockwise and tighten it
securely.
When working on the cargo bed, be careful not
to get poked in the eye by the roof antenna.
NOTE
y Detach the roof antenna before putting the vehi-
cle in a garage and before washing it in an auto-
matic car wash.
y After detaching the roof antenna, keep the
mounting hole free of dirt and dust. If any dirt or
dust sticks to the hole, remove it before attaching
the roof antenna.
y When detaching the roof antenna, grasp and
turn the roof antenna at the base.
y To avoid damaging the roof antenna, be careful
not to overtighten it when attaching it.
y Radio reception is not possible with the roof an-
tenna folded down. Also, reception deteriorates if
metallic objects are placed near the roof antenna.
FM reception
Although FM is normally static free, reception can be
affected by the surrounding area, atmospheric condi-
tions, station strength and transmitter distance. Build-
ings or other obstructions may cause momentary stat-
ic, flutter or station interference. If reception continues
to be unsatisfactory, switch to a stronger station.
5-4
Audio
Installation of accessories
Always consult your SUBARU dealer before installing
a citizen band radio or other transmitting device in
your vehicle. Such devices may cause the electronic
control system to malfunction if they are incorrectly in-
stalled or if they are not suited for the vehicle.
Audio set
Your SUBARU may be equipped with one of the fol-
lowing audio sets. See the pages indicated in this sec-
tion for operating details.
Type A audio set
y Radio operation: refer to page 5-6
y CD (compact disc) player operation: refer to page 5-
11
y CD changer control: refer to page 5-13
UB5066AA
5-6
Audio
AM/FM radio with CD player
The audio set will operate only when the ignition switch is in the “ACC” or
“ON” position.
Radio operation
(1) (2)
(6) (5) (4) (3)
UB5067BB
(1) Power switch/Volume, Tone,
Balance, Fader control dial
(2) BAND button
(3) Tuning buttons
(4) Preset buttons
(5) AUDIO button
(6) SCAN button
5-7
Audio
– CONTINUED –
T Power switch and volume/bass/treble/fader/
balance control
V Power switch and volume control (PWR/VOL)
The dial (1) is used for both power (ON/OFF) and vol-
ume control. The radio is turned ON and OFF by push-
ing the dial and the volume is controlled by turning the
dial.
V Tone and balance control (AUDIO)
The volume control dial (1) normally functions as a vol-
ume control. This dial becomes a control for Bass,
Treble, Fader or Balance when you select the appro-
priate tone and balance control mode.
Choose desired volume level for each mode by turning
the volume control dial. The control function returns to
volume control mode after about 5 seconds.
To change control modes: Each brief press of the
“AUDIO” button (5) changes control modes in the fol-
lowing sequence starting from volume control mode.
(When the radio is first turned on, the control mode is
in the volume control.)
The “AUDIO” button (5) is used for selecting the fol-
lowing control modes:
Volume Bass Treble Balance
Fader
5-8
Audio
Display Control mode
Turn counterclockwise Turn clockwise
BAS Bass control For less bass sound For more bass sound
TRE Treble control For less treble sound For more treble sound
BAL Balance control To increase left speaker volume and
decrease right speaker volume
To increase right speaker volume and
decrease left speaker volume
FAD Fader control To increase rear speaker volume and
decrease front speaker volume
To increase front speaker volume and
decrease rear speaker volume
VOL Volume control For less volume For more volume
HS5014BA
5-9
Audio
– CONTINUED –
T Waveband selection
V FM/AM selection
Push the “BAND” button (2) to select FM1, FM2 or AM
reception. The display indicates which one is currently
selected.
T Stereo indicator
The stereo indicator “ST” will come on when an FM
stereo broadcast is received.
T Tuning (TUNE)
V Manual tuning (TUNE)
Press the “ ” side of the tuning button (3) to in-
crease the tuning frequency and press the “ ” side
of the button to decrease it.
Each time the button is pressed, the frequency interval
can be changed between 10 kHz in the AM mode and
0.2 MHz in the FM mode.
V Seek tuning (SEEK)
If the tuning button (3) is pressed for longer than half
of a second, the radio will begin to automatically
search for receivable frequencies and will stop at the
first one found. This function may not be available,
however, when radio signals are weak. In such a situ-
ation, perform manual tuning to select the desired sta-
tion.
V Automatic tuning (SCAN)
Press the “SCAN” button (6) to change the radio to the
SCAN mode. In this mode, the radio scans through the
radio band until a station is found. The radio will stop
at the station for five seconds while displaying the fre-
quency, after which scanning will continue until the en-
tire band has been scanned from the low end to the
high end.
Press the “SCAN” button again to cancel the SCAN
mode and to stop on any displayed frequency.
When the “SCAN” button is pressed for automatic tun-
ing, stations are scanned in the direction of low fre-
quencies to high frequencies only.
Automatic tuning may not function properly if the sta-
tion reception is weakened by distance from the sta-
tion or proximity to tall buildings and hills.
T Selecting preset stations
Presetting a station with a “Preset” button (4) allows
you to select that station in a single operation. Up to
six AM, FM1 and FM2 stations each may be preset.
T How to preset stations
1. Press the “BAND” button (2) to select FM1, FM2 or
AM reception.
2. Press the “SCAN” button or tune the radio manually
until the desired station frequency is displayed.
3. Press one of the “Preset” buttons for more than 2
5-10
Audio
seconds to store the frequency. At this time, there will
momentarily be no sound from the radio. If the button
is pressed for less than 2 seconds, the preceding se-
lection will remain in memory.
NOTE
y If the connection between the radio and battery
is broken for any reason such as vehicle mainte-
nance or radio removal, all stations stored in the
preset buttons are cleared. If this occurs, it is nec-
essary to reset the preset buttons.
y If a mobile telephone is placed near the radio, it
may cause the radio to emit noise when it receives
calls. This noise does not indicate a radio fault.
5-11
Audio
– CONTINUED –
Compact disc player operation
(8)(7) (9)
(14) (15) (13) (12) (11)
(10)
UB5067CB
(7) Disc slot
(8) CD button
(9) Eject button
(10) Fast-forwarding and track up
button
(11) Fast-reversing and track down
button
(12) Random button
(13) Repeat button
(14) Scan button
(15) PWR (power) switch
5-12
Audio
T To playback a compact disc
V When CD is not in the player
Hold a disc with a finger in the center hole while grip-
ping the edge of the disc, then insert it in to the slot
(with the label side up) and the player will automatical-
ly pull the disc into position.
A 8 cm/3 inch CD may also be used without any adapt-
er.
NOTE
y DO NOT INSERT TWO DISCS INTO THE DISC IN-
SERTION SLOT AT A TIME.
y Make sure to always insert a disc with the label
side up. If a disc is inserted with the label side
down, it might be ejected or the player might shut
off.
y After the last song finishes, the player will auto-
matically return to track 1 (the first song on the
disc).
V When CD is in the player
When the “CD” button (8) is pressed, the player will
start playback.
NOTE
After the last song finishes, the player will auto-
matically return to track 1 (the first song on the
disc).
T To stop playback of a CD
When the “PWR” button (15) is pressed during play-
back of a CD, the CD stops playing temporarily. To let
the CD resume playing, press the button again.
T To select a song from its beginning
V Forward direction
Briefly press the “ ” side of the button (10) to skip
to the beginning of the next track. Each time this side
of the button is pressed, the indicated track number
will increase.
V Backward direction
Briefly press the “ ” side of the button (11) to skip
to the beginning of the current track. Each time this
side of the button is pressed, the indicated track num-
ber will decrease.
T Fast-forwarding and fast-reversing
V Fast-forwarding
Press the “ ” side of the button (10) continuously
for more than 0.5 second to fast-forward the disc.
Release the button to stop fast-forwarding.
5-13
Audio
– CONTINUED –
V Fast-reversing
Press the “ ” side of the button (11) continuously
for more than 0.5 second to fast-reverse the disc.
Release the button to stop fast-reversing.
T Repeat playback
Use this to play a certain track repeatedly. During
playback, press the “RPT” button (13) and release it in
less than 2 seconds. The “RPT” indicator will come on
and the song will be played continuously. To cancel
the repeat mode, press the button again. Then the
“RPT” indicator goes out, and normal playback mode
is restored.
T Random playback
Use this to play the tracks on the disc in random order.
During playback, press the “RAND” button (12) and
hold it in for more than 2 seconds. The “RAND” indica-
tor will come on and all songs on the disc will be
played in a random order.
To cancel the random mode, press the button again.
Then the “RAND” indicator goes out, and normal play-
back mode is restored.
T Scan
Press the “SCAN” button (14) and release it in less
than 2 seconds, and you can hear the first 10 seconds
of each track to search for the desired program. To
continue listening to the program, press the “SCAN”
button again. After all tracks on the disc has been
scanned, normal playback mode is restored.
T To eject a disc from the player
When a disc is being played back or when a disc is in
the player, press the “Eject” button “ ” (9). The disc
will be ejected.
The disc may be removed even when the ignition
switch is in the “LOCK” position.
NOTE
y Avoid driving the vehicle with a CD sticking out,
because vibration might make it fall out.
y To protect the disc, the disc is automatically
loaded if it is left in the ejected position for more
than approximately 15 seconds (Auto Reload). In
this case, the disc is not played.
CD changer control (if optional in dash
CD changer is connected)
An optional CD changer can be connected to this au-
dio unit. See your SUBARU dealer for more informa-
tion. For procedures for loading and unloading CDs,
refer to “In-dash 6 CD auto changer (Optional audio
unit – if equipped)” in this chapter.
5-14
Audio
(16)
(20) (19) (18) (17)
UB5067DB
(16) CD button
(17) Track selection buttons
(18) RAND (Random) button
(19) RPT (Repeat) button
(20) SCAN button
5-15
Audio
– CONTINUED –
T To start playback
Press the “CD” button (16). The “CD” indicator will
come on and the disc number will appear on the dis-
play and the CD changer will start playback.
NOTE
y If the “CD” button is pressed during a radio
broadcast, the CD changer will interrupt the
broadcast.
y At the end of the disc, playback automatically
continues with the next disc.
y After playback on the last disc finishes, the play-
er will automatically return to the first disc.
y If you have loaded fewer than 6 discs, any miss-
ing disc is automatically skipped.
T Selection of a desired disc
Discs cannot be selected using the main audio unit. To
select a disc, press one of the “Disc select” buttons
(these are numbered from 1 to 6) on the CD changer
unit. The disc will begin to play.
T To select a song from its beginning
Briefly press the “ ” side of the track selection but-
ton (17) to skip to the beginning of the next track and
briefly press the “ ” side of the button to skip to the
beginning of the current track.
T Fast-forwarding and fast-reversing
Press the “ ” side of the track selection button (17)
continuously for more than a half second to fast-for-
ward the disc.
Press the “ ” side of the button continuously for
more than a half second to fast-reverse the disc.
Release the button to stop fast-forwarding or fast-re-
versing.
T Repeat playback
Press the “RPT” button (19) while a song is playing to
play the song repeatedly. The “RPT” indicator will
come on and the song will be played continuously. To
cancel the repeat mode, press the button again. Then
the “RPT” indicator goes out, and normal playback
mode is restored.
T Random playback
Press the “RAND” button (18) while a disc is being
played back to play all songs on the disc in a random
order. The “RAND” indicator will come on and all
songs on the disc will be played in a random order.
To cancel the random mode, press the button again.
Then the “RAND” indicator goes out, and normal play-
back mode is restored.
5-16
Audio
T Scan (a convenient way to become familiar with
a disc)
1. Press the “SCAN” button (20).
– The display shows “SCAN” and the track number
being scanned.
– You hear the first 10 seconds of each track.
– The operation is automatically cleared after play-
ing all programs. Then, normal playback starts.
2. Press the “SCAN” button again when you hear a
track you like.
– Normal playback resumes.
T To stop playback
To stop playback and switch over to the radio mode,
press the “BAND” button.
5-17
Audio
– CONTINUED –
Type B audio set (if equipped)
The radio will operate only when the ignition switch is in the “ACC” or “ON”
position.
Radio operation
(1) (2)
(3)
(4) (5)
(6)(7)
(8)
UB5072BB
(1) Power switch, Volume control,
Bass/Midrange/Treble control
and Fader/Balance control dial
(2) AUDIO (audio mode) button
(3) Fader/Balance selection button
(4) FM button
(5) AM button
(6) Preset buttons
(7) Tuning buttons
(8) SCAN button
5-18
Audio
T Power switch and volume/bass/treble/fader/
balance control (PWR/VOL)
The dial (1) is used for both power (ON/OFF) and vol-
ume control. The radio is turned ON and OFF by push-
ing the dial and the volume is controlled by turning the
dial.
This dial is used for bass/midrange/treble controls
when the “AUDIO” button (2) is in the depressed posi-
tion. It is also used for fader/balance controls when the
“BAL” button (3) is in the depressed position.
5-19
Audio
– CONTINUED –
Display Control mode
Turn counterclockwise Turn clockwise
BASS Bass control For less bass sound For more bass sound
MIDDLE Midrange control For less midrange sound For more midrange sound
TREBLE Treble control For less treble sound For more treble sound
FADER Fader control To increase rear speaker volume and de-
crease front speaker volume
To increase front speaker volume and de-
crease rear speaker volume
BALANCE Balance control To increase left speaker volume and de-
crease right speaker volume
To increase right speaker volume and de-
crease left speaker volume
VOLUME Volume control For less volume For more volume
HS5014BA
5-20
Audio
V Tone control
The volume control dial (1) normally function as vol-
ume control. The dial become a control for Bass,
Midrange or Treble when you select the appropriate
tone control mode.
Choose desired volume level for each mode by turning
the volume control dial. The control function returns to
volume control mode after about 5 seconds.
To change control modes: Each brief press of the
“AUDIO” button (2) changes control modes in the fol-
lowing sequence starting from bass control mode.
(When the radio is first turned on, the control mode is
in the volume control.)
V Fader and balance control
The volume control dial (1) normally function as vol-
ume control. The dial become the controls for Fader or
Balance when you select the appropriate fader and
balance control mode.
Choose desired setting for each mode by turning the
volume control dial. The control function returns to vol-
ume control mode after about 5 seconds.
To change control modes: Each brief press of the
“BAL” button (3) changes control modes in the follow-
ing sequence starting from fader control mode. (When
the radio is turned on, the control mode is in the vol-
ume control.)
V Display illumination dimness cancellation
(BRIGHT)
The brightness of the radio display dims when the light
switch is in the “ ” or “ ” positions. If this
makes the display difficult to read, press the volume
dial for more than 1.5 seconds to return the display to
original brightness.
Subsequently pressing the volume dial again for more
than 1.5 seconds or if you can safely do so, turning the
light switch to the OFF position and back to the
“ ” or “ ” position makes the radio display
dim again.
T FM/AM selection button
V FM button
Press the “FM” button (4) for FM reception. The radio
will toggle between FM1 and FM2 settings each time
the “FM” button (4) is subsequently pressed.
VolumeBass Midrange Treble
VolumeFader Balance
5-21
Audio
– CONTINUED –
V AM button
Press the “AM” button (5) for AM reception.
T Stereo indicator
The stereo indicator “ST” will come on when an FM
stereo broadcast is received.
T Manual tuning (TUNE)
V Manual tuning for AM and FM
Push the “ ” side of the tuning button (7) to in-
crease the tuning frequency and press the “ ” side
of the button to decrease it.
Each time the button is pressed, the frequency chang-
es 10 KHz in the AM waveband and 0.2 MHz in the FM
waveband.
V Seek tuning (SEEK)
If the tuning button (7) is pressed for longer than half
of a second, the radio will begin to automatically
search for receivable frequencies and will stop at the
first one found. This function may not be available,
however, when radio signals are weak. In such a situ-
ation, perform manual tuning to select the desired sta-
tion.
T Automatic tuning (SCAN)
Press the “SCAN” button (8) to change the radio to the
SCAN mode. In this mode, the radio scans through the
radio band until a station is found. The radio will stop
at the station for five seconds while displaying the fre-
quency, after which scanning will continue until the en-
tire band has been scanned from the low end to the
high end.
Press the “SCAN” button again to cancel the SCAN
mode and to stop on any displayed frequency.
When the “SCAN” button is pressed for automatic tun-
ing, stations are scanned in the direction of low fre-
quencies to high frequencies only.
Automatic tuning may not function properly if the sta-
tion reception is weakened by distance from the sta-
tion or proximity to tall buildings and hills.
T Selecting preset stations
Presetting a station with a “Preset” button (6) allows
you to select that station in a single operation. Up to
six AM, FM1 and FM2 stations each may be preset.
T How to preset stations
1. Press the “FM/AM” selection button to select AM,
FM1 or FM2 reception.
2. Press the “SCAN” button (8) or tune the radio man-
ually until the desired station frequency is displayed.
3. Press one of the “Preset” buttons (6) for at least 1.5
seconds to store the frequency. The frequency of the
station will flash once on the display at this time. If the
5-22
Audio
button is pressed for less than 1.5 seconds, the pre-
ceding selection will remain in memory.
NOTE
y If the connection between the radio and battery
is broken for any reason such as vehicle mainte-
nance or radio removal, all stations stored in the
preset buttons are cleared. If this occurs, it is nec-
essary to reset the preset buttons.
y If a mobile telephone is placed near the radio, it
may cause the radio to emit noise when it receives
calls. This noise does not indicate a radio fault.
5-23
Audio
– CONTINUED –
Built-in CD changer operation
(9) (10) (11) (12)
(15)(16)(17)
(13) (14)
UB5072CB
(9) Eject button
(10) Disc slot
(11) CD (CD player selection) button
(12) Repeat button
(13) Random button
(14) LOAD button
(15) Disc select buttons
(16) Track selection buttons
(17) SCAN button
5-24
Audio
NOTE
Make sure to always insert a disc with the label
side up. If a disc is inserted with the label side
down, it might be ejected or the player might shut
off.
T How to insert a CD(s)
V Inserting a CD
1. Press “LOAD” button (14). If the magazine in the
player has an idle position where you can insert a disc,
the “DISC” indicator associated with the idle position
will blink.
If no indicator blinks, it means that there is no idle po-
sition in the magazine.
2. As soon as the “DISC” indicator begins to blink, the
“IN” will appear on display for a period of 15 seconds.
Insert a disc during the period. The disc will be then
automatically drawn in, and the player will begin to
play back the first track of the disc.
y To insert more discs in succession, repeat Steps 1
and 2. The magazine will be loaded with discs in the
ascending order of position number.
If you do not insert any disc in 15 seconds after you
have pressed the “LOAD” button, the player will begin
to play back the first track of the last disc you have in-
serted.
y The disc indicator steadily lights up if a disc is al-
ready inserted in the corresponding position of the
magazine.
y While the player is in the loading mode, if you press
the “FM” button (4) or “AM” button (5), the player will
enter the standby mode. Press the “CD” button (11) to
start playback.
V Inserting a disc in a desired position
1. Press the “LOAD” button. If the magazine in the
player has an idle position where you can insert a disc,
the “DISC” indicator associated with the idle position
will blink.
The positions in the magazine the indicator of which
steadily lights up are already loaded with discs.
2. Press the “Disc select” button (15) at the position
where you want to insert a disc. The associated
“DISC” indicator will blink, and the “IN” will be dis-
played.
3. If you insert a disc during the 15-second period
while the “IN” is on display, the disc will be automati-
cally drawn in, and the player will start playback of the
disc, beginning with the first track.
y To insert more discs in succession, repeat Steps 1
and 2.
y While the player is in the loading mode, if you press
the “FM” button (4) or “AM” button (5), the player will
5-25
Audio
– CONTINUED –
enter standby mode. Press the “CD” button to start
playback.
V Loading all the magazine (Full disc loading
mode)
1. If you continue to press the “LOAD” button for more
than 1.5 seconds, the player will produce beep sound
and will enter the full disc loading mode.
2. A “DISC” indicator will blink, and the “IN” will be on
display for a period of 15 seconds. If a disc is success-
fully loaded during this period, the “DISC” indicator will
stop blinking and will steadily light.
3. When the loading of a disc is complete, the next
“DISC” indicator will blink. Then repeat Step 2.
4. When the magazine is filled with discs by repeating
Steps 2 and 3, the player will start playback of the
discs, beginning with the one inserted first.
If you fail to insert any disc during each 15 seconds in-
terval, the full disc loading mode will be canceled, and
the player will start playback of the disc inserted first.
T How to play back a CD or make a pause
V When there is no CD inserted:
Insert a CD by referring to “How to insert a CD(s)”.
When a CD is loaded, the player will start playback of
the CD, beginning with the first track.
V When there are CDs loaded:
Press a desired one of the “Disc select” buttons (15)
the “DISC” indicator of which steadily lights up. The
player will then start playback of the selected CD, be-
ginning with the first track.
T To select a song from its beginning
V Forward direction
Briefly press the “ ” side of the button (16) to skip to
the beginning of the next track. Each time the button is
pressed, the indicated track number will increase.
V Backward direction
Briefly press the “ ” side of the button (16) to skip to
the beginning of the current track. Each time the but-
ton is pressed, the indicated track number will de-
crease.
T Fast-forwarding and fast-reversing
V Fast-forwarding
Press the “ ” side of the button (16) continuously for
more than 0.5 second to fast-forward the disc.
Release the button to stop fast-forwarding.
V Fast-reversing
Press the “ ” side of the button (16) continuously for
more than 0.5 second to fast-reverse the disc.
5-26
Audio
Release the button to stop fast-reversing.
T Repeat playback
Press the “RPT” button (12) while a song is playing to
play the song repeatedly. The “RPT” indicator will
come on and the song will be played continuously. To
cancel the repeat mode, press the button again. Then
the “RPT” indicator goes out, and normal playback
mode is restored.
T Random playback
Press the “RAND” button (13) while a disc is being
played back to play all songs on the disc in a random
order. The “RAND” indicator will come on and all
songs on the disc will be played in a random order.
To cancel the random mode, press the button again.
Then the “RAND” indicator goes out, and normal play-
back mode is restored.
T Scan
When the “SCAN” button (17) is pressed while the disc
is being played back, you can hear the first 10 seconds
of each track to search for the desired program. To
continue listening to the program, press the “SCAN”
button again. After all tracks on the disc have been
scanned, normal playback mode is restored.
T How to unload CDs from the player
V Ejecting a CD from the player
Of the discs loaded, you can select and remove only
one disc.
1. Press the “Disc select” button (15) of the disc
whose “DISC” indicator is ON.
2. Press the “Eject” button (9). Then the “DISC” indi-
cator associated with the disc you have selected will
blink, and the disc will be ejected.
To remove more discs in succession, repeat Steps 1
and 2.
V Ejecting all discs from the player (All disc ejec-
tion mode)
1. If you continue to press the “Eject” button (9), the
player will produce beep sound and will enter the all
disc ejection mode.
2. Remove the disc that has been ejected. The other
discs loaded will then be ejected one after another. If
you do not remove the disc that has been ejected, the
“All disc ejection mode” will be canceled.
NOTE
Avoid driving the vehicle with a CD sticking out,
because vibration might make it fall out.
5-27
Audio
– CONTINUED –
In-dash 6 CD auto changer (if equipped)
(1)
(2)
(3)(4)
HS5016BB
(1) Disc slot
(2) Disc indicators (disc No.1 to 6)
(3) Disc select buttons (disc No.1 to
6)
(4) Eject button
5-28
Audio
y Do not attempt to insert two or more discs
into the slot at a time. Doing so can cause me-
chanical damage to the CD changer.
y Use only music CDs identified by
amark.
y Do not use CDs listed below which could
cause damage to the CD player.
y 3 inch (8 cm) compact disc.
y Any disc with a peel-off or seal on it.
y Any disc with scratches and/or dust.
y Bent disc.
y Cleaning disc.
y CD accessory. (E.g., 3 inch (8 cm) disc
adapter)
y Do not insert or remove any disc when the
automatic transmission selector lever is in the
park position; the selector lever in that position
can interfere with disc insertion or removal,
causing scratches on the disc surface (for AT
vehicles).
T To insert a disc
1. Press one of the “Disc select” buttons (3) (num-
bered from 1 to 6) for which the disc indicator light (2)
is “OFF”.
The Disc indicator lights are located directly above the
corresponding “Disc select” buttons.
2. The indicator will begin blinking. The blinking will
last for 15 seconds.
During this period, insert a desired disc, and the disc
will begin to play. (If any disc is not inserted during this
period, the “Disc slot” (1) door will close. Repeat Step
1.)
Be sure to hold a disc with the label side (the side
where titles are printed) up.
3. To insert another disc, repeat Steps 1 and 2 choos-
ing a different disc select button.
T To insert six discs at a time
1. Press and hold the “Disc select” button number 1
until all disc indicators begin blinking (about 1.5 sec-
onds).
2. The indicators will blink for 15 seconds. During this
period, insert desired six discs.
3. When all discs are loaded, the first disc will begin to
play. (If no disc is inserted within this 15 seconds, the
entire disc load sequence will be canceled.)
T To remove a disc
1. Press the desired one of the “Disc select” buttons
(3) (numbered from 1 to 6) for which the disc indicator
light is on.
5-29
Audio
– CONTINUED –
2. Press the “Eject” button (4). The selected disc will
be ejected and the indicator light will begin blinking.
3. To remove another disc, repeat Steps 1 and 2
choosing a different “Disc select” button.
(To remove discs when the ignition switch is in the
“Lock” position, press the “Eject” button, and the first
disc will be ejected. Press the “Eject” button again,
and the next disc will be ejected and so on. At this
time, the “Disc select” buttons are disabled.)
T To remove all discs at one time
1. Press and hold the “Eject” button (4) until all “Disc”
indicators begin blinking (about 1.5 seconds), and the
first disc will be ejected.
2. When the disc is removed, the next one will be
ejected, and so on.
T To replace a playing disc with another
Simply press the desired one of “Disc select” buttons
(3) (numbered from 1 to 6) or press the “DISC UP” or
“DISC DOWN” button on the radio unit to select the
desired disc, and the disc will begin to play.
T Disc indicators
Lit: when the corresponding storage tray is occupied
by a disc.
Blinking: Disc player is either in loading, eject or
changing mode.
OFF: No disc is loaded or the ignition switch is in the
“LOCK” position.
T Function control
Refer to CD player control operating instructions de-
scribed in the “AM/FM radio with CD player” section.
5-30
Audio
Precautions to observe when han-
dling a compact disc
Use only compact discs (CDs) that have the mark
shown below. CD-RWs cannot be used. Also, some
CD-Rs cannot be played.
y In cold and/or rainy weather, dew can form inside
the CD player, preventing normal operation. If this
happens, eject the CD and wait for the player to dry
out.
y Skipping may occur when the CD player is subject-
ed to severe vibration (for example, when the vehicle
is driven on a rough surface).
y To remove a disc from the case, press the center of
the case and hold both edges of the disc. If the disc
surface is touched directly, contamination could cause
poor tone quality. Do not touch the disc surface.
y Use a clean disc whenever possible. If there are de-
posits, wipe the disc surface from the center outward
with a dry, soft cloth. Be sure not to use a hard cloth,
thinner, benzene, alcohol, etc.
y Do not use any disc that is scratched, deformed, or
cracked. Also, do not use any disc that has a non-stan-
dard shape (for example, a heart shape). Malfunctions
or problems might result.
y A disc is vulnerable to heat. Never keep it either in
places exposed to direct sunlight, near heaters or in
vehicles parked in the sun or hot days.
HS5017AA
5-31
Audio
– CONTINUED –
HS5018BA
6-1
6
Interior and exterior equipments
Interior light .................................................. 6-2
Dome light ......................................................... 6-2
Map light ........................................................ 6-3
Sun visors ..................................................... 6-3
Vanity mirror (if equipped) ............................... 6-4
Storage compartment .................................. 6-4
Glove box ........................................................... 6-5
Center console .................................................. 6-5
Rear center console .......................................... 6-6
Coin compartment ............................................ 6-6
Cup holder .................................................... 6-7
Front cup holder ............................................... 6-7
Rear passenger’s cup holder ........................... 6-8
Accessory power outlet ............................... 6-8
Cigarette lighter socket ................................ 6-9
Use with a cigarette lighter .............................. 6-10
Using as an accessory power outlet ............... 6-11
Ashtray .......................................................... 6-12
Convenience hook ....................................... 6-13
Coat hook .......................................................... 6-13
Cargo net hooks ................................................ 6-13
Floor mat (if equipped) ................................. 6-15
Cargo bed ...................................................... 6-16
Cargo tie-down hooks ...................................... 6-17
Bed extender (if equipped) .......................... 6-17
Operation ........................................................... 6-18
Bed extender removal ...................................... 6-19
Cargo lamp .................................................... 6-20
Soft bed cover (if equipped) ........................ 6-21
Securing the cover ........................................... 6-21
Cover removal ................................................... 6-22
Cover reinstallation .......................................... 6-23
Roof rail and crossbar .................................. 6-24
Installing carrying attachments on the
crossbars ........................................................ 6-25
Removal and installation of the crossbars .... 6-25
Sport activity lights (if equipped) ................ 6-30
6-2
Interior and exterior equipments
Interior and exterior equipments
Interior light
Dome light
The dome light switch has three positions:
ON: The light stays on continuously.
DOOR (middle position): The light comes on when
any of the doors is open. The light remains on for sev-
eral seconds and gradually goes out after all doors are
closed.
The light also can be turned on by use of the keyless
entry transmitter. See the “Remote keyless entry sys-
tem (if equipped)” in chapter 2 for detailed information.
OFF: The light stays off.
When leaving your vehicle, make sure the light goes
out to avoid battery discharge.
ON
DOOR
OFF
HS6025BB
6-3
Interior and exterior equipments
– CONTINUED –
Map light
1) Switches
2) Map lights
To turn on the map light, push the switch. To turn it off,
push the switch again.
When leaving the vehicle, make sure the light is turned
off to avoid battery discharge.
Sun visors
To block out glare, swing down the visors. To use the
sun visor at a side window, swing it down and move it
sideways.
1
2
UG6021CB UB7001BA
6-4
Interior and exterior equipments
Vanity mirror (if equipped)
To use the vanity mirror, swing down the sun visor and
open the vanity mirror cover.
The light beside the vanity mirror comes on when the
ignition switch is either in the “ACC” or “ON” position
and the mirror cover is opened.
Storage compartment
Your vehicle has some storage compartments such as
a glove box, a center console and so forth, for storage
of small items that you often use.
y Always keep the storage compartment
closed while driving to reduce the risk of injury
in the event of sudden stops or an accident.
y Do not store spray cans, containers with
flammable or corrosive liquids or any other
dangerous items in the storage compartment.
UB6017AA
6-5
Interior and exterior equipments
– CONTINUED –
Glove box
1) Lock
2) Unlock
To open the glove box, pull the handle. To close it,
push the lid firmly upward.
To lock the glove box, insert the key and turn it clock-
wise.
Center console
To open the lid, pull up the lock release.
1
2
HS6030BB UB6022BA
6-6
Interior and exterior equipments
Rear center console
To open the lid, push the button.
Coin compartment
To open the coin compartment, pull the upper edge of
the lid.
UB6028BA HS6055BA
6-7
Interior and exterior equipments
– CONTINUED –
Cup holder
y Do not pick up a cup from the cup holder or
put a cup in the holder while you are driving, as
this may distract you and lead to an accident.
y Take care to avoid spills. Beverages, if hot,
might burn you or your passengers. Spilled
beverages may also damage upholstery, car-
pets or audio equipment.
Front cup holder
A dual cup holder is built in the center console, beside
the parking brake lever.
UB6030BA
6-8
Interior and exterior equipments
Rear passenger’s cup holder
A dual cup holder is built in the rear center console.
Accessory power outlet
The accessory power outlet is located at the rear of the
center console.
Electrical power (12V DC) from the battery is available
at the socket when the ignition switch is either in the
“ACC” or “ON” position.
You can use an in-car use electrical appliance by con-
necting it to the accessory power outlet.
y Do not attempt to use a cigarette lighter in the
accessory power outlet.
UB6029BA
UB6057BA
6-9
Interior and exterior equipments
– CONTINUED –
y Do not place any foreign objects, especially
metal ones such as coins or aluminum foil, into
the accessory power outlet. That could cause a
short circuit. Always put the cap on the acces-
sory power outlet when it is not in use.
y Use only electrical appliances which are de-
signed for 12V DC and which consume less
than 120W. Overloading the accessory power
outlet can cause a short circuit. Do not use dou-
ble adapters or more than one electrical appli-
ance.
y If the plug on your electric appliance is either
too loose or too tight for the accessory power
outlet, this can result in a poor contact or cause
the plug to get stuck. Only use plugs that fit
properly.
y Use of an electric appliance in the accessory
power outlet for a long period of time while the
engine is not running can cause battery dis-
charge.
y Do not raise the rear seat cushion while an
electric appliance is plugged into the accessory
power outlet. The rear seat cushion would hit
the electric appliance, possibly damaging the
accessory power outlet and the electric appli-
ance.
Cigarette lighter socket
y The electrical power socket located on the
lower part of the instrument panel is originally
designed to use a genuine SUBARU cigarette
lighter plug. Do not use non-genuine cigarette
lighter plugs in the socket. Doing so may cause
a short-circuit and overheating, resulting in a
fire.
y If the socket is ever used for a plug-in acces-
sory such as a mobile phone, they may damage
the portion of the socket’s internal mechanism
that causes a cigarette lighter plug to “pop out”
after its lighter element is heated. Therefore, do
not place a cigarette lighter plug in a socket
that has been used, even once, to power a plug-
in accessory. Doing so may cause the plug to
stick and overheat, creating a potential fire haz-
ard.
y Do not place any foreign objects, especially
metal ones such as coins or aluminum foil, into
the socket. That could cause a short circuit.
6-10
Interior and exterior equipments
The electrical power socket located on the lower part
of the instrument panel can be used as cigarette light-
er socket. A cigarette lighter plug is an optional acces-
sory. It is available from your SUBARU dealer.
The cigarette lighter socket may also be used as a
power source for an in-car use electrical appliance.
Use with a cigarette lighter
To avoid being burned, never grasp the lighter
by the end with the heating element. Doing so
could result in injury and could also damage
the heating element.
Do not hold the lighter pushed in, because it
will overheat.
The cigarette lighter operates only when the ignition
switch is in the “ON” and “ACC” positions.
To use the cigarette lighter, push in the knob and wait
a few moments. It will automatically spring up when
ready for use.
UB6011BA
UB6011DA
6-11
Interior and exterior equipments
– CONTINUED –
Using as an accessory power outlet
Electrical power (12V DC) from the battery is available
at the socket when the ignition switch is either in the
“ACC” or “ON” position.
If you use the socket as an accessory power outlet,
take the following precautions.
When the socket is not in use, always put the cap on
the socket to prevent any foreign object from entering
it.
y Use only in-car use electrical appliances
which are designed for 12V DC and which con-
sume less than 120W. Overloading the socket
can cause a short circuit. Do not use double
adapters or more than one electrical appliance.
y If the plug on your electric appliance is either
too loose or too tight for the socket, this can re-
sult in a poor contact or cause the plug to get
stuck. Only use plugs that fit properly.
y Use of an electric appliance in the socket for
a long period of time while the engine is not
running can cause battery discharge.
y Before driving your vehicle, make sure that
the plug and the cord on your electrical appli-
ance will not interfere with your shifting gears
and operating the accelerator and brake pedals.
If they do, do not use the electrical appliance
while driving.
If the socket has been used for electrical appliances,
damage may have been done to the internal mecha-
nism that cause a cigarette lighter to “pop-out” after its
element has been heated. For that reason, a cigarette
lighter, even if it is a genuine part, should not be used
in the socket. If you want to use the socket for a ciga-
rette lighter again, or to protect your purchaser before
you sell your vehicle, have your SUBARU dealer re-
place the socket with a new one.
6-12
Interior and exterior equipments
Ashtray
Do not use ashtrays as waste receptacles or
leave a lighted cigarette in an ashtray. This
could cause a fire.
Fully close the ashtray after using it to help reduce re-
sidual smoke.
To open the ashtray, pull the lid out.
To remove the ashtray for cleaning, open it and pull it
out while pushing the inner plate down.
UB6011CA
6-13
Interior and exterior equipments
– CONTINUED –
Convenience hook
Coat hook
Never hang anything on the coat hook that
might obstruct the driver’s view or that could
cause injury in sudden stops or in a collision.
And do not hang items on the coat hook that
weigh 2.2 lbs (1 kg) or more.
The coat hook is attached to each rear passenger’s
hand grip.
Cargo net hooks
HS6040BA
UB6031BA
6-14
Interior and exterior equipments
There are four hooks on the back panel behind the
rear seatback.
These hooks can be used for installing a cargo net so
that small and light items can be held next to the back
panel when the rear seatback is in the down position.
Fold the rear seatback forward by pulling the release
knob up for access to the hooks.
There are two hooks on the back of the rear seatback.
Using these hooks and the two hooks at the bottom of
the back panel, it is possible to use a cargo net to re-
tain luggage on the folded-down rear seatback.
After returning the seatback to its original posi-
tion, make sure that the rear seatback has been
securely locked. When securely locked, the red
marks on the locking knobs are no longer visi-
ble.
UB6054BA
6-15
Interior and exterior equipments
– CONTINUED –
Floor mat (if equipped)
Make sure the driver’s floor mat is placed back
in its proper location and correctly secured on
its retaining pin. If the floor mat slips forward
and interferes with the movement of the pedals
during driving, it could cause an accident.
A retaining pin is located on the driver’s side of the ve-
hicle. The floor mat is secured using the built-in grom-
met, by placing the grommet over the pin and pushing
downward.
HS6039BA
HS6038BA
6-16
Interior and exterior equipments
Cargo bed
y Never fill gasoline containers on the cargo
bed. Static electricity may ignite gasoline vapor
when filling portable containers. Approved
containers must be removed from the vehicle
and placed on the ground when filling.
Do not fill any portable container on a vehicle.
y Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo bed.
It is not designed for passengers. They should
ride in the seats with the seatbelts securely fas-
tened. Otherwise they are much more likely to
suffer serious injury or death in a sudden brak-
ing or in a collision.
y Do not exceed the cargo load rating of your
vehicle. Refer to the “Loading your vehicle”
section in Chapter 8.
y Be sure cargo is secured properly. Unse-
cured cargo in the cargo bed can be thrown
around during sudden braking, in a sharp turn
or during rapid acceleration, which could cre-
ate a dangerous road hazard.
y To avoid creating a dangerous road hazard or
causing personal injury, cargo must not stick
out beyond the tailgate.
y Never drive the vehicle with the tailgate open
unless the optional SUBARU Bed Extender is
used.
Cargo should be placed in the cargo bed. Make sure
all items are secured in place.
Be careful to keep the vehicle balanced. Locating the
weight as low and far forward as possible helps main-
tain balance.
There are two water drain holes at both sides of the
UB1149BA
6-17
Interior and exterior equipments
– CONTINUED –
front end of the cargo bed. Keep those holes clear and
free from obstructions.
Cargo tie-down hooks
The cargo bed is equipped with four tie-down hooks so
that cargo can be secured with a luggage net or ropes.
Bed extender (if equipped)
The bed extender is designed to increase the usable
cargo area of the bed.
y When the tailgate and bed extender are in the
“open/outward” position, the license plate
bracket must be lowered and locked into posi-
tion before the vehicle is driven (see section
“License plate bracket” under the heading of
“Tailgate” in Chapter 2 for more information on
the function of the license plate bracket). In or-
der to avoid damaging the license plate bracket
or the bumper, make certain that the license
plate bracket is in its fully lowered/open posi-
tion before the tailgate is lowered.
y Do not exceed the cargo load rating of your
vehicle. Refer to “Loading your vehicle” sec-
tion in Chapter 8.
y Locking buckles must be engaged into the
tailgate latch while the vehicle is in motion.
y When the bed extender is not in use, the tail-
gate should be closed.
y Do not use the bed extender or tailgate to se-
cure cargo.
UB6032BA
6-18
Interior and exterior equipments
y Remove the bed extender for vehicle “Off
Road” use.
y To avoid creating a dangerous road hazard or
causing personal injury, cargo must not stick
out beyond the bed extender.
y To avoid damage, the tailgate and bed ex-
tender must remain in the closed/inward posi-
tion when towing with a trailer hitch.
y To avoid damage, clean the bed extender
only with soap, water and a soft brush.
Operation
Open/Outward Position – To use the bed extender in
the open/outward position, simply lower your license
plate bracket (see section “License plate bracket” un-
der heading of “Tailgate” in Chapter 2), open your tail-
gate, and rotate the bed extender until it sits on the tail-
gate.
After you have rotated the bed extender, lock the black
buckle pin into the tailgate latch by pushing downward
until you hear two clicks. Then tighten the tether
straps. Repeat this process for the other side. When
you want to return the tailgate and the bed extender to
the closed/inward position, pull on the tailgate release
handle to disengage the tethers.
UB8032AA
UB8033AA
6-19
Interior and exterior equipments
– CONTINUED –
NOTE
Use care when rotating bed extender. Do not per-
mit the buckles to come in contact with vehicle
sheet metal and bed trim.
Closed/Inward Position – With the tailgate closed
and the bed extender in the inward position, small
loads can be placed inside the vehicle bed between
the tailgate and the extender (groceries, ice chests,
etc.).
The bed extender should be secured to the rear set of
vehicle cargo hooks. Latch the buckle onto the rear
cargo hooks and then tighten the tether straps. To dis-
engage the tethers, loosen the tether straps and de-
press the latch pin.
Bed extender removal
The bed extender can be removed from the vehicle by
rotating the extender into a vertical position then lifting
straight up.
UB8035AA
UB8036BA
6-20
Interior and exterior equipments
Cargo lamp
The cargo lamp comes on and goes off whenever the
cargo lamp switch is pushed regardless of the position
of the ignition switch. The cargo lamp indicator light lo-
cated in the meter panel will illuminate when the cargo
lamp is on.
When leaving your vehicle, make sure the lamp is
turned off to avoid battery discharge.
Do not switch on the cargo lamp while driving
to avoid distracting other drivers.
UB3018AA
UB7023DA
6-21
Interior and exterior equipments
– CONTINUED –
Soft bed cover (if equipped)
Before installing the soft bed cover, carefully
read the warning labels on the inside wall of the
cargo bed.
y Do not place cargo on top of the bed cover.
y Do not use the hard bed cover section as a
step.
y Do not use the bed cover to secure cargo.
y To avoid damage, clean the bed cover with
only soap, water and a soft brush.
y Remove the soft portion of the bed cover be-
fore taking the vehicle through a car wash.
The bed cover is designed to cover the cargo area of
the bed. The bed cover is water resistant, but not wa-
terproof.
Securing the cover
UB6061BA
UB6033AA
6-22
Interior and exterior equipments
To secure the soft portion of the bed cover to the bed,
simply start from either side of the vehicle and place
the plastic strip under the rail. Slide your hand down
the side of the vehicle pushing the plastic strip under
the rail as you go. Continue this around the entire
length of the bed. Fasten both closeout wraps with
Velcro around the rear chrome bars so that they are
secure. Your cover should be tight and ready to con-
ceal items in the bed from view.
Cover removal
UB6034BA
UB6035BA
UB6036BA
6-23
Interior and exterior equipments
– CONTINUED –
The soft portion of the bed cover can be removed from
the bed cover’s hard section for cleaning or storage.
Unfasten the Velcro on the tube closeout wraps and
firmly pull the cover out to one side.
Cover reinstallation
The soft portion of the bed cover can be reinstalled
onto the bed cover’s hard section. Start by inserting
the left front edge of the soft portion into the right side
of the hard cover. This area is flared out to ease instal-
lation.
As you insert (and pull) the soft portion of the bed cov-
er into the bed cover’s hard section, make sure the
next 10 to 15 inches (250 to 380 mm) of the soft por-
tion are straight and ready to enter the flared out por-
tion of the hard section.
Once you have pulled the soft portion of the bed cover
onto the bed cover’s hard section, make sure the soft
portion is equally centered on both sides. To complete
the installation, refer to “Securing the cover”.
UB6037BA
UB6038BA
6-24
Interior and exterior equipments
Roof rail and crossbar
y For cargo carrying purposes, the roof rail
must be used together with a roof crossbar kit
and the appropriate carrying attachment. The
roof rail must never be used alone to carry car-
go. Otherwise, damage to the roof or paint or a
dangerous road hazard due to loss of cargo
could result.
y When using the roof crossbar kit, make sure
that the total weight of the crossbars, carrying
attachment and cargo does not exceed the
maximum load limit. Overloading may cause
damage to the vehicle and create a safety haz-
ard.
1) Crossbar kit
The roof rail is not designed to carry cargo by itself.
Cargo can be carried after securing the roof crossbar
kit to the roof rail and installing the appropriate carry-
ing attachment. When installing the roof crossbar kit,
follow the manufacturer’s instructions.
When you carry cargo on the roof using the roof cross-
bar kit and a carrying attachment, never exceed the
maximum load limit explained below. You should also
be careful that your vehicle does not exceed the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and front and rear
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). See the “Loading
your vehicle” section in Chapter 8 for information on
1
UB8037BB
6-25
Interior and exterior equipments
– CONTINUED –
loading cargo into or onto your vehicle. The maximum
load limit of the cargo, crossbars and carrying attach-
ment must not exceed 100 lbs (45 kg). Place the
heaviest load at the bottom, nearest the roof, and
evenly distribute the cargo. Always properly secure all
cargo.
Installing carrying attachments on the
crossbars
When installing any carrying attachment such as a
bike carrier, ski carrier, kayak carrier, cargo basket,
etc. on the crossbars, follow the manufacturer’s in-
structions and make sure that the attachment is se-
curely fixed to the crossbars. Use only attachments
designed specifically for the crossbars. A set of the
crossbars is designed to carry loads (cargo and at-
tachment) of not more than 100 lbs (45 kg). Before
operating the vehicle, make sure that the cargo is
properly secured on the attachment.
NOTE
Remember that the vehicle’s center of gravity is al-
tered with the weight of the load on the roof, thus
affecting the driving characteristics.
Drive carefully. Avoid rapid starts, hard cornering
and abrupt stops. Crosswind effects will be in-
creased.
Removal and installation of the cross-
bars
Do not carry cargo on the roof when the cross-
bars are removed. Luggage on the roof will be
thrown forward or backward in sudden stops or
rapid accelerations, resulting in a dangerous
road hazard.
The crossbars can be removed when you do not use
the roof to carry cargo.
6-26
Interior and exterior equipments
T To remove the crossbar 1. Loosen and remove the T-30 torx® head screw
from the side of each crossbar end support.
2. Move the end support and inner clamp to unhook
each side of the crossbar from the roof rail.
3. Carefully raise the crossbar from roof rails.
NOTE
It may be necessary to move the Front crossbar
rearward, near the center of the roof rail for easier
removal. Use care not to cross-thread the screw in
the insert if it has been removed.
T To install the crossbar
NOTE
Both Crossbars have a label indicating the direc-
tion of mount. If they are not present, orient with
the larger section of the Crossbar towards the
front of vehicle (see below). The Front Crossbar
also has a MAXIMUM LOAD Label affixed to it.
UB6047BA
UB6048BA
6-27
Interior and exterior equipments
– CONTINUED –
1) Front
2) Rear
3) Crossbar (section)
Front crossbar:
Front crossbar has 100 LBS. Load Label on left hand
side.
1) Load label
1
2
3
UB6055BB
1
UB6051BB
6-28
Interior and exterior equipments
1. Before placing the crossbar on the roof rails, make
sure that the T-30 torx® head screw is fully loosened
from each end support.
2. Spread the inner clamp and the end support as far
apart as possible.
3. With the front direction arrow label on the top right
side of the crossbar pointing toward the front of the ve-
hicle, carefully place the crossbar across the top of the
vehicle so that the crossbar end supports rest on the
top of the roof rails 7 inches (180 mm) rearward in the
front radius of the roof rail.
4. Move the end support and inner clamp to hook un-
der the end of the roof rail on both sides and loosely
assemble the T-30 torx® head screw with the tool pro-
vided into the threaded insert in the inner clamp on
each end of the crossbar.
NOTE
It may be necessary to start the inner clamp and
end support at the center of the roof rail for easier
installation, then move the crossbar forward. Use
care not to cross-thread the screw in the insert if it
has been removed.
5. Adjust the alignment of the crossbar on the roof
rails, and if available, use a T-30 torx® bit and torque
wrench and tighten the T-30 torx® head screws to 30
to 35 lbf·in (3.4 to 4.0 N·m, 0.35 to 0.41 kgf·m) of
torque (or tighten securely with the torx® wrench pro-
7 in
(180 mm)
UB6052BB
UB6053BA
6-29
Interior and exterior equipments
– CONTINUED –
vided).
Rear crossbar:
Install the rear crossbar in the same manner as the
front crossbar.
NOTE
y The rear crossbar should be positioned just in
front of the rear radius in the roof rail.
y Before each use of the roof crossbar, make sure
the four T-30 crossbar clamp screws have been
checked, and retightened if necessary to 35 lbf·in
(4.0 N·m, 0.41 kgf·m), as outlined in Step #5 above.
0 in
(0 mm)
UB6049BB
UB6050BA
6-30
Interior and exterior equipments
Sport activity lights (if equipped)
1) Indicator light
The sport activity lights will operate only when the
parking brake is engaged. Push the “SPORT LIGHTS”
switch to turn the sport activity lights on.
Press the switch again to turn them off.
The indicator light located on the switch will illuminate
when the sport activity lights are on.
NOTE
y In most states, the sport activity lights must
have stone shields installed when the vehicle is
operated on public roads.
y In most states, the sport activity lights may not
be operated when the vehicle is in motion on a
public road.
The sport activity lights mount to the vehicle front
cross bar. The sport activity lights cross bar wire har-
ness connects to the roof wire harness and then to the
vehicle’s electrical system.
A tool is provided which will activate the sport activity
lights’ positioning to be modified, so that each lamp
can be aimed or rotated. The lamps can be mounted
in two positions, upright (normal) or forward (down-
ward). The lamps should be rotated to the forward
1
UB6041BB
UB3019AA
6-31
Interior and exterior equipments
– CONTINUED –
(downward) position when washing your vehicle.
If you choose to remove sport activity lights, the follow-
ing sequence should be utilized:
1. Disconnect the roof harness from the cross bar har-
ness connector.
2. Attach the water proof connector cap to the roof
harness connector.
3. Care should be used when removing or installing
this electrical product.
7-1
7
Starting and operating
Fuel ................................................................ 7-2
Fuel requirements ............................................. 7-2
Fuel filler door and cap .................................... 7-4
State emission testing (U.S. only) ............... 7-7
Preparing to drive ......................................... 7-9
Starting the engine ....................................... 7-9
Manual transmission vehicle ........................... 7-9
Automatic transmission vehicle ...................... 7-10
Stopping the engine ..................................... 7-12
Manual transmission .................................... 7-12
Shifting speeds ................................................. 7-13
Driving tips ........................................................ 7-14
Automatic transmission
(Non-turbo models) ................................... 7-15
Selector lever .................................................... 7-16
Driving tips ........................................................ 7-19
Shift lock release .............................................. 7-20
Automatic transmission (Turbo models) ... 7-21
Selector lever .................................................... 7-22
Selector lever reverse inhibiting function ...... 7-25
Selection of SPORTSHIFT mode
(manual mode) ................................................ 7-27
Driving tips ........................................................ 7-29
Shift lock release .............................................. 7-30
Limited slip differential (LSD) ...................... 7-31
Power steering .............................................. 7-31
Braking .......................................................... 7-32
Braking tips ....................................................... 7-32
Brake system ..................................................... 7-32
Disc brake pad wear warning indicators ........ 7-33
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) ..................... 7-33
ABS system self-check .................................... 7-34
ABS warning light ............................................. 7-34
Parking your vehicle ..................................... 7-36
Cruise control ................................................ 7-38
To set cruise control ........................................ 7-38
To temporarily cancel the cruise control ....... 7-39
To turn off the cruise control ........................... 7-40
To change the cruising speed ......................... 7-40
Cruise control set indicator light .................... 7-41
7-2
Starting and operating
Starting and ope rating
Fuel
Use of a fuel which is low in quality or use of an
inappropriate fuel additive may cause engine
damage.
Fuel requirements
T Non-turbo models
The 2.5-liter engine is designed to operate using un-
leaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 AKI or
higher.
T Turbo models
The 2.5-liter turbo engine is designed to operate using
premium unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of
91 AKI or higher. If premium unleaded gasoline is not
available, regular unleaded gasoline with an octane
rating of 87 AKI or higher may be temporarily used.
For optimum engine performance and driveability, it is
required that you use premium grade unleaded gaso-
line.
T Fuel octane rating
This octane rating is the average of the Research Oc-
tane and Motor Octane numbers and is commonly re-
ferred to as the Anti Knock Index (AKI).
Using a gasoline with a lower octane rating can cause
persistent and heavy knocking, which can damage the
engine. Do not be concerned if your vehicle some-
times knocks lightly when you drive up a hill or when
you accelerate. See your dealer or a qualified service
technician if you use a fuel with the specified octane
rating and your vehicle knocks heavily or persistently.
T Unleaded gasoline
The neck of the fuel filler pipe is designed to accept
only an unleaded gasoline filler nozzle. Under no cir-
cumstances should leaded gasoline be used because
it will damage the emission control system and may
impair driveability and fuel economy.
T Gasoline for California-certified LEV
Your vehicle was certified to California’s low emission
vehicle (LEV) standards as indicated on the under-
hood tune-up label. It is designed to optimize engine
and emission control system performance with gaso-
line that meets the clean burning low-sulfur California
gasoline specifications. If you live in any other state
than California, your vehicle will operate on gasoline
meeting Federal specifications. Gasoline sold outside
7-3
Starting and operating
– CONTINUED –
California is permitted to have higher sulfur levels,
which may affect the performance of your vehicle’s
catalytic converter and may produce a sulfur exhaust
odor or smell. SUBARU recommends that you try a
different brand of unleaded gasoline having lower sul-
fur to determine if the problem is fuel related before re-
turning your vehicle to an authorized dealer for ser-
vice.
T MMT
Some gasoline contains an octane-enhancing additive
called MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tri-
carbonyl). If you use such fuels, your emission control
system performance may deteriorate and the CHECK
ENGINE warning light/Malfunction indicator lamp may
turn on. If this happens, return to your authorized
SUBARU Dealer for service. If it is determined that the
condition is caused by the type of fuel used, repairs
may not be covered by your warranty.
T Gasoline for cleaner air
Your use of gasoline with detergent additives will help
prevent deposits from forming in your engine and fuel
system. This helps keep your engine in tune and your
emission control system working properly, and is a
way of doing your part for cleaner air. If you continu-
ously use a high quality fuel with the proper detergent
and other additives, you should never need to add any
fuel system cleaning agents to your fuel tank.
Many gasolines are now blended with materials called
oxygenates. Use of these fuels can also help keep the
air cleaner. Oxygenated blend fuels, such as MTBE
(Methyl Tertiary Butyl ether) or ethanol (ethyl or grain
alcohol) may be used in your vehicle, but should con-
tain no more than 15% MTBE or 10% ethanol for the
proper operation of your SUBARU.
In addition, some gasoline suppliers are now produc-
ing reformulated gasoline, which is designed to reduce
vehicle emissions. SUBARU approves the use of re-
formulated gasoline.
If you are not sure what the fuel contains, you should
ask your service station operators if their gasoline con-
tains detergents and oxygenates and if they have
been reformulated to reduce vehicle emissions.
As additional guidance, only use fuels suited for your
vehicle as explained below.
y Fuel should be unleaded and have an octane rating
no lower than that specified in this manual.
y Methanol (methyl or wood alcohol) is sometimes
mixed with unleaded gasoline. Methanol can be used
in your vehicle ONLY if it does not exceed 5% of the
fuel mixture AND if it is accompanied by sufficient
quantities of the proper cosolvent and corrosion inhib-
7-4
Starting and operating
itors required to prevent damage to the fuel system.
Do not use fuel containing methanol EXCEPT under
these conditions.
y If undesirable driveability problems are experienced
and you suspect they may be fuel related, try a differ-
ent brand of gasoline before seeking service at your
SUBARU dealer.
y Fuel system damage or driveability problems which
result from the use of improper fuel are not covered
under the SUBARU Limited Warranty.
Fuel filler door and cap
T Refueling
y Gasoline vapor is highly flammable. Before
refueling, always first stop the engine and make
sure that there are no lighted cigarettes, open
flames or electrical sparks in the adjacent area.
y When opening the cap, do not remove the
cap quickly. Fuel may be under pressure and
spray out of the fuel filler neck especially in hot
weather, which may cause injury.
y Never fill gasoline containers on the cargo
bed. Static electricity may ignite gasoline vapor
when filling portable containers. Approved
containers must be removed from the vehicle
and placed on the ground when filling.
Do not fill any portable container on a vehicle.
y Never add any cleaning agents to the fuel
tank. The addition of a cleaning agent may
cause damage to the fuel system.
y Make sure that the cap is tightened until it
clicks to prevent fuel spillage in the event of an
accident.
y Do not let fuel spill on the exterior surfaces of
the vehicle. Fuels may cause paint damage,
which is not covered under the SUBARU Limit-
ed Warranty.
y Always use a genuine SUBARU fuel filler cap.
If you use the wrong cap, it may not fit or have
proper venting, and your fuel tank and emis-
sion control system might be damaged.
7-5
Starting and operating
– CONTINUED –
0
1. To open the fuel filler door, pull it outward.
1) Open
2) Close
2. Remove the fuel filler cap by turning it slowly coun-
terclockwise.
3. Stop filling the tank after the fuel filler pump auto-
matically clicks off. Do not add any more fuel.
4. Put the cap back on, turn it clockwise until you hear
a clicking sound. Be certain not to catch the tether un-
der the cap while tightening.
5. Close the fuel filler door completely.
If you spill any fuel on the painted surface, rinse it off
immediately. Otherwise, the painted surface could be
damaged.
UB7034BA
1
2
UB7030BB
7-6
Starting and operating
NOTE
y You will see the “FUEL DOOR ” sign in the
combination meter. This indicates that the fuel fill-
er door (lid) is located on the right side of the ve-
hicle.
y If the fuel filler cap is not tightened until it clicks
or if the tether is caught under the cap, the CHECK
ENGINE warning light may come on. Refer to the
“Warning and indicator lights” section located in
chapter 3.
y (Turbo models only) Promptly put fuel in the
tank whenever the low fuel warning light comes
on. If the engine misfired as a result of an empty
tank, resulting catalyzer damage could cause
damage to the turbocharger.
HS3023AA
7-7
Starting and operating
– CONTINUED –
State emission testing (U.S. only)
Testing of an All-Wheel Drive vehicle must
NEVER be performed on a single two-wheel dy-
namometer. Attempting to do so will result in
uncontrolled vehicle movement and may cause
an accident or injuries to persons nearby.
Resultant vehicle damage due to improper test-
ing is not covered under the SUBARU Limited
Warranty and is the responsibility of the state
inspection program or its contractors or licens-
ees.
At state inspection time, remember to tell your in-
spection or service station in advance not to place
your SUBARU AWD vehicle on a two-wheel dyna-
mometer. Otherwise, serious transmission dam-
age will result.
Some states have started using dynamometers in
their state inspection programs in order to meet their
obligation under federal law to implement stricter vehi-
cle emission standards to reduce air pollution from ve-
hicles. A dynamometer is a treadmill or roller-like test-
ing device that allows your vehicle’s wheels to turn
while the vehicle remains in one place. Depending on
the severity of a state’s air pollution problems, the
states must adopt either a “basic” or “enhanced” vehi-
cle emission inspection test. Normally, a portion of the
basic emission test consists of an emission inspector
inserting an analyzer probe into the exhaust pipe of an
idling vehicle for a short period of time. States with
more severe air pollution problems are required to
adopt an enhanced vehicle emission test. This test
simulates actual driving conditions on a dynamometer
and permits more accurate measurement of tailpipe
emitted pollution than the basic emission test.
The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) and
states using two-wheel dynamometers in their emis-
sion testing programs have EXEMPTED SUBARU
AWD vehicles from the portion of the testing program
that involves a two-wheel dynamometer.
There are some states that use four-wheel dynamom-
eters in their testing programs. When properly used,
that equipment will not damage an AWD SUBARU ve-
hicle.
Under no circumstances should the rear wheels be
7-8
Starting and operating
jacked off the ground, nor should the driveshaft be dis-
connected for state emission testing.
The EPA has issued regulations for inspecting the On-
Board Diagnostic (OBD) system as part of the state
emissions inspection. The OBD system is designed to
detect engine and transmission problems that might
cause vehicle emissions to exceed allowable limits.
These inspections apply to all 1996 model year and
newer passenger cars and light trucks.
y The inspection of the OBD system consists of a vi-
sual operational check of the “CHECK ENGINE”
warning light/malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) and an
examination of the OBD system with an electronic
scan tool while the engine is running.
y A vehicle passes the OBD system inspection if
proper the “CHECK ENGINE” warning light/MIL illu-
mination is observed, there is no stored diagnostic
trouble codes, and the OBD system readiness moni-
tors are complete.
y A vehicle fails the OBD inspection if the “CHECK
ENGINE” warning light/MIL is not properly operating
or there is one or more diagnostic trouble codes stored
in vehicle’s computer with the “CHECK ENGINE”
warning light/MIL illuminated.
y A state emission inspection may reject (not pass or
fail) a vehicle if the number of OBD system readiness
monitors “Not Ready” is greater than three. Under
this condition, the vehicle operator should be instruct-
ed to drive his/her vehicle for a few days to set the
monitors and return for an emission re-inspection.
y Owners of rejected or failing vehicles should contact
their SUBARU Dealer for service.
7-9
Starting and operating
– CONTINUED –
Preparing to drive
You should perform the following checks and adjust-
ments every day before you start driving.
1. Check that all windows, mirrors, and lights are
clean and unobstructed.
2. Check the appearance and condition of the tires.
Also check tires for proper inflation.
3. Look under the vehicle for any sign of leaks.
4. Check that the hood is fully closed.
5. Check the adjustment of the seat.
6. Check the adjustment of the inside and outside mir-
rors.
7. Fasten your seatbelt. Check that your passengers
have fastened their seatbelts.
8. Check the operation of the warning and indicator
lights when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” po-
sition.
9. Check the gauges, indicator and warning lights af-
ter starting the engine.
NOTE
Engine oil, engine coolant, brake fluid, washer flu-
id and other fluid levels should be checked daily,
weekly or at fuel stops.
Starting the engine
Do not operate the starter motor continuously
for more than ten seconds. If the engine fails to
start after operating the starter for five to ten
seconds, wait for ten seconds or more before
trying again.
Manual transmission vehicle
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Turn off unnecessary lights and accessories.
3. Press the clutch pedal to the floor and shift the shift
lever into neutral.
Hold the clutch pedal to the floor while starting the en-
gine. The starter motor will only operate when the
clutch pedal is pressed fully to the floor.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” position and
check the operation of the warning and indicator lights.
Refer to the “Warning and indicator lights” section
(chapter 3).
5. Turn the ignition switch to the “START” position
without depressing the accelerator pedal. Release
the key immediately after the engine has started.
7-10
Starting and operating
If the engine does not start, try the following:
1)Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF” position and
wait for at least 10 seconds. After checking that the
parking brake is firmly set, turn the ignition switch to
the “START” position while depressing the acceler-
ator pedal slightly (about a quarter of the full stroke).
Release the accelerator pedal as soon as the en-
gine starts.
2)If this fails to start the engine, turn the ignition
switch back to the “OFF” position and wait for at
least 10 seconds. Then fully depress the accelerator
pedal and turn the ignition switch to the “START”
position. If the engine starts, quickly release the ac-
celerator pedal.
3)If this fails to start the engine, turn the ignition
switch again to the “OFF” position. After waiting for
10 seconds or longer, turn the ignition switch to the
“START” position without depressing the accelera-
tor pedal.
4)If the engine still refuses to start, contact your
nearest SUBARU dealer for assistance.
6. Confirm that all warning and indicator lights have
gone off after the engine has started. The fuel injection
system automatically lowers the idle speed as the en-
gine warms up.
NOTE (Turbo models)
The engine may be difficult to start when the bat-
tery has been disconnected and reconnected (for
maintenance or other purposes). This difficulty is
caused by the electronically controlled throttle’s
self-diagnosis function. To overcome it, keep the
ignition switch in the “ON” position for approxi-
mately 10 seconds before starting the engine.
Automatic transmission vehicle
If you restart the engine while the vehicle is
moving, shift the selector lever into the “N” po-
sition. Do not attempt to place the selector lever
of a moving vehicle into the “P” position.
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Turn off unnecessary lights and accessories.
3. Shift the selector lever to the “P” or “N” position
(preferably “P” position). The starter will only operate
when the select lever is at the “P” or “N” position.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” position and
check the operation of the warning and indicator lights.
Refer to the “Warning and indicator lights” section
(chapter 3).
5. Turn the ignition switch to the “START” position
7-11
Starting and operating
– CONTINUED –
without depressing the accelerator pedal. Release
the key immediately after the engine has started.
If the engine does not start, try the following:
1)Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF” position and
wait for at least 10 seconds. After checking that the
parking brake is firmly set, turn the ignition switch to
the “START” position while depressing the acceler-
ator pedal slightly (about a quarter of the full stroke).
Release the accelerator pedal as soon as the en-
gine starts.
2)If this fails to start the engine, turn the ignition
switch back to the “OFF” position and wait for at
least 10 seconds. Then fully depress the accelerator
pedal and turn the ignition switch to the “START”
position. If the engine starts, quickly release the ac-
celerator pedal.
3)If this fails to start the engine, turn the ignition
switch again to the “OFF” position. After waiting for
10 seconds or longer, turn the ignition switch to the
“START” position without depressing the accelera-
tor pedal.
4)If the engine still refuses to start, contact your
nearest SUBARU dealer for assistance.
6. Confirm that all warning and indicator lights have
gone out after the engine has started. The fuel injec-
tion system automatically lowers the idle speed as the
engine warms up.
While the engine is warming up, make sure that the
selector lever is at the “P” or “N” position and that the
parking brake is applied.
NOTE (Turbo models)
The engine may be difficult to start when the bat-
tery has been disconnected and reconnected (for
maintenance or other purposes). This difficulty is
caused by the electronically controlled throttle’s
self-diagnosis function. To overcome it, keep the
ignition switch in the “ON” position for approxi-
mately 10 seconds before starting the engine.
7-12
Starting and operating
Stopping the engine
Do not stop the engine when the vehicle is mov-
ing. This will cause loss of power to the power
steering and the brake booster, making steer-
ing and braking more difficult. It could also re-
sult in accidental activation of the “LOCK” po-
sition on the ignition switch, causing the steer-
ing wheel to lock.
The ignition switch should be turned off only when the
engine is idling.
Manual transmission
Do not drive the vehicle with the clutch disen-
gaged (i.e., when the clutch pedal is depressed)
or with the shift lever in the neutral position.
Engine braking has no effect in either of these
conditions and the risk of an accident is conse-
quently increased.
Shift into reverse ONLY when the vehicle has
completely stopped. It may cause damage to
the transmission to try shifting into reverse
when the vehicle is moving.
The manual transmission is a fully synchromeshed, 5-
forward-speeds and 1-reverse-speed transmission.
7-13
Starting and operating
– CONTINUED –
The shift pattern is shown on the shift lever knob.
When shifting from 5th gear to reverse gear, first re-
turn the shift lever to the neutral position then shift into
reverse gear.
To change gears, fully depress the clutch pedal, move
the shift lever, and gradually let up on the clutch pedal.
If it is difficult to shift into gear, put the transmission in
neutral, release the clutch pedal momentarily, and
then try again.
Shifting speeds
T Recommended shifting speeds
The best compromise between fuel economy and ve-
hicle performance during normal driving is ensured by
shifting up at the speeds listed in the following table.
T Maximum allowable speeds
When shifting down a gear, ensure that the ve-
hicle is not travelling at a speed exceeding the
Maximum Allowable Speed for the gear which
is about to be selected. Failure to observe this
precaution can lead to engine over-revving and
this in turn can result in engine damage.
In addition, sudden application of engine
brakes when the vehicle is travelling on a slip-
1
3
5
2
4
R
N
1
3
5
2
4
R
HS7008BA
Shift up mph (km/h)
1st to 2nd 15 (24)
2nd to 3rd 25 (40)
3rd to 4th 40 (65)
4th to 5th 45 (73)
7-14
Starting and operating
pery surface can lead to wheel locking; as a
consequence, control of the vehicle may be lost
and the risk of an accident increased.
The following table shows the maximum speeds that
are possible with each different gear.
Never exceed the speed limit below for each gear po-
sition except for brief acceleration in an emergency.
The tachometer’s needle will enter the red area if
these speeds are exceeded. Failure to observe this
precaution can lead to excessive engine wear and
poor fuel economy.
mph (km/h)
Never exceed posted speed limits.
Driving tips
Do not drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal
and do not use the clutch to hold your vehicle at a
standstill on an upgrade. Either of those actions may
cause clutch damage.
Do not drive with your hand resting on the shift lever.
This may cause wear on the transmission compo-
nents.
When it is necessary to reduce vehicle speed due to
slow traffic, turning corners, or driving up steep hills,
downshift to a lower gear before the engine starts to
labor.
On steep downgrades, downshift the transmission to
4th, 3rd or 2nd gear as necessary; this helps to main-
tain a safe speed and to extend brake pad life.
In this way, the engine provides a braking effect. Re-
member, if you “ride” (over use) the brakes while de-
scending a hill, they may overheat and not work prop-
erly.
The engine may, on rare occasions, knock when the
vehicle rapidly accelerates or rapidly pulls away from
a standstill. This phenomenon does not indicate a
fault.
Gear Non-turbo models Turbo models
1st 31 (50) 29 (47)
2nd 52 (84) 48 (78)
3rd 74 (119) 71 (114)
7-15
Starting and operating
– CONTINUED –
Automatic transmission (Non-turbo
models)
Do not shift from the “P” or “N” position into
the “D”, “3”, “2”, “1” or “R” position while de-
pressing the accelerator pedal. This may cause
the vehicle to jump forward or backward.
y Shift into the “P” or “R” position only after
the vehicle is completely stopped. Shifting
while the vehicle is moving may cause damage
to the transmission.
y Do not race the engine for more than five sec-
onds in any position except the “N” or “P” po-
sition when the brake is set or the tires are on
blocks. This may cause the automatic transmis-
sion fluid to overheat.
y Avoid shifting from one of the forward driving
positions into the “R” position or vice versa un-
til the vehicle has completely stopped. Such
shifting may cause damage to the transmis-
sion.
The automatic transmission is electronically controlled
and provides 4 forward speeds and 1 reverse speed.
NOTE
Immediately after a disconnected battery is recon-
nected or ATF (automatic transmission fluid) is re-
placed, you may feel that the automatic transmis-
sion operation is somewhat unusual.
This results from erasure or invalidation of data
the on-board computer has collected and stored in
memory to allow the transmission to shift at the
most appropriate times for the current condition
of your vehicle. Optimized shifting will be restored
as the vehicle continues to be driven for a while.
7-16
Starting and operating
Selector lever
: With the brake pedal depressed, move the lever
along the gate.
: Move the lever along the gate.
The selector lever has seven positions.
T P (Park)
This position is for parking the vehicle and starting the
engine.
In this position, the transmission is mechanically
locked to prevent the vehicle from rolling freely.
When you park the vehicle, first set the parking brake
fully, then shift into the “P” position. Do not hold the ve-
hicle with only the transmission.
P
R
N
D
3
2
1
HS7009AA
HS7010BA
7-17
Starting and operating
– CONTINUED –
A shift interlock function is employed in the automatic
transmission system to ensure safe starting of the ve-
hicle.
To shift the selector lever from the “P” to the any other
position, you have to depress the brake pedal fully
when the ignition switch is in the “ON” position. This
prevents the vehicle from lurching when it is started.
If the shift lever does not move from the “P” position
with the brake pedal depressed, refer to the “Shift lock
release” section in this chapter.
T R (Reverse)
This position is for backing the vehicle.
To shift from “N” to “R” position, first stop the vehicle
completely then move the lever to “R” position.
T N (Neutral)
Do not drive the vehicle with the selector lever
in the “N” (neutral) position. Engine braking
has no effect in this condition and the risk of an
accident is consequently increased.
This position is for restarting a stalled engine.
In this position the wheels and transmission are not
locked. In this position, the transmission is neutral; the
vehicle will roll freely, even on the slightest incline un-
less the parking brake or foot brake is on.
Avoid coasting with the transmission neutral.
During coasting, the engine braking does not act.
T D (Drive)
This position is for normal driving.
The transmission automatically shifts into a suitable
gear from 1st to 4th according to the vehicle speed
and the acceleration you require.
When more acceleration is required in this position,
press the accelerator pedal fully to the floor and hold
that position. The transmission will automatically
downshift to 3rd, 2nd or 1st gear. When you release
the pedal, the transmission will return to the original
gear position.
V While climbing a grade
When driving up a hill, undesired upshift to 4th gear is
prevented from taking place when the accelerator is
released. This minimizes the chance of subsequent
downshifting to a lower gear when accelerating again.
This prevents repeated upshifting and downshifting re-
sulting in a smoother operation of the vehicle.
7-18
Starting and operating
NOTE
The transmission may downshift to 2nd or 1st
gear, depending on the way the accelerator pedal
is pressed to accelerate the vehicle again.
V While going down a hill
When descending a steep hill, depressing the brake
pedal will cause the transmission to downshift to 3rd
gear, thus applying engine braking. Reacceleration for
a short time will cause the transmission to upshift nor-
mally.
NOTE
In some cases, depressing the brake pedal on a
downhill grade does not result in an automatic
downshift to 3rd gear. This can happen when the
automatic transmission fluid temperature is very
low, for example, during driving shortly after the
vehicle has been parked for an extended period of
time. When the ATF temperature has risen to a cer-
tain level, automatic downshift normally takes
place. In the meantime, downshift manually for en-
gine braking as required.
Also, downshifting when braking downhill will not
occur at speeds above approximately 50 mph (80
km/h).
T 3 (Third)
This position is for using engine braking when going
down a hill or for climbing a grade.
The transmission automatically shifts into a suitable
gear from 1st to 3rd according to the vehicle speed
and the acceleration you require.
When more acceleration is required in this position,
press the accelerator pedal fully to the floor and hold
that position. The transmission will automatically
downshift to 2nd or 1st gear. When you release the
pedal, the transmission will return to the original gear
position.
T 2 (Second)
This position is for using engine braking when going
down a hill or for climbing a steep grade.
In this position, the transmission holds in the 2nd gear.
Use this position when starting off from a standstill on
slippery road surfaces such as mud or snow. It will en-
sure greater traction.
T 1 (First)
This position is for driving up or down very steep
grades, or driving through mud or sand, or on slippery
surfaces. In this position, the transmission holds in the
1st gear.
7-19
Starting and operating
– CONTINUED –
T Maximum speeds
When shifting down a gear, ensure that the ve-
hicle is not travelling at a speed exceeding the
Maximum Allowable Speed for the gear which
is about to be selected. Failure to observe this
precaution can lead to engine over-revving and
this in turn can result in engine damage.
In addition, sudden application of engine
brakes when the vehicle is travelling on a slip-
pery surface can lead to wheel locking; as a
consequence, control of the vehicle may be lost
and the risk of an accident increased.
The following tables show the maximum speeds that
are possible with each different gear.
When shifting down a gear, it is important to confirm
that the current vehicle speed is not in excess of the
Maximum Allowable Speed of the gear which is about
to be selected.
mph (km/h)
Never exceed posted speed limits.
NOTE
In order to prevent over-revving during decelera-
tion of the vehicle, the transmission will remain in
the current gear if the speed of the vehicle is in ex-
cess of the Maximum Allowable Speed for the gear
to which the selector lever has been moved.
Driving tips
y Always apply the foot or parking brake when the ve-
hicle is stopped in the “D”, “3”, “2”, “1” or “R” position.
y Always set the parking brake when parking your ve-
hicle. Do not hold the vehicle with only the transmis-
sion.
y Do not keep the vehicle in a stationary position on
an uphill grade by using the “D”, “3”, “2”, or “1” position.
Use the brake instead.
Position Non-turbo models
1 23 (38)
2 55 (89)
3 91 (147)
7-20
Starting and operating
The engine may, on rare occasions, knock when the
vehicle rapidly accelerates or rapidly pulls away from
a standstill. This phenomenon does not indicate a
fault.
Shift lock release
If the selector lever does not move from the “P” posi-
tion with the brake pedal depressed and the ignition
switch in the “ON” position, perform the following
steps:
To override the shift lock:
1. Set the parking brake and stop the engine.
2. Take out the screwdriver from the tool bag.
3. Remove the cover by prying on the edge with the
flat-head screwdriver.
4. Insert the screwdriver into the hole.
P
R
N
D
3
2
1
HS7009BA
HS7011BA
7-21
Starting and operating
– CONTINUED –
5. Push down on the screwdriver and move the selec-
tor lever from the “P” to the “N” position.
6. Remove the screwdriver from the hole. Depress
the brake pedal and start the engine.
Take your vehicle to the nearest SUBARU dealer im-
mediately to have the system repaired.
Automatic transmission (Turbo mod-
els)
Do not shift from the “P” or “N” position into
the “D”, “3”, “2”, “1” or “R” position while de-
pressing the accelerator pedal. This may cause
the vehicle to jump forward or backward.
y Shift into the “P” or “R” position only after
the vehicle is completely stopped. Shifting
while the vehicle is moving may cause damage
to the transmission.
y Do not race the engine for more than five sec-
onds in any position except the “N” or “P” po-
sition when the brake is set or when wheel
blocks are used. This may cause the automatic
transmission fluid to overheat.
y Avoid shifting from one of the forward driving
positions into the “R” position or vice versa un-
til the vehicle has completely stopped. Such
shifting may cause damage to the transmis-
7-22
Starting and operating
sion.
The automatic transmission is electronically controlled
and provides 4 forward speeds and 1 reverse speed.
Also, it has a manual mode.
NOTE
Immediately after ATF (automatic transmission
fluid) is replaced, you may feel that the automatic
transmission operation is somewhat unusual.
This results from invalidation of data which the
on-board computer has collected and stored in
memory to allow the transmission to shift at the
most appropriate times for the current condition
of your vehicle. Optimized shifting will be restored
as the vehicle continues to be driven for a while.
Selector lever
1) Release button
1
UB7026BB
7-23
Starting and operating
– CONTINUED –
: When the brake pedal depressed, shift while
pressing the button in.
: Shift while pressing the button in.
: Shift without pressing the button.
The selector lever has seven positions, “P”, “R”, “N”,
“D”, “3”, “2” and “1”, and also has a manual gate for us-
ing SPORTSHIFT mode.
The release button must be pushed to select the “P”,
“R”, or “2” positions.
T P (Park)
This position is for parking the vehicle and starting the
engine.
In this position, the transmission is mechanically
locked to prevent the vehicle from rolling freely.
When you park the vehicle, first set the parking brake
fully, then shift into the “P” position. Do not hold the ve-
hicle with only the transmission.
A shift interlock function is employed in the automatic
transmission system to ensure safe starting of the ve-
hicle.
To shift the selector lever from the “P” to any other po-
sition, you have to depress the brake pedal fully then
push the release button on the selector lever when the
ignition switch is in the “ON” position. This prevents
the vehicle from lurching when it is started.
If the shift lever does not move from the “P” position
with the brake pedal depressed, the release button
pushed in, and the ignition switch in the ON position,
refer to the “Shift lock release” section in this chapter.
T R (Reverse)
This position is for backing the vehicle.
To shift from the “N” to “R” position, first stop the vehi-
cle completely then move the lever to the “R” position
while pushing the release button.
UB7025BA
7-24
Starting and operating
T N (Neutral)
Do not drive the vehicle with the selector lever
in the “N” (neutral) position. Engine braking
has no effect in this condition and the risk of an
accident is consequently increased.
This position is for restarting a stalled engine.
In this position the wheels and transmission are not
locked. In this position, the transmission is neutral; the
vehicle will roll freely, even on the slightest incline un-
less the parking brake or foot brake is on.
Avoid coasting with the transmission neutral.
During coasting, there is no engine braking effect.
NOTE
If the selector lever is in the “N” position when you
stop the engine for parking, you may not subse-
quently be able to move it to the “R” and “P” posi-
tions. If this happens, turn the ignition switch to
the “ON” position. You will then be able to move
the selector lever to the “P” position.
T D (Drive)
This position is for normal driving.
The transmission automatically shifts into a suitable
gear from 1st to 4th according to the vehicle speed
and the acceleration you require.
When more acceleration is required in this position,
press the accelerator pedal fully to the floor and hold
that position. The transmission will automatically
downshift to 3rd, 2nd or 1st gear. When you release
the pedal, the transmission will return to the original
gear position.
To use the SPORTSHIFT mode, move the lever from
this position into the manual gate.
V While climbing a grade
When driving up a hill, undesired upshift to 4th gear is
prevented from taking place when the accelerator is
released. This minimizes the chance of subsequent
downshifting to a lower gear when accelerating again.
This prevents repeated upshifting and downshifting re-
sulting in a smoother operation of the vehicle.
NOTE
The transmission may downshift to 2nd or 1st
gear, depending on the way the accelerator pedal
is pressed to accelerate the vehicle again.
V While going down a hill
When descending a steep hill, depressing the brake
pedal will cause the transmission to downshift to 3rd
7-25
Starting and operating
– CONTINUED –
gear, thus applying engine braking. Reacceleration for
a short time will cause the transmission to upshift nor-
mally.
NOTE
In some cases, depressing the brake pedal on a
downhill grade does not result in an automatic
downshift to 3rd gear. This can happen when the
automatic transmission fluid temperature is very
low, for example, during driving shortly after the
vehicle has been parked for an extended period of
time. When the ATF temperature has risen to a cer-
tain level, automatic downshift normally takes
place. In the meantime, downshift manually for en-
gine braking as required.
Also, downshifting when braking downhill will not
occur at speeds above approximately 50 mph (80
km/h).
T 3 (Third)
This position is for using engine braking when going
down a hill or for climbing a grade.
The transmission automatically shifts into a suitable
gear from 1st to 3rd according to the vehicle speed
and the acceleration you require.
When more acceleration is required in this position,
press the accelerator pedal fully to the floor and hold
that position. The transmission will automatically
downshift to 2nd or 1st gear. When you release the
pedal, the transmission will return to the original gear
position.
T 2 (Second)
To shift from the “3” to “2” position, push the release
button.
This position is for using engine braking when going
down a hill or for climbing a steep grade.
In this position, the transmission holds in the 2nd gear.
Use this position when starting off from a standstill on
slippery road surfaces such as mud or snow. It will en-
sure greater traction.
T 1 (First)
This position is for driving up or down very steep
grades, or driving through mud or sand, or on slippery
surfaces. In this position, the transmission holds in the
1st gear.
Selector lever reverse inhibiting func-
tion
This function prevents accidental movement of the se-
lector lever to the “R” position while the vehicle is mov-
ing.
7-26
Starting and operating
The function becomes operational when the vehicle
reaches a speed of approximately 6 mph (10 km/h).
Once operational, it prevents the selector lever from
being moved from the “N” position to the “R” position.
When the vehicle speed drops below 6 mph (10 km/h),
the function is canceled. The selector lever can then
be moved to the “R” and “P” positions.
When the ignition switch has been turned to the “OFF”
position, movement of the selector lever from the “N”
position to the “R” position is possible for a limited time
period and then becomes impossible. Also, the selec-
tor lever cannot be moved to the “R” position when it
has been placed in the “P” position and then placed
again in the “N” position. When movement of the se-
lector lever from the “N” position to the “R” position has
become impossible, turn the ignition switch back to the
“ON” position then move the selector lever to the “P”
position. Pressing the selector lever release button
also makes it possible to move the selector lever to the
“P” position at this time.
T Selector lever release button
If you inadvertently have turned the ignition switch to
the “OFF” position with the selector lever in the “N” po-
sition, proceed as follows. By referring to the “Shift
lock release” section in this chapter, remove the shift
lock release cover. Then, with the screwdriver inserted
into the hole, move the selector lever to the “P” posi-
tion. If the selector lever reverse inhibiting function
fails, have the vehicle inspected by the nearest
SUBARU dealer.
UB7039BA
7-27
Starting and operating
– CONTINUED –
Selection of SPORTSHIFT mode (man-
ual mode)
1) Selector lever
1. Select the SPORTSHIFT mode by moving the se-
lector lever into the manual gate from the “D” position
with the vehicle stationary or moving.
1) Lamp showing whether upshift is possible
2) Lamp showing whether downshift is possible
3) Indication of currently selected gear
2. Once the SPORTSHIFT mode is selected, the cur-
rently selected gear is shown by the shift position indi-
cator in the meter cluster. Next to this indication, ar-
row-shaped lamps show whether an upshift is possi-
ble and whether a downshift is possible.
Lamps showing whether upshifting and downshifting
are possible:
The and lamps show whether upshifting and
downshifting are possible. When both lamps are off,
SPORTSHIFT operation is not possible. When both
lamps are on, upshifting and downshifting are both
1
UB7027BB
1
2
3
UBS094BB
7-28
Starting and operating
possible. When only the lamp is on, only upshift-
ing is possible. When only the lamp is on, only
downshifting is possible.
3. Perform gearshifts using the selector lever. You
can shift by one gear at a time in the 1st-to-4th-gear
range.
Upshifting
Shift to the next-higher gear (in the 1st-to-4th-gear
range) by pushing the selector lever toward the “+”
end of the manual gate.
Downshifting
Shift to the next-lower gear (in the 1st-to-4th-gear
range) by pushing the selector lever toward the “–”
end of the manual gate.
4. To deselect the SPORTSHIFT mode, return the se-
lector lever to the “D” position from the manual gate.
NOTE
Please read the following points carefully and bear
them in mind when using the SPORTSHIFT mode.
y When the temperature of the automatic trans-
mission fluid is lower or higher than normal, warn-
ing beeps are emitted and the shift position indica-
tor shows “–”. If these warnings are issued, dese-
lect the SPORTSHIFT mode to protect the auto-
matic transmission from damage.
y Automatic gearshifts do not take place in the
SPORTSHIFT mode. Perform gearshifts in accor-
dance with road conditions so that the tachometer
needle does not enter the red zone. If the engine
speed reaches a predetermined level, a fuel-cut
function will operate. Shift up if this happens.
y If you attempt to shift down when the engine
speed is too high, i.e., when a downshift would
push the tachometer needle beyond the red zone,
beeps will be emitted to warn you that the down-
shift is not possible.
y If you attempt to shift up when the vehicle speed
is too low, the transmission will not respond.
y You can perform a skip-shift (for example, from
4th to 2nd or from 2nd to 4th) by operating the se-
lector lever twice in rapid succession.
y The transmission automatically selects 1st gear
when the vehicle stops moving. It will not permit a
standing start in 2nd gear.
T Maximum speeds
When down shifting a gear, ensure that the ve-
hicle is not travelling at a speed exceeding the
Maximum Allowable Speed for the gear which
7-29
Starting and operating
– CONTINUED –
is about to be selected. Failure to observe this
precaution can lead to engine over-revving and
this in turn can result in engine damage.
In addition, sudden application of engine brak-
ing caused by downshifting when the vehicle is
travelling on a slippery surface can lead to
wheel locking; as a consequence, control of the
vehicle may be lost and the risk of an accident
increased.
The following tables show the maximum speeds that
are possible with each different gear.
When down shifting, it is important to confirm that the
current vehicle speed is not in excess of the Maximum
Allowable Speed of the gear which is about to be se-
lected.
mph (km/h)
*: SPORTSHIFT mode
Never exceed posted speed limits.
NOTE
y In order to prevent over-revving during acceler-
ation of the vehicle, the transmission will automat-
ically shift to the next higher gear if the Maximum
Allowable Speed for the current gear is reached.
y Similarly, in order to prevent over-revving dur-
ing deceleration of the vehicle, the transmission
will remain in the current gear if the speed of the
vehicle is in excess of the Maximum Allowable
Speed for the gear to which the selector lever has
been moved.
Driving tips
y Always apply the foot or parking brake when the ve-
hicle is stopped in the “D”, “3”, “2”, “1”, or “R” position.
y Always set the parking brake when parking your ve-
hicle. Do not hold the vehicle with only the transmis-
sion.
y Do not keep the vehicle in a stationary position on
an uphill grade by using the “D”, “3”, “2” or “1” position.
Use the brake instead.
y The engine may, on rare occasions, knock when the
vehicle rapidly accelerates or rapidly pulls away from
a standstill. This phenomenon does not indicate a
fault.
Position Turbo models
1 29 (47), 36 (58)
*
2 60 (96), 62 (100)
*
3 102 (164), 102 (164)
*
7-30
Starting and operating
Shift lock release
If the selector lever does not move from the “P” posi-
tion with the brake pedal depressed and the ignition
switch in the “ON” position, perform the following
steps:
To override the shift lock:
1. Set the parking brake and stop the engine.
2. Take out the screwdriver from the tool bag.
3. Remove the cover by prying on the edge with the
flat-head screwdriver.
4. Insert the screwdriver into the hole.
5. Push down on the screwdriver, push down the but-
ton and move the selector lever from the “P” to the “N”
position.
6. Remove the screwdriver from the hole. Depress
the brake pedal and start the engine.
Take your vehicle to the nearest SUBARU dealer im-
mediately to have the system repaired.
UB7041BA
UB7040BA
7-31
Starting and operating
– CONTINUED –
Limited slip differential (LSD)
y Never start the engine while a tire on one side
is jacked up, as the vehicle may move.
y If one rear tire is spinning in mud, avoid con-
tinued spinning at high speed as this could ad-
versely affect the LSD.
y If a different size rear tire is temporarily used
(as in an emergency), it will adversely affect the
LSD. Always replace it with a regular size tire as
soon as possible.
The LSD provides optimum distribution of power ac-
cording to the difference in revolutions between the
right and left rear wheels that may be caused by cer-
tain driving conditions, thereby improving driving sta-
bility on snow-covered, muddy or other slippery roads.
Power steering
Do not hold the steering wheel at the fully
locked position left or right for more than five
seconds. This may damage the power steering
pump.
The power steering system operates only when the
engine is running.
If you lose power steering assist because the engine
stops or the system fails to function, you can steer but
it will take much more effort.
NOTE
Right after the engine has been started and before
it has warmed up, you may hear a noise coming
from areas adjacent to the power steering pump
which is located at the right-front area of the en-
gine compartment. This noise is normal. It does
not indicate power steering system trouble.
7-32
Starting and operating
Braking
Braking tips
Never rest your foot on the brake pedal while
driving. This can cause dangerous overheating
of the brakes and needless wear on the brake
pads and linings.
T When the brakes get wet
When driving in rain or after washing the vehicle, the
brakes may get wet. As a result, brake stopping dis-
tance will be longer. To dry the brakes, drive the vehi-
cle at a safe speed while lightly depressing the brake
pedal to heat up the brakes.
T Use of engine braking
Remember to make use of engine braking in addition
to foot braking. When descending a grade, if only the
foot brake is used, the brakes may start working im-
properly because of brake fluid overheating, caused
by overheated brake pads. To help prevent this, shift
into a lower gear to get stronger engine braking.
T Braking when a tire is punctured
Do not depress the brake pedal suddenly when a tire
is punctured. This could cause a loss of control of the
vehicle. Keep driving straight ahead while gradually
reducing speed. Then slowly pull off the road to a safe
place.
Brake system
T Two separate circuits
Your vehicle has a dual circuit brake systems. Each
circuit works diagonally across the vehicle. If one cir-
cuit of the brake system should fail, the other half of
the system still works. If one circuit fails, the brake
pedal will go down much closer to the floor than usual
and you will need to press it down much harder. And a
much longer distance will be needed to stop the vehi-
cle.
T Brake booster
The brake booster uses engine manifold vacuum to
assist braking force. Do not turn off the engine while
driving because that will turn off the brake booster, re-
sulting in poor braking power.
The brakes will continue to work even when the brake
booster completely stops functioning. If this happens,
however, you will have to push the pedal much harder
7-33
Starting and operating
– CONTINUED –
than normal and the braking distance will increase.
Disc brake pad wear warning indica-
tors
The disc brake pad wear warning indicators on the
disc brakes give a warning noise when the brake pads
are worn.
If a squeaking or scraping noise is heard from the disc
brakes while braking, immediately have your vehicle
inspected by the nearest SUBARU dealer.
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)
Always use the utmost care in driving – over-
confidence because you are driving with an
ABS equipped vehicle could easily lead to a se-
rious accident.
y The ABS system does not always decrease
stopping distance. You should always maintain
a safe following distance from other vehicles.
y When driving on badly surfaced roads, gravel
roads, icy road, or over deep newly fallen snow,
stopping distances may be longer for a vehicle
with the ABS system than one without. When
driving under these conditions, therefore, re-
duce your speed and leave ample distance from
other vehicles.
y When you feel the ABS system operating,
you should maintain constant brake pedal pres-
sure. Do not pump the brake pedal since doing
so may defeat the operation of the ABS system.
HS7012BA
7-34
Starting and operating
The ABS system prevents the lock-up of wheels which
may occur during sudden braking or braking on slip-
pery road surfaces. This helps prevent the loss of
steering control and directional stability caused by
wheel lock-up.
When the ABS system is operating, you may hear a
chattering noise or feel a slight vibration in the brake
pedal. This is normal when the ABS operates.
The ABS system will not operate when the vehicle
speed is below approximately 6 mph (10 km/h).
ABS system self-check
You may feel a slight shock in the brake pedal and
hear the operating sound of ABS from the engine com-
partment just after the vehicle is started. This is
caused by an automatic functional test of the ABS sys-
tem being carried out and does not indicate any abnor-
mal condition.
ABS warning light
The ABS warning light comes on when the ignition
switch is turned to the “ON” position and goes out after
about two seconds.
This is an indication that the ABS system is working
properly.
If the warning light behaves as follows, the ABS
system may not be working properly.
When the warning light is on, the ABS function
shuts down; however, the conventional brake
system continues to operate normally.
UB4010GA
7-35
Starting and operating
– CONTINUED –
y The warning light does not come on when the
ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position.
y The warning light comes on when the ignition
switch is turned to the “ON” position, but it
does not go out even when the vehicle speed
exceeds approximately 8 mph (12 km/h).
y The warning light comes on during driving.
If these occur, have the ABS system repaired at
the first available opportunity by your SUBARU
dealer.
NOTE
If the warning light behavior is as described be-
low, the ABS system may be considered normal.
y The warning light comes on right after the en-
gine is started but goes out immediately, remain-
ing off.
y The warning light remains on after the engine
has been started, but it goes out when the vehicle
speed reaches about 8 mph (12 km/h).
y The warning light comes on during driving, but
it goes out immediately and remains off.
When driving with an insufficient battery voltage such
as when the engine is jump started, the ABS warning
light may come on. This is due to the low battery volt-
age and does not indicate a malfunction. When the
battery becomes fully charged, the light will go out.
7-36
Starting and operating
Parking your vehicle
y Never leave unattended children or pets in
the vehicle. They could accidentally injure
themselves or others through inadvertent oper-
ation of the vehicle. Also, on hot or sunny days,
the temperature in a closed vehicle could
quickly become high enough to cause severe
or possibly fatal injuries to them.
y Do not park the vehicle over flammable mate-
rials such as dry grass, waste paper or rags, as
they may burn easily if they come near hot en-
gine or exhaust system parts.
y Be sure to stop the engine if you take a nap in
the vehicle. If engine exhaust gas enters the
passenger compartment, occupants in the ve-
hicle could die from carbon monoxide (CO)
contained in the exhaust gas.
Never drive while the parking brake is set be-
cause this will cause unnecessary wear on the
brake linings. Before starting to drive, always
make sure that the parking brake has been fully
released.
To set the parking brake, press the brake pedal firmly
and hold it down while fully pulling up the parking
brake lever.
To release the parking brake, pull the lever up slightly,
press the release button, then lower the lever while
keeping the button pressed.
When the parking brake is set while the engine is run-
ning, the parking brake warning light comes on. After
starting the vehicle, be sure that the warning light has
gone out before the vehicle is driven. Refer to the
UB4001BA
7-37
Starting and operating
– CONTINUED –
“Warning and indicator lights” section (chapter 3).
When parking your vehicle, always set the parking
brake firmly and put the shift lever in the “1” (1st) for an
upgrade or “R” (Reverse) for a downgrade for manual
transmission vehicles, or in the “P” (Park) position for
automatic transmission vehicles. Always set the park-
ing brake firmly when parking your vehicle. Never rely
on the transmission alone to hold the vehicle.
When parking on a hill, always turn the steering wheel.
When the vehicle is headed up the hill, the front
wheels should be turned away from the curb.
When facing downhill, the front wheels should be
turned into the curb.
UB7033AA
UB7032AA
7-38
Starting and operating
Cruise control
Do not use the cruise control under any of the
following conditions. This may cause loss of
vehicle control:
y driving up or down a steep grade
y driving on slippery or winding roads
y driving in heavy traffic
Cruise control enables you to maintain a constant ve-
hicle speed without holding your foot on the accelera-
tor pedal and it is operative when the vehicle speed is
25 mph (40 km/h) or more. Make sure the main switch
is turned “OFF” when the cruise control is not in use to
avoid unintentionally by setting the cruise control.
To set cruise control
0
UB7038BA
ACC
RES
CANCEL
SET
COAST
HS7018BA
7-39
Starting and operating
– CONTINUED –
1. Push the “CRUISE” main switch. The indicator light
on the switch will come on.
2. Depress the accelerator pedal until the vehicle
reaches the desired speed.
3. Push the control lever downward in the “SET,
COAST” direction and release it. Then release the ac-
celerator pedal.
The vehicle will maintain the desired speed.
At this time, the “ ” indicator light is illuminated in
the combination meter.
Vehicle speed can be temporarily increased while
driving with the cruise control activated. Simply de-
press the accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehicle.
When the accelerator pedal is released, the vehicle
will return to and maintain the previous cruising speed.
To temporarily cancel the cruise con-
trol
There are four ways to cancel the cruise control tem-
porarily:
y Depress the brake pedal.
y Pull the control lever in the “CANCEL” direction. (if
so equipped)
y Depress the clutch pedal (manual transmission ve-
hicles only).
y Shift the selector lever into the “N” position (auto-
matic transmission vehicles only).
y Shift the shift lever into neutral position (manual
transmission vehicles only).
The “ ” indicator light in the combination meter
goes off when the cruise control is cancelled.
To resume the cruise control after it has been tempo-
rarily canceled and with vehicle speed of about 20
mph (32 km/h) or more, push the control lever upward
in the “ACCEL, RESUME” direction to return to the
original cruising speed automatically.
The “ ” indicator light in the combination meter
will automatically come on at this time.
UB4010KA
7-40
Starting and operating
To turn off the cruise control
There are two ways to turn off the cruise control:
y Push the main switch again.
y Turn the ignition switch to the “ACC” position (but
only when the vehicle is completely stopped).
To change the cruising speed
T To increase the speed (by control lever)
Push the control lever upward in the “ACCEL, RE-
SUME” direction and hold it until the vehicle reaches
the desired speed. Then, release the control lever.
The vehicle speed at that moment will be memorized
and treated as the new set speed.
When the difference between the actual vehicle speed
and the set speed is less than 4 mph (6.8 km/h), the
set speed can be increased 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each
time by pressing the control lever upward in the “AC-
CEL, RESUME” direction quickly.
T To increase the speed (by accelerator pedal)
1. Depress the accelerator pedal to accelerate the ve-
hicle to the desired speed.
2. Push the control lever downward in the “SET,
COAST” direction once. Now the desired speed is set
and the vehicle will keep running at that speed without
depressing the accelerator pedal.
NOTE
If the difference between the actual vehicle speed
when the control lever is pushed downward and
the speed last time you set it is less than 4 mph
(6.8 km/h), the vehicle speed will be lowered by 1
mph (1.6 km/h). This occurs because the cruise
control system unit regards this lever operation as
that intended to decrease the vehicle speed.
T To decrease the speed (by control lever)
Push the control lever downward in the “SET, COAST”
direction and hold it until the vehicle reaches the de-
sired speed. Then, release the control lever. The vehi-
cle speed at that moment will be memorized and treat-
ed as the new set speed.
When the difference between the actual vehicle speed
and the set speed is less than 4 mph (6.8 km/h), the
set speed can be lowered 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time
by pressing the control lever downward in the “SET,
COAST” direction quickly.
T To decrease the speed (by brake pedal)
1. Depress the brake pedal to release cruise control
temporarily.
2. When the speed decreases to the desired speed,
7-41
Starting and operating
– CONTINUED –
press the control lever downward in the “SET,
COAST” direction once. Now the desired speed is set
and the vehicle will keep running at that speed without
depressing the accelerator pedal.
Cruise control set indicator light
T Non-turbo models
The light comes on when vehicle speed has been set.
T Turbo models
The Cruise set indicator light comes on when the igni-
tion switch is turned to the “ON” position and goes out
after about three seconds.
The light comes on when vehicle speed has been set.
NOTE
y If you move the cruise control lever while turn-
ing the ignition switch “ON”, the cruise control
function is deactivated and the cruise control set
indicator light flashes. To reactivate the cruise
control function, turn the ignition switch back to
the “ACC” or “LOCK” position, and then turn it
again to the “ON” position.
y If this indicator light and the “ ” indicator
light flash simultaneously during driving, have the
vehicle checked by your nearest SUBARU dealer.
8-1
8
Driving tips
New vehicle break-in driving – the first
1,000 miles (1,600 km) ............................... 8-2
Fuel economy hints ...................................... 8-2
Engine exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) .... 8-3
Catalytic converter ........................................ 8-4
Periodic inspections ..................................... 8-6
Driving in foreign countries ......................... 8-6
Driving tips for AWD vehicles ...................... 8-7
Off road driving ............................................. 8-9
Winter driving ................................................ 8-11
Operation during cold weather ........................ 8-11
Driving on snowy and icy roads ...................... 8-13
Corrosion protection ........................................ 8-14
Snow tires .......................................................... 8-14
Tire chains ......................................................... 8-15
Rocking the vehicle .......................................... 8-16
Loading your vehicle .................................... 8-16
Vehicle capacity weight ................................... 8-18
GVWR and GAWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating and Gross Axle Weight Rating) ........ 8-19
Trailer hitch (if equipped) ............................. 8-20
Connecting a trailer .......................................... 8-20
When you do not tow a trailer ......................... 8-24
Trailer towing ................................................ 8-24
Warranties and maintenance ........................... 8-24
Maximum load limits ........................................ 8-25
Trailer hitches ................................................... 8-30
Connecting a trailer .......................................... 8-30
Trailer towing tips ............................................. 8-33
8-2
Driving tips
Driving tips
New vehicle break-in driving – the
first 1,000 miles (1,600 km)
The performance and long life of your vehicle are de-
pendent on how you handle and care for your vehicle
while it is new. Follow these instructions during the
first 1,000 miles (1,600 km):
y Do not race the engine. And do not allow engine
speed to exceed 4,000 rpm except in an emergency.
y Do not drive at one constant engine or vehicle
speed for a long time, either fast or slow.
y Avoid starting suddenly and rapid acceleration, ex-
cept in an emergency.
y Avoid hard braking, except in an emergency.
The same break-in procedures should be applied to a
newly installed or overhauled engine or when brake
pads or brake linings are replaced with new ones.
Fuel economy hints
The following suggestions will help to save your fuel.
y Select the proper gear position for the speed and
road conditions.
y Avoid sudden acceleration or deceleration. Always
accelerate gently until you reach the desired speed.
Then try to maintain that speed for as long as possible.
y Do not pump the accelerator and avoid racing the
engine.
y Avoid unnecessary engine idling.
y Keep the engine properly tuned.
y Keep the tires inflated to the correct pressure shown
on the tire placard, which is located under the door
latch on the driver’s side. Low pressure will increase
tire wear and fuel consumption.
y Use the air conditioner only when necessary.
y Keep the front and rear wheels in proper alignment.
y Avoid carrying unnecessary luggage or cargo.
8-3
Driving tips
– CONTINUED –
Engine exhaust gas (Carbon monox-
ide)
y Never inhale engine exhaust gas. Engine ex-
haust gas contains carbon monoxide, a color-
less and odorless gas which is dangerous, or
even lethal, if inhaled.
y Always properly maintain the engine exhaust
system to prevent engine exhaust gas from en-
tering the vehicle.
y Never run the engine in a closed space, such
as a garage, except for the brief time needed to
drive the vehicle in or out of it.
y Avoid remaining in a parked vehicle for a
lengthy time while the engine is running. If that
is unavoidable, then use the ventilation fan to
force fresh air into the vehicle.
y Always keep the front ventilator inlet grille
free from snow, leaves or other obstructions to
ensure that the ventilation system always
works properly.
y If at any time you suspect that exhaust fumes
are entering the vehicle, have the problem
checked and corrected as soon as possible. If
you must drive under these conditions, drive
only with all windows fully open.
NOTE
Due to the expansion and contraction of the met-
als used in the manufacture of the exhaust sys-
tem, you may hear a crackling sound coming from
the exhaust system for a short time after the en-
gine has been shut off. This sound is normal.
8-4
Driving tips
Catalytic converter
y Avoid fire hazards. Do not drive or park the
vehicle anywhere near flammable materials
(e.g. grass, paper, rags or leaves), because the
catalytic converter operates at very high tem-
peratures.
y Keep everyone and flammable materials
away from the exhaust pipe while the engine is
running. The exhaust gas is very hot.
Non-turbo models
HS8002BA
8-5
Driving tips
– CONTINUED –
Turbo models
The catalytic converter is installed in the exhaust sys-
tem. It serves as catalyst to reduce HC, CO and NOx
in exhaust gases, thus providing cleaner exhaust.
To avoid damage to the catalytic converter:
y Use only unleaded gasoline. Even a small amount
of leaded gasoline will damage the catalytic converter.
y Never start the engine by pushing or pulling the ve-
hicle.
y Avoid racing the engine.
y Never turn off the ignition switch while the vehicle is
moving.
y Keep your engine tuned-up. If you feel the engine
running rough (misfiring, backfiring or incomplete
combustion), have your vehicle checked and repaired
by an authorized SUBARU dealer.
y Do not apply undercoating or rust prevention treat-
ment to the heat shield of catalytic converter and the
exhaust system.
US8511BA
8-6
Driving tips
Periodic inspections
To keep your vehicle in the best condition at all times,
always have the recommended maintenance services
listed in the maintenance schedule in the “Warranty
and Maintenance Booklet” performed at the specified
time or mileage intervals.
Driving in foreign countries
When planning to use your vehicle in another country:
y Confirm the availability of the correct fuel. (Refer to
the “Fuel requirements” section in chapter 7.)
y Comply with all regulations and requirements of
each country.
8-7
Driving tips
– CONTINUED –
Driving tips for AWD vehicles
y Always maintain a safe driving speed accord-
ing to the road and weather conditions in order
to avoid having an accident on a sharp turn,
during sudden braking or under other similar
conditions.
y Always use the utmost care in driving – over-
confidence because you are driving an all
wheel drive vehicle could easily lead to a seri-
ous accident.
All wheel drive distributes the engine power to all four
wheels. AWD vehicles provide better traction when
driving on slippery, wet or snow-covered roads and
when moving out of mud, dirt and sand. By shifting
power between the front and rear wheels, SUBARU
AWD can also provide added traction during acceler-
ation, and added engine braking force during deceler-
ation.
Therefore, your SUBARU AWD vehicle may handle
differently than an ordinary two wheel drive vehicle
and it contains some features unique to AWD. For
safety purposes as well as to avoid damaging the
AWD system, you should keep the following tips in
mind:
HS8003BA
8-8
Driving tips
y An AWD vehicle is better able to climb steeper
roads under snowy or slippery conditions than a two
wheel drive vehicle. There is little difference in han-
dling, however, during extremely sharp turns or sud-
den braking. Therefore, when driving down a slope or
turning corners, be sure to reduce your speed and
maintain an ample distance from other vehicles.
y When replacing a tire, make sure you use only the
same size, circumference, construction, brand, and
load range as the original tires listed on the tire plac-
ard. Using other sizes, circumferences or construction
may result in severe mechanical damage to the drive
train of your vehicle and may affect ride, handling,
braking, speedometer/odometer calibration, and
clearance between the body and tires. It also may be
dangerous and lead to loss of vehicle control.
y If you use a temporary spare tire to replace a flat
tire, be sure to use the original temporary spare tire
stored in the vehicle. Using other sizes may result in
severe mechanical damage to the drive train of your
vehicle.
y Always check the cold tire pressure before starting
to drive. The recommended tire pressure is provided
on the tire placard, which is located under the door
latch on the driver’s side.
y Tire chains should always be placed on the front
wheels only.
y There are some precautions that you must observe
when towing your vehicle. For detail information, see
“Towing” section in chapter 9.
8-9
Driving tips
– CONTINUED –
Off road driving
y Always maintain a safe driving speed accord-
ing to the road and weather conditions in order
to avoid having an accident on a sharp turn,
during sudden braking or under other similar
conditions.
y Always use the utmost care in driving – over-
confidence because you are driving an all
wheel drive vehicle could easily lead to a seri-
ous accident.
Because of the AWD feature and higher ground clear-
ance, your SUBARU can be driven on ordinary roads
or off-road. But please keep in mind that an AWD
SUBARU is neither a conventional off-road vehicle nor
an all-terrain vehicle. If you do take your SUBARU off-
road, certain common sense precautions such as the
following should be taken:
y Make certain that you and all of your passengers
are wearing seatbelts.
y Carry some emergency equipment, such as a tow-
ing rope or chain, a shovel, wheel blocks, first aid kit
and cell phone or citizens band radio.
y Drive carefully. Do not take unnecessary risks by
driving in dangerous areas or over rough terrain.
y Slow down and employ extra caution at all times.
When driving off-road, you will not have the benefit of
marked traffic lanes, banked curves, traffic signs and
the like.
y Do not drive across steep slopes. Instead, drive ei-
ther straight up or straight down the slopes. A vehicle
can much more easily tip over sideways than it can
end over end. Avoid driving straight up or down slopes
that are too steep.
y Avoid sharp turning maneuvers, especially at higher
speeds.
y Do not grip the inside or spokes of the steering
wheel. A bad bump could jerk the wheel and injure
your hands. Instead drive with your fingers and
thumbs on the outside of the rim.
y If driving through water, such as when crossing
shallow streams, first check the depth of the water and
the bottom of the stream bed for firmness and ensure
that the bed of the stream is flat. Drive slowly and com-
pletely through the stream. The water should be shal-
low enough that it does not reach the vehicle’s under-
carriage. Water entering the engine air intake or the
exhaust pipe or water splashing onto electrical parts
may damage your vehicle and may cause it to stall.
Never attempt to drive through rushing water; regard-
8-10
Driving tips
less of its depth, it can wash away the ground from un-
der your tires, resulting in possible loss of traction and
even vehicle rollover.
y Always check your brakes for effectiveness immedi-
ately after driving in sand, mud or water. Do this by
driving slowly and stepping on the brake pedal. Re-
peat that process several times to dry out the brake
discs and brake pads.
y Do not drive or park over or near flammable materi-
als such as dry grass or fallen leaves, as they may
burn easily. The exhaust system is very hot while the
engine is running and right after engine stops. This
could create a fire hazard.
y After driving through tall grass, mud, rocks, sand,
rivers, etc., check that there is no grass, bush, paper,
rags, stones, sand, etc. adhering to or trapped on the
underbody. Clear off any such matter from the under-
body. If the vehicle is used with these materials
trapped or adhering to the underbody, a mechanical
breakdown or fire could occur.
y Secure all cargo carried inside the vehicle and make
certain that it is not piled higher than the seatbacks.
During sudden stops or jolts, unsecured cargo could
be thrown around in the vehicle and cause injury.
y Do not pile heavy loads on the roof. Those loads
raise the vehicle’s center of gravity and make it more
prone to tip over.
y Cargo should be evenly distributed over the cargo
bed. Keep heavier items as low and far forward as
possible. Loading the vehicle improperly can deterio-
rate handling capability and contribute to loss of vehi-
cle control.
y Be sure the cargo is secured properly. Unsecured
cargo in the cargo bed can be thrown around when
driving on off-road. To prevent loose cargo from enter-
ing the passenger compartment, always close the
switchback door while driving off-road.
y Always close the tailgate while driving off-road. Also
remove the bed extender (if so equipped) to avoid
damage.
y If you must rock the vehicle to free it from sand or
mud, depress the accelerator pedal slightly and move
the selector lever back and forth between “D” and “R”
repeatedly. Do not race the engine. For the best pos-
sible traction, avoid spinning the wheels when trying to
free the vehicle.
y When the road surface is extremely slippery, you
can obtain better traction by starting the vehicle with
the transmission in 2nd than 1st (both for MT and AT).
y Never equip your vehicle with tires larger than those
specified in this manual.
y Wash the vehicle’s underbody after off-road driving.
Suspension components are particularly prone to dirt
buildup, so they need to be washed thoroughly.
8-11
Driving tips
– CONTINUED –
y Frequent driving of an AWD vehicle under hard-driv-
ing conditions such as rough roads or off roads will ne-
cessitate more frequent replacement of engine oil,
brake fluid and transmission oil than that specified in
the maintenance schedule described in the “Warranty
and Maintenance Booklet”.
Remember that damage done to your SUBARU while
operating it off-road and not using common sense pre-
cautions such as those listed above is not eligible for
warranty coverage.
Winter driving
Operation during cold weather
Carry some emergency equipment, such as tire
chains, a window scraper, a bag of sand, flares, a
small shovel, and jumper cables.
Check the battery and cables. Cold temperatures re-
duce battery capacity. The battery must be in good
condition to provide enough power for cold winter
starts.
Use an engine oil of proper grade and viscosity for
cold weather. Heavy summer oil will cause harder
UB8046AA
8-12
Driving tips
starting.
Keep the door locks from freezing by squirting them
with deicer or glycerin.
Forcing a frozen door open may damage or separate
the rubber weather strips around the door. If the door
is frozen, use hot water to melt the ice, and afterwards
thoroughly wipe the water away.
Use a windshield washer fluid that contains an anti-
freeze solution. Do not use engine antifreeze or other
substitutes because they may damage the paint of the
vehicle.
T Before driving your vehicle
Before entering the vehicle, remove any snow or ice
from your shoes because that could make the pedals
slippery and dangerous.
While warming up the vehicle before driving, check
that the accelerator pedal, brake pedal, and all other
controls operate smoothly.
Clear away ice and snow that has accumulated under
the fenders to avoid making steering difficult. During
severe winter driving, stop when and where it is safe
to do so and check under the fenders periodically.
T Parking in cold weather
Snow can trap dangerous exhaust gases under
your vehicle. Keep snow clear of the exhaust
pipe and from around your vehicle if you park
the vehicle in snow with the engine running.
Do not use the parking brake when parking for long
periods in cold weather since it could freeze in that po-
sition. Instead, observe the following:
1. Place the shift lever in “1” or “R” for manual trans-
mission vehicles, and in “P” for automatic transmission
vehicles.
2. Use tire stops under the tires to prevent the vehicle
from moving.
When the vehicle is parked in snow or when it snows,
raise the wiper blades off the glass to prevent damage
to them.
When the vehicle has been left parked after use on
roads heavily covered with snow, or has been left
parked during a snowstorm, icing may develop on the
brake system, which could cause poor braking action.
Check for snow or ice buildup on the suspension, disc
brakes and brake hoses underneath the vehicle.
8-13
Driving tips
– CONTINUED –
If there is caked snow or ice, remove it, being careful
not to damage the disc brakes and brake hoses and
ABS harness.
T Refueling in cold weather
To help prevent moisture from forming in the fuel sys-
tem and the risk of its freezing, use of an antifreeze ad-
ditive in the fuel tank is recommended during cold
weather.
Use only additives that are specifically designed for
this purpose. When an antifreeze additive is used, its
effect lasts longer if the tank is refilled whenever the
fuel level reaches half empty.
If your SUBARU is not going to be used for an extend-
ed period, it is best to have the fuel tank filled to capac-
ity.
Driving on snowy and icy roads
Do not use the cruise control on slippery roads
such as snowy or icy roads. This may cause
loss of vehicle control.
To prevent skidding and slipping, avoid sudden brak-
ing, abrupt acceleration, high-speed driving, and
sharp turning when driving on snowy or icy roads.
Always maintain ample distance between your vehicle
and the vehicle ahead of you to avoid the need for sud-
den braking.
To supplement the foot brake, use the engine brake
effectively to control the vehicle speed. (Shift into a
lower gear when necessary.)
Avoid shifting down abruptly. Such behavior can
cause the wheels to lock, possibly leading to loss of
vehicle control.
An anti-lock brake system (ABS) enhances your vehi-
cle’s braking performance on snowy and icy roads.
Refer to the “ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)” section in
chapter 7 for information on braking on slippery sur-
faces.
T Wiper operation when snowing
Before driving in cold weather, make sure the wiper
blades are not frozen to the windshield or rear window.
If the wiper blades are frozen to the windshield or rear
window, use the defroster with the airflow control dial
in the “ ” position and the temperature control dial
set for maximum warmth until the wiper blades are
completely thawed out. If your vehicle is equipped with
a wiper deicer, it is helpful to thaw the windshield wiper
blades.
8-14
Driving tips
When driving in snow, if frozen snow starts to stick on
the surface of the windshield despite wiper operation,
use the defroster with the airflow control dial in “ ”
and the temperature control dial set for maximum
warmth. After the windshield gets warmed enough to
melt the frozen snow on it, wash it away using the
windshield washer.
Snow stuck on the wiper arm prevents the wiper from
working effectively. If snow is stuck on the wiper arm,
pull off the road to a safe place, then remove it. If you
stop the vehicle at road side, use the hazard warning
flasher to alert other drivers.
We recommend use of non-freezing type wiper blades
(winter blades) during the seasons you could have
snow and sub-zero temperatures. Blades of this type
give superior wiping performance in snowy conditions.
Be sure to use blades that are suitable for your vehi-
cle.
Corrosion protection
Refer to the “Corrosion protection” section (chapter
10).
Snow tires
y When replacing original tires with winter
(snow) tires, make sure you use only the same
size and construction as recommended. Using
other sizes and construction may affect speed-
ometer/odometer calibration and clearance be-
tween the body and tires. It also may be danger-
ous and lead to loss of vehicle control.
y You must install four winter tires that are of
the same size, circumferences, construction,
brand, and load range. Mixing other sizes, cir-
cumferences or constructions may result in se-
vere mechanical damage to the drive train of
your vehicle and may affect ride, handling,
braking and speedometer/odometer calibra-
tion. It also may be dangerous and lead to loss
of vehicle control.
y Do not use a combination of radial, belted
bias or bias tires since it may cause dangerous
handling characteristics and lead to an acci-
dent.
Your vehicle is equipped with “all season tires” which
are designed to provide an adequate measure of trac-
8-15
Driving tips
– CONTINUED –
tion, handling and braking performance in year-round
driving. In winter, it may be possible to enhance per-
formance through use of tires designed specifically for
winter driving conditions.
If you choose to install winter tires on your vehicle, be
sure to use the correct tire size and type. You must in-
stall four winter tires that are of the same size, con-
struction, brand and load range and you should never
mix radial, belted bias or bias tires since this may re-
sult in dangerous handling characteristics. When you
choose a tire, make sure that there is enough clear-
ance between the tire and vehicle body.
Remember to drive with care at all times regardless of
the type of tires on your vehicle.
Your vehicle comes with P225/60R16 “all season
tires” as original equipment. You should be aware
that some winter tires with that same size designa-
tion may actually be too large for the vehicle and
may cause rubbing on sharp turns. Listed below is
the winter tire size that we recommend.
Recommended winter (snow) tire size
P215/60R16 Studless
Tire chains
Tire chains cannot be used on tires listed below
because of lack of clearance between the tires
and vehicle body.
y P225/60R16 tires
y P215/60R16 winter (snow) tires
Driving on snowy grades or icy roads may require the
use of tire chains, in which case put the chains on the
front wheels only. Use only SAE class S type chains
that are of the correct size for your tires so as not to
damage the vehicle body or suspension.
When driving with tire chains, drive at speeds below
19 mph (30 km/h). When a temporary spare tire is on
a front wheel, replace the temporary spare tire with the
rear tire on the same side of the vehicle, and then fit
chains on the front tires.
Always use the utmost care when driving with tire
chains – overconfidence because you are driving with
tire chains could easily lead to a serious accident.
8-16
Driving tips
Rocking the vehicle
If you must rock the vehicle to free it from snow, sand,
or mud, depress the accelerator pedal slightly and
move the selector lever back and forth between “D”
and “R” repeatedly. Do not race the engine. For the
best possible traction, avoid spinning the wheels when
trying to free the vehicle.
When the road surface is extremely slippery, you can
obtain better traction by starting the vehicle with the
transmission in 2nd than 1st (both for MT and AT).
Refer to the “Automatic transmission” section in chap-
ter 7 for information on holding the transmission in 2nd
position.
Loading your vehicle
Never allow passengers to ride on the folded
rear seatback or in the cargo bed. Doing so may
result in serious injury.
y Never stack luggage or other cargo higher
than the top of the seatback because it could
tumble forward and injure passengers in the
HS8005BA
8-17
Driving tips
– CONTINUED –
event of a sudden stop or accident. Keep lug-
gage or cargo low, as close to the floor as pos-
sible.
y When you carry something inside the vehicle,
secure it whenever you can to prevent it from
being thrown around inside the vehicle during
sudden stops, sharp turns or in an accident.
y Do not pile heavy loads on the roof. These
loads raise the vehicle’s center of gravity and
make it more prone to tip over.
y Secure lengthy items properly to prevent
them from shooting forward and causing seri-
ous injury during a sudden stop.
y Never exceed the maximum load limit. If you
do, some parts on your vehicle can break, or it
can change the way your vehicle handles. This
could result in loss of control and cause per-
sonal injury. Also, overloading can shorten the
life of your vehicle.
y Cargo should be evenly distributed over the
cargo bed. Keep heavier items as low and far
forward as possible. Loading the vehicle im-
properly can deteriorate handling capability
and contribute to loss of vehicle control.
y Be sure the cargo is secured properly. Unse-
cured cargo in the cargo bed can be thrown
around during sudden braking, in a sharp turn
or during rapid acceleration, which could cre-
ate a dangerous road hazard.
Do not carry spray cans, containers with flam-
mable or corrosive liquids or any other danger-
ous items inside the passenger compartment.
NOTE
For better fuel economy, do not carry unneeded
cargo.
8-18
Driving tips
Vehicle capacity weight
The load capacity of your vehicle is determined by
weight, not by available cargo space. The total weight
you can carry in your vehicle is shown on the vehicle
placard attached to the driver’s side door jamb. Locate
the statement “The combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on
your vehicle’s placard. It includes the total weight of
driver and all passengers and their belongings, any
optional equipment such as a trailer hitch, roof rack or
bike carrier, etc., and the tongue load of a trailer.
UB8031BA
UB8053BA
8-19
Driving tips
– CONTINUED –
GVWR and GAWR (Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating and Gross Axle Weight
Rating)
The certification label attached to the driver’s side
door shows GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)
and GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating).
The GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) must never exceed
the GVWR. GVW is the combined total of weight of the
vehicle, fuel, driver, all passengers, luggage, any op-
tional equipment and trailer tongue load. Therefore,
the GVW changes depending on the situation.
In addition, the total weight applied to each axle
(GAW) must never exceed the GAWR. The front and
rear GAWs can be adjusted by relocating luggage in-
side the vehicle.
Even if the total weight of your luggage is lower than
the vehicle capacity weight, either front or rear GAW
may exceed the GAWR, depending on the distribution
of the luggage.
When possible, the load should be evenly distributed
throughout the vehicle.
If you carry heavy loads in the vehicle, you should con-
firm that GVW and front and rear GAWs are within the
GVWR and GAWR by putting your vehicle on a vehi-
cle scale, found at a commercial weighing station.
Do not use replacement tires with a lower load range
than the originals because they may lower the GVWR
and GAWR limitations. Replacement tires with a high-
er load range than the originals do not increase the
GVWR and GAWR limitations.
UB8043BA
8-20
Driving tips
Trailer hitch (if equipped)
y Never exceed the maximum weight specified
for the trailer hitch. Exceeding the maximum
weight could cause an accident resulting in se-
rious personal injuries. Permissible trailer
weight changes depending on the situation. Re-
fer to the next section “Trailer towing” for pos-
sible recommendations and limitations.
y Trailer brakes are required when the towing
load exceeds 1,000 lbs (453 kg). Be sure your
trailer has safety chains and that each chain
will hold the trailer’s maximum gross weight.
Towing trailers without safety chains could cre-
ate a traffic safety hazard if the trailer separates
from the hitch due to coupling damage or hitch
ball damage.
y Be sure to check the hitch pin and safety pin
for positive locking placement before towing a
trailer. If the ball mount comes off the hitch re-
ceiver, the trailer could get loose and create a
traffic safety hazard.
y Use only the ball mount supplied with this
hitch. Use the hitch only as a weight carrying
hitch. Do not use with any type of weight dis-
tributing hitch.
The trailer hitch is designed to tow a Class 1 rated
load. A maximum of 2,400 lbs (1,087 kg) gross trailer
weight and a maximum of 200 lbs (90 kg) gross
tongue weight are permissible for the trailer hitch.
When you tow a trailer, follow the instructions in the
next section “Trailer towing”.
Connecting a trailer
UB8047BA
8-21
Driving tips
– CONTINUED –
The license plate bracket will hit the hitch ball
and may be damaged if the tailgate is opened
and the license plate bracket is at the lowered/
open position. Close the tailgate and return the
license plate bracket to its normal position
flush against the tailgate itself whenever you
tow a trailer or whenever a trailer is hitched to
the vehicle.
1. Before connecting the ball mount to the hitch re-
ceiver, close the tailgate and return the license plate
bracket to its normal retracted position up against the
tailgate. Refer to “License plate bracket” under the
heading “Tailgate” in chapter 2 for more information on
the function of the license plate bracket.
2. Remove the receiver cover from the hitch receiver
tube. Then insert the ball mount into the hitch receiver
tube.
3. Insert the hitch pin into the hole on the hitch receiv-
er tube so that the pin passes through the ball mount.
UB8018BA
8-22
Driving tips
4. Insert the safety pin into the hitch pin securely.
5. Pull the ball mount to make sure it does not come
off the hitch receiver.
1) Hitch ball installation point
2) Hooks for safety chains
6. Use only a hitch ball that is appropriate for the ball
mount and your trailer. The hitch ball must be securely
installed on the ball mount.
7. Connect your trailer to the hitch ball.
8. Connect the trailer and the hitch with safety chains
that will hold the trailer’s maximum gross weight. The
chains should cross under the trailer tongue to prevent
the tongue from dropping onto the ground in case it
should disconnect from the hitch ball. Allow sufficient
slack in the chains taking tight-turn situations into ac-
count; however, be careful not to let them drag on the
HS8012BA
1
2
UB8020BB
8-23
Driving tips
– CONTINUED –
ground.
Do not connect safety chains to part of the ve-
hicle other than the safety chain hooks.
Hitch harness connector
9. Connect the hitch wire harness’s black four-pin
wire connector to the towing trailer’s wire harness.
10.Confirm proper function of the hitch wire harness
by individually activating the brake, right turn signal,
left turn signal, stop, and parking lights on the trailer.
NOTE
Always disconnect the trailer wire harness before
launching or retrieving a watercraft.
UG8034BA
HS8015BA
8-24
Driving tips
When you do not tow a trailer
Remove the ball mount from the hitch receiver
tube when the tailgate is open and the bed ex-
tender is used. The rear license plate will not be
visible because the license plate bracket can
not be used at the lowered/open position when
the ball mount is connected.
In addition, the license plate bracket will hit the
hitch ball and may be damaged if the tailgate is
opened and the license plate bracket is at the
lowered/open position.
y Remove the ball mount from the hitch receiver tube
and insert the receiver cover onto the hitch receiver
tube.
y Place the dust cap over the four-pin connector of the
hitch wire harness to protect against possible damage.
y Occasionally lubricate terminals of the four-pin con-
nector using the terminal grease, and cover with the
attached rubber cap.
Trailer towing
Your vehicle is designed and intended to be used pri-
marily to carry passengers and cargo. Towing a trailer
puts additional loads on your vehicle’s engine, driv-
etrain, brakes, tires and suspension and has an ad-
verse effect on fuel economy.
If you do decide to tow a trailer, your safety and satis-
faction depend upon proper use of correct equipment
and cautious operation of your vehicle. Seek the ad-
vice of your SUBARU dealer to assist you in purchas-
ing a hitch and other necessary towing equipment ap-
propriate for your vehicle. In addition, be sure to follow
the instructions on correct installation and use provid-
ed by the trailer and other towing equipment manufac-
turers.
SUBARU assumes no responsibility for injuries or ve-
hicle damage that result from trailer towing equipment,
or from any errors or omissions in the instructions ac-
companying such equipment or for your failure to fol-
low the proper instructions.
Warranties and maintenance
SUBARU warranties do not apply to vehicle damage
or malfunction caused by trailer towing. If you use your
vehicle to tow a trailer, more frequent maintenance will
be required due to the additional load. (Refer to “Main-
8-25
Driving tips
– CONTINUED –
tenance schedule under severe driving conditions” in
the “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.)
Under no circumstances should a trailer be towed with
a new vehicle or a vehicle with any new powertrain
component (engine, transmission, differential, wheel
bearings, etc.) for the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) of
driving.
Maximum load limits
Never exceed the maximum load limits ex-
plained below. Exceeding the maximum load
limits could cause personal injury and/or vehi-
cle damage.
y Adequate size trailer brakes are required
when the trailer and its cargo exceed 1,000 lbs
(453 kg) total weight.
y Before towing a trailer, check the trailer total
weight, GVW, GAWs and tongue load. Make
sure the load and its distribution in your vehicle
and trailer are acceptable.
T Total trailer weight
Total trailer weight
The total trailer weight (trailer weight plus its cargo
load) must never exceed the maximum weight shown
in the following table.
HS8016AA
8-26
Driving tips
T Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) and Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR)
Gross Vehicle Weight
The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) must never exceed
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).
Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) is the combined total of
the weight of the vehicle, driver, passengers, luggage,
trailer hitch, trailer tongue load and any other optional
equipment installed on your vehicle. Therefore, the
GVW changes depending on the situation. Determine
the GVW each time before going on a trip by putting
your vehicle and trailer on a vehicle scale.
Model Conditions Maximum
total trailer
weight
MT models When towing a trailer with-
out brakes.
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
When towing a trailer with
brakes.
2,400 lbs
(1,087 kg)
AT models When towing a trailer with-
out brakes.
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
When towing a trailer with
brakes.
2,400 lbs
(1,087 kg)
When towing a trailer on a
long uphill grade continu-
ously for over 5 miles (8 km)
with an outside temperature
of 104°F (40°C) or above.
1,200 lbs
(543 kg)
UB8038BA
8-27
Driving tips
– CONTINUED –
GVWR is shown on the certification label located on
the driver’s door of your vehicle.
T Gross Axle Weight (GAW) and Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR)
Gross Axle Weight
The total weight applied to each axle (GAW) must nev-
er exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). The
front and rear GAWs can be adjusted by relocating
passengers and luggage inside the vehicle.
UB8043BA
UB8039BA
8-28
Driving tips
The front and rear GAWR are also shown on the cer-
tification label.
To check both GVWR and GAWR and to confirm that
the total weight and weight distribution are within safe
driving limits, you should have your vehicle and trailer
weighed at a commercial weighing station.
Be sure that all cargo is firmly secured to prevent a
change in weight distribution while driving.
T Tongue load
Tongue load
If the trailer is loaded with more weight in the
back of trailer’s axle than in the front, the load
is taken off the rear axle of the towing vehicle.
This may cause the rear wheels to skid, espe-
cially during braking or when vehicle speed is
reduced during cornering, resulting in over-
steer, spin out and/or jackknifing.
UB8043BA
HS8019AA
8-29
Driving tips
– CONTINUED –
Ensure that the trailer tongue load is from 8 to 11 per-
cent of the total trailer weight and does not exceed the
maximum value of 200 lbs (90 kg).
1) Jack
2) Bathroom scale
The tongue load can be weighed with a bathroom
scale as shown in the illustration below. When weigh-
ing the tongue load, be sure to position the towing cou-
pler at the height at which it would be during actual
towing, using a jack as shown.
F: Front
The tongue load can be adjusted by proper distribution
of the load in the trailer. Never load the trailer with
more weight in the back than in the front; approximate-
ly 60 percent of the trailer load should be in the front
and approximately 40 percent in the rear. Also, distrib-
ute the load as evenly as possible on both the left and
right sides.
Be sure that all cargo is firmly secured to prevent a
change in weight distribution while driving.
2
1
UB8040BB
F
60%
40%
50%
50%
HS8021BB
8-30
Driving tips
Trailer hitches
Never drill the frame or under-body of your ve-
hicle to install a commercial trailer hitch. If you
do, dangerous exhaust gas, water or mud may
enter the passenger compartment through the
drilled hole. Exhaust gas contains carbon mon-
oxide, a colorless and odorless gas which is
dangerous, or even lethal, if inhaled. Also, drill-
ing the frame or under-body of your vehicle
could cause deterioration of strength of your
vehicle and cause corrosion around the drilled
hole.
y Do not modify the vehicle exhaust system,
brake system, or other systems when installing
a hitch or other trailer towing equipment.
y Do not use axle-mounted hitches as they can
cause damage to the axle housing, wheel bear-
ings, wheels or tires.
The use of a genuine SUBARU trailer hitch is recom-
mended. A genuine SUBARU hitch is available from
your SUBARU dealer.
If use of a non-genuine hitch is unavoidable, be sure
the hitch is suited to your vehicle and trailer. Consult
with a professional hitch supplier to assist you in
choosing an appropriate hitch for your vehicle. Be sure
to follow all of the hitch manufacturer’s instructions for
installation and use.
Never use a hitch that mounts only to the rear bumper.
The bumper is not designed to handle that type of
load.
For all types of hitches, regularly check that the hitch
mounting bolts and nuts are tight.
Connecting a trailer
T Trailer brakes
y Adequate size trailer brakes are required
when the trailer and its cargo exceed 1,000 lbs
(453 kg) total weight.
y Do not directly connect your trailer’s hydrau-
lic brake system to the hydraulic brake system
in your vehicle. Direct connection would cause
the vehicle’s brake performance to deteriorate
8-31
Driving tips
– CONTINUED –
and could lead to an accident.
If your trailer’s total weight (trailer weight plus its cargo
weight) exceeds 1,000 lbs (453 kg), the trailer is re-
quired to be equipped with its own brake system. Elec-
tric brakes or surge brakes are recommended, and
must be installed properly. Check that your trailer’s
brakes conform with Federal, state/province and/or
other applicable regulations. Your SUBARU’s brake
system is not designed to be tapped into the trailer’s
hydraulic brake system. Please ask your SUBARU
dealer and professional trailer supplier for more infor-
mation about the trailer’s brake system.
T Trailer safety chains
Always use safety chains between your vehicle
and the trailer. Towing trailer without safety
chains could create a traffic safety hazard if the
trailer separates from the hitch due to coupling
damage or hitch ball damage.
In case the trailer hitch connector or hitch ball should
break or become disconnected, the trailer could get
loose and create a traffic safety hazard.
For safety, always connect the towing vehicle and
trailer with trailer safety chains. Pass the chains cross-
ing each other under the trailer tongue to prevent the
trailer from dropping onto the ground in case the trailer
tongue should disconnect from the hitch ball. Allow
sufficient slack in the chains taking tight-turn situations
into account; however, be careful not to let them drag
on the ground.
For more information about the safety chain connec-
tion, refer to the instructions for your hitch and trailer.
T Side mirrors
After hitching a trailer to your vehicle, check that the
UB8041BA
8-32
Driving tips
standard side mirrors provide a good rearward field of
view without significant blind spots. If significant blind
spots occur with the vehicle’s standard side mirrors,
use towing mirrors that conform with Federal, state/
province and/or other applicable regulations.
T Trailer lights
Direct splicing or other improper connection of
trailer lights may damage your vehicle’s electri-
cal system and cause a malfunction of your ve-
hicle’s lighting system.
Connection of trailer lights to your vehicle’s electrical
system requires modifications to the vehicle’s lighting
circuit to increase its capacity and accommodate wir-
ing changes. To ensure the trailer lights are connected
properly, please consult your SUBARU dealer. Check
for proper operation of the turn signals, the brake
lights and parking lights each time you hitch up.
T Tires
Never tow a trailer when the temporary spare
tire is used. The temporary spare tire is not de-
signed to sustain the towing load. Use of the
temporary spare tire when towing can result in
failure of the spare tire and/or less stability of
the vehicle.
Make sure that all the tires on your vehicle are properly
inflated.
The recommended cold tire pressure is shown on the
vehicle placard attached to the driver’s side door jamb.
Trailer tire condition, size, load rating and proper infla-
tion pressure should be in accordance with the trailer
manufacturer’s specifications.
In the event your vehicle gets a flat tire when towing a
trailer, ask a commercial road service to repair the flat
tire.
If you carry a regular size spare tire in your vehicle or
trailer as a precaution against getting a flat tire, be
sure that the spare tire is firmly secured.
8-33
Driving tips
– CONTINUED –
Trailer towing tips
y Never exceed 45 mph (72 km/h) when towing
a trailer in hilly country on hot days.
y When towing a trailer, steering, stability,
stopping distance and braking performance
will be different from normal operation. For
safety’s sake, you should employ extra caution
when towing a trailer and you should never
speed. You should also keep the following tips
in mind:
T Before starting out on a trip
y Check that the vehicle and vehicle-to-hitch mount-
ing are in good condition. If any problems are appar-
ent, do not tow the trailer.
y Check that the vehicle sits horizontally with the trail-
er attached. If the vehicle is tipped sharply up at the
front and down at the rear, check the total trailer
weight, GVW, GAWs and tongue load again, then con-
firm that the load and its distribution are acceptable.
y Check that the tire pressures are correct.
y Check that the vehicle and trailer are connected
properly. Confirm that.
– the trailer tongue is connected properly to the
hitch ball.
– the trailer lights connector is connected properly
and trailer’s brake lights illuminate when the vehi-
cle’s brake pedal is pressed, and that the trailer’s
turn signal lights flash when the vehicle’s turn signal
lever is operated.
– the safety chains are connected properly.
– all cargo in the trailer is secured safety in position.
– the side mirrors provide a good rearward field of
view without a significant blind spot.
y Sufficient time should be taken to learn the “feel” of
the vehicle/trailer combination before starting out on a
trip. In an area free of traffic, practice turning, stopping
and backing up.
T Driving with a trailer
y You should allow for considerably more stopping
distance when towing a trailer. Avoid sudden braking
because it may result in skidding or jackknifing and
loss of control.
y Avoid abrupt starts and sudden accelerations. If
your vehicle has a manual transmission, always start
out in first gear and release the clutch at moderate en-
gine revolution.
y Avoid uneven steering, sharp turns and rapid lane
changes.
y Slow down before turning. Make a longer than nor-
8-34
Driving tips
mal turning radius because the trailer wheels will be
closer than the vehicle wheels to the inside of the turn.
In a tight turn, the trailer could hit your vehicle.
y Crosswinds will adversely affect the handling of
your vehicle and trailer, causing sway. Crosswinds
can be due to weather conditions or the passing of
large trucks or buses. If swaying occurs, firmly grip the
steering wheel and slow down immediately but gradu-
ally.
y When passing other vehicles, considerable dis-
tance is required because of the added weight and
length caused by attaching the trailer to your vehicle.
1) Left turn
2) Right turn
y Backing up with a trailer is difficult and takes prac-
tice. When backing up with a trailer, never accelerate
or steer rapidly. When turning back, grip the bottom of
the steering wheel with one hand and turn it to the left
for a left turn, and turn it to the right for a right turn.
y If the ABS warning light illuminates while the vehicle
is in motion, stop towing the trailer and have repairs
performed immediately by the nearest SUBARU deal-
er.
T Driving on grades
y Before going down a steep hill, slow down and shift
into lower gear (if necessary, use 1st gear) in order to
utilize the engine braking effect and prevent overheat-
ing of your vehicle’s brakes. Do not make sudden
downshifts.
y When driving uphill in hot weather, the air condition-
er may turn off automatically to protect the engine from
overheating.
y When driving uphill in hot weather, pay attention to
the water temperature gauge pointer (for all vehicles)
and AT OIL TEMP warning light (for AT vehicles) since
the engine and transmission are relatively prone to
overheating under these conditions. If the water tem-
perature gauge pointer approaches the OVERHEAT
zone or the AT OIL TEMP warning light illuminates,
immediately switch off the air conditioner and stop the
vehicle at the nearest safe place. Refer to the “Engine
1
2
HS8023BB
8-35
Driving tips
– CONTINUED –
overheating” section in chapter 9, and “Warning and
indicator lights” section in chapter 3.
NOTE (Turbo models only)
In a vehicle that has an automatic transmission,
the engine is less likely to overheat with the “D”
range selected than it is with the manual mode se-
lected.
y If your vehicle has an automatic transmission, avoid
using the accelerator pedal to stay stationary on an
uphill slope instead of using the parking brake or foot
brake. That may cause the transmission fluid to over-
heat.
y Non-turbo models only: If your vehicle is equipped
with an automatic transmission, avoid driving with the
gear selector lever in “D” when towing a heavy trailer
to prevent fluid overheating. A lower gear should be
used.
T Parking on a grade
Always block the wheels under both vehicle and trailer
when parking. Apply the parking brake firmly. You
should not park on a hill or slope. But if parking on a
hill or slope cannot be avoided, you should take the
following steps:
1. Apply the brakes and hold the pedal down.
2. Have someone place wheel blocks under both the
vehicle and trailer wheels.
3. When the wheel blocks are in place, release the
regular brakes slowly until the blocks absorb the load.
4. Apply the regular brakes and then apply the park-
ing brake; slowly release the regular brakes.
5. Shift into 1st or reverse gear (manual transmission)
or “P” (automatic transmission) and shut off the en-
gine.
9-1
9
In case of emergency
If you park your vehicle in an emergency .. 9-2
Jack and tools ............................................... 9-3
Location of jack and tools ............................... 9-3
Removing jack and tool bag ............................ 9-3
Restoring jack and tools .................................. 9-5
Spare tire ....................................................... 9-7
Removing the spare tire ................................... 9-7
Re-storage of spare tire ................................... 9-9
Temporary spare tire .................................... 9-10
Using the temporary spare tire ........................ 9-10
Flat tires ......................................................... 9-12
Changing a flat tire ........................................... 9-12
Jump starting ................................................ 9-18
How to jump start ............................................. 9-19
Engine overheating ....................................... 9-21
If steam is coming from the engine
compartment .................................................. 9-21
If no steam is coming from the engine
compartment .................................................. 9-21
Towing ........................................................... 9-22
Towing and tie-down hooks ............................ 9-23
Using a flat-bed truck ....................................... 9-27
Towing with all wheels on the ground ............ 9-27
Moonroof – if the moonroof cannot be
closed ......................................................... 9-28
9-2
In case of emergency
In case o f emergen cy
If you park your vehicle in an emer-
gency
The hazard warning flasher should be used in day or
night to warn other drivers when you have to park your
vehicle under emergency conditions.
Avoid stopping on the road. It is best to safely pull off
the road if a problem occurs.
The hazard warning flasher can be activated regard-
less of the ignition switch position.
Turn on the hazard warning by pushing the hazard
warning flasher switch. Turn it off by pushing the
switch again.
NOTE
When the hazard warning flasher is on, the turn
signals do not work.
UB8002BA
9-3
In case of emergency
– CONTINUED –
Jack and tools
The jack supplied with the vehicle is designed only for
changing a tire.
Before using the jack, see the “Flat tires” section in this
chapter for instructions and precautions.
Location of jack and tools
The jack and tool bag are located in the left side rear
quarter pocket at the back side of the rear seatback.
A wheel nut wrench, jack drive tube, tire holding rod,
tire holding retainer, screwdriver, moonroof wrench
and two belts are included in the tool bag.
Removing jack and tool bag
Before folding down the seatback, check that
there is nothing in the seatback pocket. If there
is something in the pocket, it could be damaged
or cause damage to the seatback and rear cen-
ter console when the seatback is folded.
UB9091BA
UB9079AA
9-4
In case of emergency
0
1) Red
A) LOCK
B) UNLOCK
1. Pull the rear seatback locks up and fold down the
rear seatback to gain access to the rear quarter pock-
ets at both sides.
2. Open the left hand pocket lid by turning the knob.
3. Take the tool bag out of the pocket.
1
AB
UB1109BB UB9074BA
9-5
In case of emergency
– CONTINUED –
4. Loosen the jack holding screw by turning counter-
clockwise and remove the jack from the pocket.
NOTE
y Be careful not to lose the jack holding screw af-
ter removing it.
y Make sure the jack is well lubricated before us-
ing it.
Restoring jack and tools
0
1. Strap the wheel nut wrench, jack drive tube, and
tire holding rod together using the two belts, then re-
turn them to the tool bag together with the other tools.
2. Contract the jack by turning the jack screw counter-
clockwise to the end.
UB9075BA
UB9082BA
9-6
In case of emergency
3. Place the jack onto the bracket in the pocket.
4. Securely fix the jack with the jack holding screw by
turning it clockwise.
5. Install the left hand pocket lid and lock it by turning
the knob.
NOTE
Confirm no looseness exists after securing the
jack. Looseness may cause a rattle while the vehi-
cle is moving.
After the jack and the tool bag have been re-
stored in the rear quarter pocket, make sure
that the rear seatback has been securely
locked. When securely locked, the red marks
on the locking knobs are no longer visible.
UB9076BA
UB9075CA
9-7
In case of emergency
– CONTINUED –
Spare tire
The spare tire is stored in the spare tire holder located
under the rear of the cargo bed.
The spare tire holder has a hoist mechanism that can
lower and raise the spare tire easily. The spare tire
holder is designed to carry only the temporary spare
tire that comes with your vehicle.
Before using the temporary spare tire, see the “Tem-
porary spare tire” section in this chapter for instruc-
tions and precautions.
Removing the spare tire
1. Take the wheel nut wrench out of the tool bag. Re-
fer to the “Jack and tools” section in this chapter for its
storage location.
2. Open the tailgate and remove the rubber cap from
the cargo bed. Pull up the “RELEASE” portion of the
cap when removing it.
3. Locate the hex-headed hoist shaft end inside the
hole.
UB9053BA
UB9054BA
9-8
In case of emergency
4. Turn the hoist shaft end counterclockwise with the
wheel nut wrench until the temporary spare tire is on
the ground with enough cable slack to allow you to pull
it out from under the vehicle.
Do not put your fingers into the center hole of
the temporary spare tire while you pulling it out,
because they might be pinched in between the
wheel and the retainer.
5. Tilt the retainer at the end of the cable and pull it
through the center of the temporary spare tire.
6. After the temporary spare tire is removed from the
cable, the cable must be wound up completely by turn-
ing the hoist nut shaft clockwise until you hear a click-
ing sound. Also visually inspect the cable to make cer-
tain that there is no longer any slack present.
y When using the spare tire hoist:
After the temporary spare tire is removed from
the cable, wind the cable up completely until
the retainer at end of the cable sits against the
UB9055BA UB9056AA
9-9
In case of emergency
– CONTINUED –
underside of the vehicle. Driving with the cable
not retracted fully could result in damage to the
adjacent under floor parts and lead to a serious
accident.
y The spare tire holder is designed to carry
only the smaller temporary spare tire. Never
store a full size tire (flat or otherwise) in the
spare tire holder. Doing so can result in dam-
age to adjacent under floor parts and can lead
to a serious accident.
When using the spare tire hoist:
Do not use air tools or power tools to turn the
spare tire hoist shaft end. If you do, it could re-
sult in severe mechanical damage to the spare
tire hoist.
Re-storage of spare tire
1. Turn the spare tire hoist shaft end counterclock-
wise with the wheel nut wrench to loosen the cable
sufficiently enough to allow the cable end retainer go
through center hole of the temporary spare tire.
2. Insert the retainer through the center hole of the
temporary tire (with the outside of the tire facing up).
3. Turn the hoist shaft end clockwise with the wheel
nut wrench to wind the cable up completely until you
hear a few clicking sounds. Confirm that the temporary
spare tire holding cable has been wound up complete-
ly by shaking the temporary tire.
If the temporary spare tire is not stored secure-
ly, it could damage adjacent areas of the vehi-
cle and make an abnormal noise.
4. Put the rubber cap on the hoist shaft end hole.
5. Place the wheel nut wrench back into the tool bag
and store the jack and tool bag in their storage loca-
tions.
9-10
In case of emergency
Temporary spare tire
Using the temporary spare tire
Never tow a trailer when the temporary spare
tire is used. The temporary spare tire is not de-
signed to sustain the towing load. Use of the
temporary spare tire when towing can result in
failure of the spare tire and/or less stability of
the vehicle and may lead to an accident.
Never use any temporary spare tire other than
the original. Using other sizes may result in se-
vere mechanical damage to the drive train of
your vehicle.
The temporary spare tire is smaller and lighter than a
conventional tire and is designed for emergency use
only. Remove the temporary spare tire and re-install
the conventional tire as soon as possible because the
spare tire is designed only for temporary use.
Check the inflation pressure of the temporary spare
tire periodically to keep the tire ready for use. The cor-
rect pressure is 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm
2
).
When using the temporary spare tire, note the follow-
ing:
y Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
y Do not put a tire chain on the temporary spare tire.
Because of the smaller tire size, a tire chain will not fit
properly.
y Do not use two or more temporary spare tires at the
same time.
y Do not drive over obstacles. This tire has a smaller
diameter, so road clearance is reduced.
9-11
In case of emergency
– CONTINUED –
1) Tread wear indicator bar
2) Indicator location mark
y When the wear indicator appears on the tread, re-
place the tire.
1) Spare fuse
2) FWD connector
NOTE
[Automatic transmission vehicles except Turbo
vehicle] Before driving your vehicle with the tem-
porary spare tire, put a spare fuse inside the FWD
connector located in the engine compartment and
confirm that the AWD warning light comes on. The
all wheel drive capability of the vehicle has now
been deactivated. After re-installing the conven-
tional tire, remove the spare fuse from the FWD
connector in order to reactivate all wheel drive.
1
2
UG0106
1
2
UB8003BC
9-12
In case of emergency
Flat tires
If you get a flat tire while driving, never brake sudden-
ly; keep driving straight ahead while gradually reduc-
ing speed. Then slowly pull off the road to a safe place.
Changing a flat tire
y Do not jack up the vehicle on an incline or a
loose road surface. The jack can come out of
the jacking point or sink into the ground and
this can result in a serious accident.
y Use only the jack provided with your vehicle.
The jack supplied with the vehicle is designed
only for changing a tire. Never get under the ve-
hicle while supporting the vehicle with this
jack.
y Always turn the engine off before raising the
flat tire off the ground using the jack. Never
swing or push the vehicle supported with the
jack. The jack can come out of the jacking point
due to a jolt and this can result in a serious ac-
cident.
y Never place a tire or tire changing tools in the
passenger compartment after changing
wheels. In a sudden stop or collision, loose
equipment could strike occupants and cause
injury. Store the tire and all tools in the proper
place.
1. Park on a hard, level surface, whenever possible,
then stop the engine.
2. Set the parking brake securely and shift a manual
transmission vehicle into reverse or an automatic
transmission vehicle into the “P” (Park) position.
3. Turn on the hazard warning flasher and have ev-
eryone get out of the vehicle.
4. Put wheel blocks at the front and rear of the tire di-
HS9003BA
9-13
In case of emergency
– CONTINUED –
agonally opposite the flat tire.
5. Take out the spare tire, jack, and wheel nut wrench.
Refer to the sections “Spare tire” and “Jack and tools”
in this chapter for their location, instructions and pre-
cautions.
After the spare tire is removed from the spare tire hold-
er, the cable must be wound up completely by turning
the hoist nut shaft clockwise until you hear a clicking
sound. Also visually inspect the cable to make certain
that there is no longer any slack present.
T Removing the flat tire and installing the spare
tire
0
1. Loosen the wheel nuts using the wheel nut wrench
but do not remove the nuts.
1) Jack up point mark
2. Place the jack under the side sill at the front or rear
jack-up point closest to the flat tire. Jack-up points are
US9008BA
1
UB9088BB
9-14
In case of emergency
indicated by arrow marks on the side of the side sill
skirt.
3. Turn the jackscrew by hand until the groove of the
jack head engages firmly into the jack-up point.
4. Insert the jack drive tube into the jackscrew and at-
tach the wheel nut wrench into the jack drive tube, and
turn the handle until the tire clears the ground. Do not
raise the vehicle higher than necessary.
5. Remove the wheel nuts and the flat tire.
UB9089BA
UB9060BA
9-15
In case of emergency
– CONTINUED –
6. Before putting the spare tire on, clean the mounting
surface of the wheel and hub with a cloth.
7. Put on the spare tire. Replace the wheel nuts.
Tighten them by hand.
Do not use oil or grease on the wheel studs or
nuts when the spare tire is installed. This could
cause the nuts to become loose and lead to an
accident.
8. Turn the jack handle counterclockwise to lower the
vehicle.
HS9011BA
UB9220BA
1
4
2
5
3
UB9078BB
9-16
In case of emergency
9. Use the wheel nut wrench to securely tighten the
wheel nuts to the specified torque, following the tight-
ening order in the illustration. The torque for tightening
the nuts is 74 to 89 lbf·ft (100 to 120 N·m, 10 to 12
kgf·m). This torque is equivalent to applying about 88
to 110 lbs (40 to 50 kg) at the top of the wheel nut
wrench provided to your vehicle. Never use your foot
on the wheel nut wrench or a pipe extension on the
wrench because you may exceed the specified torque.
Have the wheel nut torque checked at the nearest au-
tomotive service facility.
T Storage of the flat tire
y Secure the flat tire in the cargo bed (with the
outer side of the wheel facing up) by using the
designated tire holding rod and retainer. If the
flat tire is not properly secured, it may fall out
and create a dangerous road hazard that could
lead to a serious accident.
y Do not store the flat tire under the floor. Do-
ing so could damage the underside of the vehi-
cle.
1. Take the tire holding rod and retainer out of the tool
bag.
2. Remove the rubber cap from the cargo bed. Store
the rubber cap in a safe place. Pay attention not to
lose the rubber cap after removal.
UB9077BA
9-17
In case of emergency
– CONTINUED –
1) Holding rod
2) Retainer
3. Place the flat tire in the cargo bed with the outer
side of the wheel facing up. For an aluminum wheel,
remove the center cap before placing it in the cargo
bed.
4. Place the retainer on the center hole of the wheel
as illustrated and put the tire holding rod into the re-
tainer.
If the flat tire is separated from its wheel completely,
the retailer should be placed upside down on the
wheel.
5. Secure the flat tire by tightening the tire holding rod.
The tire holding rod and retainer are designed solely
to secure a flat tire in emergency. Do not use them for
another purpose such as securing cargo.
6. Store the jack and wheel nut wrench in their stor-
age locations.
7. Put the rubber cap back in its original position after
everything has been restored.
T Driving with the temporary spare tire
Your spare tire is only a temporary spare which is de-
signed for temporary emergency use only. When driv-
ing with the temporary spare tire, follow the instruc-
1
2
UB9062BB UB9063BA
9-18
In case of emergency
tions and precautions described in the “Temporary
spare tire” section in this chapter.
Replace the temporary spare tire with a conventional
tire as soon as you can.
Jump starting
y Battery fluid is SULFURIC ACID. Do not let it
come in contact with the eyes, skin, clothing or
the vehicle.
If battery fluid gets on you, thoroughly flush the
exposed area with water immediately. Get med-
ical help if the fluid has entered your eyes.
If battery fluid is accidentally swallowed, imme-
diately drink a large amount of milk or water,
and obtain immediate medical help.
Keep everyone including children away from
the battery.
y The gas generated by a battery explodes if a
flame or spark is brought near it. Do not smoke
or light a match while jump starting.
y Never attempt jump starting if the discharged
battery is frozen. It could cause the battery to
burst or explode.
y Whenever working on or around a battery, al-
ways wear suitable eye protectors, and remove
metal objects such as rings, bands or other
metal jewelry.
y Be sure the jumper cables and clamps on
them do not have loose or missing insulation.
9-19
In case of emergency
– CONTINUED –
Do not jump start unless cables in suitable con-
dition are available.
y A running engine can be dangerous. Keep
your fingers, hands, clothing, hair and tools
away from the cooling fan, belts and any other
moving engine parts. Removing rings, watches
and ties is advisable.
When your vehicle does not start due to a run down
(discharged) battery, the vehicle may be jump started
by connecting your battery to another battery (called
the booster battery) with jumper cables.
Jump starting is dangerous if it done incorrectly. If you
are unsure about the proper procedure for jump start-
ing, consult a competent mechanic.
How to jump start
1. Make sure the booster battery is 12 volts and the
negative terminal is grounded.
2. If the booster battery is in another vehicle, do not let
the two vehicles touch.
3. Turn off all unnecessary lights and accessories.
4. Connect the jumper cables exactly in the sequence
illustrated.
9-20
In case of emergency
A) Booster battery
B) Engine lifting bracket
_
_
+
+
4
1
2
3
A
B
UB8007BC
1)Connect one jumper cable to the
positive (+) terminal on the dis-
charged battery.
2)Connect the other end of the
jumper cable to the positive (+) ter-
minal of the booster battery.
3)Connect one end of the other
cable to the negative (–) terminal
of the booster battery.
4)Connect the other end of the ca-
ble to the engine lifting bracket.
Make sure that the cables are not
near any moving parts and that the
cable clamps are not in contact
with any other metal.
9-21
In case of emergency
– CONTINUED –
5. Start the engine of the vehicle with the booster bat-
tery and run it at moderate speed. Then start the en-
gine of the vehicle that has the discharged battery.
6. When finished, carefully disconnect the cables in
exactly the reverse order.
Engine overheating
Never attempt to remove the radiator cap until
the engine has been shut off and has fully
cooled down. When the engine is hot, the cool-
ant is under pressure. Removing the cap while
the engine is still hot could release a spray of
boiling hot coolant, which could burn you very
seriously.
If the engine overheats, pull off the road safely and
stop the vehicle in a safe place.
If steam is coming from the engine
compartment
Turn the engine off and get everyone away from the
vehicle until it cools down.
If no steam is coming from the engine
compartment
1. Keep the engine running at idling speed.
2. Open the hood to ventilate the engine compart-
ment.
9-22
In case of emergency
Confirm that the cooling fan is turning. If the fan is not
turning, immediately turn the engine off and contact
your authorized dealer for repair.
3. After the engine coolant temperature has dropped,
turn off the engine.
If the temperature gauge stays at the overheated
zone, turn the engine off.
4. After the engine has fully cooled down, check the
coolant level in the reserve tank.
If the coolant level is below the “MIN” mark, add cool-
ant up to the “MAX” mark.
5. If there is no coolant in the reserve tank, add cool-
ant to the reserve tank. Then remove the radiator cap
and fill the radiator with coolant.
If you remove the radiator cap from a hot radiator, first
wrap a thick cloth around the radiator cap, then turn
the cap counterclockwise slowly without pressing
down until it stops. Release the pressure from the ra-
diator. After the pressure has been fully released, re-
move the cap by pressing down and turning it.
Towing
Never tow AWD vehicles (both AT and MT) with
the front wheels raised off the ground while the
rear wheels are on the ground, or with the rear
wheels raised off the ground while the front
wheels are on the ground. This will cause the
vehicle to spin away due to the operation or de-
terioration of the center differential.
If towing is necessary, it is best done by your SUBARU
UB9064BA
9-23
In case of emergency
– CONTINUED –
dealer or a commercial towing service. Observe the
following procedures for safety.
Towing and tie-down hooks
The towing hooks should be used only in an emergen-
cy (e.g., to free a stuck vehicle from mud, sand or
snow).
y Use only specified towing hooks and tie-
down hooks. Never use suspension parts or
other body parts for towing or tie-down purpos-
es.
y Never use the tie-down hook closest to the
muffler under the vehicle for towing purposes.
y To prevent deformation to the front bumper
and the towing hook, do not apply excessive
lateral load to the towing hooks.
1) Towing hook cover
2) Towing hook
The front towing hook is located on the inside of the
towing hook cover below the right hand headlight.
2
1
UB9065BB
9-24
In case of emergency
1) Tie-down hook 1) Tie-down hook
2) Towing and tie-down hook
1
UB9070BB
2
1
UB9066CB
9-25
In case of emergency
– CONTINUED –
Vehicle with trailer hitch (if equipped)
1) Tie-down hook
T Towing hook cover removal procedure
The towing hook cover is secured by tabs that fit into
corresponding slots in the vehicle body.
To remove the cover:
1. Free the tabs on the towing hook cover by firmly
pressing the point indicated by an arrow with the palm
of your hand.
1
UB9010BB
UB9083BA
9-26
In case of emergency
2. Pull off the towing hook cover.
T Towing hook cover installation procedure
To reinstall the towing hook cover, push it in on both
sides while pushing it back to its original position.
Make certain that the tabs at the end of the cover are
securely inserted into the corresponding slots in the
vehicle’s body.
UB9084BA
UB9069BA
9-27
In case of emergency
– CONTINUED –
Using a flat-bed truck
This is the best way to transport your vehicle. Use the
following procedures to ensure safe transportation.
1. Shift the selector lever into the “P” position for au-
tomatic transmission vehicles or “1st” for manual
transmission vehicles.
2. Pull up the parking brake lever firmly.
3. Secure the vehicle onto the carrier properly with
safety chains. Each safety chain should be equally
tightened and care must be taken not to pull the chains
so tightly that the suspension bottoms out.
Towing with all wheels on the ground
y Never turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”
position while the vehicle is being towed be-
cause the steering wheel and the direction of
the wheels will be locked.
y Remember that the brake booster and power
steering do not function when the engine is not
running. Because the engine is turned off, it will
take greater effort to operate the brake pedal
and steering wheel.
UB9072AA UB9071AA
9-28
In case of emergency
y If transmission failure occurs, transport your
vehicle on a flat-bed truck.
y Do not run the engine while the vehicle is be-
ing towed using this method. Transmission
damage could result if the vehicle is towed with
the engine running.
y For vehicles with automatic transmission,
the traveling speed must be limited to less than
20 mph (30 km/h) and the traveling distance to
less than 30 miles (50 km). For greater speeds
and distances, transport your vehicle on a flat-
bed truck.
1. Check the transmission and differential oil levels
and add oil to bring it to the upper level if necessary.
2. Release the parking brake and put the transmis-
sion in neutral.
3. The ignition switch should be in the “ACC” position
while the vehicle is being towed.
4. Take up slack in the towline slowly to prevent dam-
age to the vehicle.
Moonroof – if the moonroof cannot be
closed
If the moonroof cannot be closed with the moonroof
switch, you can close the moonroof manually.
1. Take out the moonroof wrench and screwdriver
from the tool bag.
UB9006BA
9-29
In case of emergency
– CONTINUED –
1) Screws
2. Remove the map light lens by prying the edge of
the lens with a flat-head screwdriver, then remove the
switch body retaining screws and take off the moon-
roof switch.
3. Insert the wrench in the end of the motor shaft.
y To lower the moonroof, turn the wrench clockwise.
y To close the moonroof, turn the wrench counter-
clockwise.
Have your vehicle checked by an authorized SUBARU
dealer.
1
UB9007BB UB9008BA
10-1
10
Appearance care
Exterior care .................................................. 10-2
Washing ............................................................. 10-2
Waxing and polishing ....................................... 10-3
Cleaning aluminum wheels .............................. 10-4
Cleaning fog light lens ..................................... 10-4
Corrosion protection .................................... 10-5
Most common causes of corrosion ................ 10-5
To help prevent corrosion ............................... 10-5
Cleaning the interior ..................................... 10-6
Seat fabric ......................................................... 10-6
Leather seat materials ...................................... 10-6
Synthetic leather upholstery ........................... 10-7
Climate control panel, audio panel, instrument
panel, console panel, switches, combination
meter, and other plastic surfaces ................. 10-7
10-2
Appearance care
Appearan ce care
Exterior care
Washing
y When washing the vehicle, the brakes may
get wet. As a result, the brake stopping dis-
tance will be longer. To dry the brakes, drive the
vehicle at a safe speed while lightly pressing
the brake pedal to heat up the brakes.
y Do not wash the engine compartment and ar-
eas adjacent to it. If water enters the engine air
intake, electrical parts or the power steering flu-
id reservoir, it will cause engine trouble or
faulty power steering respectively.
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s beauty is fre-
quent washing. Wash the vehicle at least once a
month to avoid contamination by road grime.
Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty of luke-
warm or cold water. Do not wash the vehicle with hot
water and in direct sunlight.
Salt, chemicals, insects, tar, soot and bird droppings
should be washed off by using a light detergent, as re-
quired. If you use a light detergent, make certain that
it is a neutral detergent. Do not use strong soap or
chemical detergents. All cleaning agents should be
promptly flushed from the surface and not allowed to
dry there. Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of
lukewarm water. Wipe the remaining water off with a
chamois or soft cloth.
NOTE
y Before having your vehicle washed in an auto-
matic car wash, retract the pillar mounted antenna
or remove the roof mounted antenna to prevent it
from being damaged.
y When having your vehicle washed in an auto-
matic car wash, make sure beforehand that the car
wash is of suitable type. If the vehicle is equipped
with a rear/roof spoiler, it may be damaged by car
wash brushes or other equipment.
T Washing the underbody
Chemicals, salts and gravel used for deicing road sur-
faces are extremely corrosive, accelerating the corro-
sion of underbody components, such as the exhaust
system, fuel and brake lines, brake cables, floor pan
and fenders, and suspension.
Thoroughly flush the underbody and inside of the
fenders with lukewarm or cold water at frequent inter-
vals to reduce the harmful effects of such agents.
10-3
Appearance care
– CONTINUED –
Mud and sand adhering to the underbody components
may accelerate their corrosion.
After driving off-road or muddy or sandy roads, wash
the mud and sand off the underbody.
Carefully flush the suspension and axle parts, as they
are particularly prone to mud and sand buildup. Do not
use a sharp-edged tool to remove caked mud.
NOTE
Be careful not to damage brake hoses, sensor har-
nesses, and other parts when washing suspen-
sion components.
T Using a warm water washer
y Keep a good distance of 12 in (30 cm) or more be-
tween the washer nozzle and the vehicle.
y Do not wash the same area continuously.
y If a stain will not come out easily, wash by hand.
Some warm water washers are of the high tempera-
ture, high pressure type, and they can damage or de-
form the resin parts such as mouldings, or cause wa-
ter to leak into the vehicle.
Waxing and polishing
Always wash and dry the vehicle before waxing and
polishing.
Use a good quality polish and wax and apply them ac-
cording to the manufacturer’s instructions. Wax or pol-
ish when the painted surface is cool.
Be sure to polish and wax the chrome trim, as well as
the painted surfaces. Loss of wax on a painted surface
leads to loss of the original luster and also quickens
the deterioration of the surface. It is recommended
that a coat of wax be applied at least once a month, or
whenever the surface no longer repels water.
If the appearance of the paint has diminished to the
point where the luster or tone cannot be restored,
lightly polish the surface with a fine-grained com-
pound. Never polish just the affected area, but include
the surrounding area as well. Always polish in only
one direction. A No. 2000 grain compound is recom-
mended. Never use a coarse-grained compound.
Coarser grained compounds have a smaller grain-size
number and could damage the paint. After polishing
with a compound, coat with wax to restore the original
luster. Frequent polishing with a compound or an in-
correct polishing technique will result in removing the
paint layer and exposing the undercoat. When in
doubt, it is always best to contact your SUBARU deal-
er or an auto paint specialist.
NOTE
Be careful not to damage brake hoses, sensor har-
nesses, and other parts when washing suspen-
10-4
Appearance care
sion components.
Cleaning aluminum wheels
y Promptly wipe the aluminum wheels clean of any
kind of grime or agent. If dirt is left on too long, it may
be difficult to clean off.
y Do not use soap containing grit to clean the wheels.
Be sure to use a neutral cleaning agent, and later rinse
thoroughly with water. Do not clean the wheels with a
stiff brush or expose them to a high-speed washing
device.
y Clean the vehicle (including the aluminum wheels)
with water as soon as possible when it has been
splashed with sea water, exposed to sea breezes, or
driven on roads treated with salt or other agents.
Cleaning fog light lens
1. Stop the vehicle in a safe place.
2. Stop the engine and turn off the fog lights.
1) Counter-clockwise
2) Light lens horizontal center line
3. Check that the fog lights are not hot. Then, grasp
the protector and turn it approximately 10° counter-
clockwise.
4. Pull the protector off the fog light.
5. Wash the lens with water.
6. Apply the protector to the lens at an angle of ap-
proximately 10° from the fog light’s horizontal center
line. Then, turn the protector clockwise until it stops.
Finally, check that the protector’s horizontal bars are
parallel with the fog light’s horizontal center line.
1
2
10
UBA017BB
10-5
Appearance care
– CONTINUED –
Corrosion protection
Your SUBARU has been designed and built to resist
corrosion. Special materials and protective finishes
have been used on most parts of the vehicle to help
maintain fine appearance, strength, and reliable oper-
ation.
Most common causes of corrosion
The most common causes of corrosion are:
1. The accumulation of moisture retaining dirt and de-
bris in body panel sections, cavities, and other areas.
2. Damage to paint and other protective coatings
caused by gravel and stone chips or minor accidents.
Corrosion is accelerated on the vehicle when:
1. It is exposed to road salt or dust control chemicals,
or used in coastal areas where there is more salt in the
air, or in areas where there is considerable industrial
pollution.
2. It is driven in areas of high humidity, especially
when temperatures range just above freezing.
3. Dampness in certain parts of the vehicle remains
for a long time, even though other parts of the vehicle
may be dry.
4. High temperatures will cause corrosion to parts of
the vehicle which cannot dry quickly due to lack of
proper ventilation.
To help prevent corrosion
Wash the vehicle regularly to prevent corrosion of the
body and suspension components. Also, wash the ve-
hicle promptly after driving on any of the following sur-
faces:
y roads that have been salted to prevent them from
freezing in winter
y mud, sand, or gravel
y coastal roads
After the winter has ended, it is recommended that the
underbody be given a very thorough washing.
Before the beginning of winter, check the condition of
underbody components, such as the exhaust system,
fuel and brake lines, brake cables, suspension, steer-
ing system, floor pan, and fenders. If any of them are
found to be rusted, they should be given an appropri-
ate rust prevention treatment or should be replaced.
Contact your SUBARU dealer to perform this kind of
maintenance and treatment if you need assistance.
Repair chips and scratches in the paint as soon as you
find them.
Check the interior of the vehicle for water and dirt ac-
10-6
Appearance care
cumulation under the floor mats because that could
cause corrosion. Occasionally check under the mats
to make sure the area is dry.
Keep your garage dry. Do not park your vehicle in a
damp, poorly ventilated garage. In such a garage, cor-
rosion can be caused by dampness. If you wash the
vehicle in the garage or put the vehicle into the garage
when wet or covered with snow, that can cause damp-
ness.
If your vehicle is operated in cold weather and/or in ar-
eas where road salts and other corrosive materials are
used, the door hinges and locks, trunk lid lock, and
hood latch should be inspected and lubricated period-
ically.
Cleaning the interior
Use a vacuum cleaner to get rid of the dust and dirt.
Wipe the vinyl areas with a clean, damp cloth.
Seat fabric
Remove loose dirt, dust or debris with a vacuum
cleaner. If the dirt is caked on the fabric or hard to re-
move with a vacuum cleaner, use a soft blush then
vacuum it.
Wipe the fabric surface with a tightly wrung cloth and
dry the seat fabric thoroughly. If the fabric is still dirty,
wipe using a solution of mild soap and lukewarm water
then dry thoroughly.
If the stain does not come out, try a commercially-
available fabric cleaner. Use the cleaner on a hidden
place and make sure it does not affect the fabric ad-
versely. Use the cleaner according to its instructions.
Leather seat materials
The leather used by SUBARU is a high quality natural
product which will retain its distinctive appearance and
feel for many years with proper care.
Allowing dust or road dirt to build up on the surface can
cause the material to become brittle and to wear pre-
10-7
Appearance care
– CONTINUED –
maturely. Regular cleaning with a soft, moist, natural
fiber cloth should be performed monthly, taking care
not to soak the leather or allow water to penetrate the
stitched seams.
A mild detergent suitable for cleaning woolen fabrics
may be used to remove difficult dirt spots, rubbing with
a soft, dry cloth afterwards to restore the luster. If your
SUBARU is to be parked for a long time in bright sun-
light, it is recommended that the seats and headrests
be covered, or the windows shaded, to prevent fading
or shrinkage.
Minor surface blemishes or bald patches may be treat-
ed with a commercial leather spray lacquer. You will
discover that each leather seat section will develop
soft folds or wrinkles, which is characteristic of genu-
ine leather.
Synthetic leather upholstery
The synthetic leather material used on the SUBARU
may be cleaned using mild soap or detergent and wa-
ter, after first vacuuming or brushing away loose dirt.
Allow the soap to soak in for a few minutes and wipe
off with a clean, damp cloth. Commercial foam-type
cleaners suitable for synthetic leather materials may
be used when necessary.
NOTE
Strong cleaning agents such as solvents, paint
thinners, window cleaner or gasoline must never
be used on leather or synthetic interior materials.
Climate control panel, audio panel, in-
strument panel, console panel, switch-
es, combination meter, and other plas-
tic surfaces
Gently wipe away contamination using a clean, soft
cloth moistened with cold or lukewarm water.
NOTE
Do not use organic solvents such as paint thin-
ners or gasoline, or strong cleaning agents that
contain those solvents.
11-1
11
Maintenance and service
Maintenance schedule ................................. 11-3
Maintenance precautions ............................ 11-3
Before checking or servicing in the engine
compartment .................................................. 11-4
When you do checking or servicing in the
engine compartment while the engine is
running ............................................................ 11-5
Engine hood .................................................. 11-5
Engine compartment overview ................... 11-8
Non-turbo models ............................................. 11-8
Turbo models .................................................... 11-9
Engine oil ...................................................... 11-10
Checking the oil level ....................................... 11-10
Changing the oil and oil filter .......................... 11-12
Recommended grade and viscosity ................ 11-15
Recommended grade and viscosity under
severe driving conditions .............................. 11-16
Cooling system ............................................. 11-17
Hose and connections ...................................... 11-18
Engine coolant .................................................. 11-18
Air cleaner element ...................................... 11-23
Replacing the air cleaner element ................... 11-23
Spark plugs ................................................... 11-25
Recommended spark plugs ............................. 11-26
Drive belts ..................................................... 11-26
Manual transmission oil ............................... 11-27
Checking the oil level ....................................... 11-27
Recommended grade and viscosity ................ 11-28
Automatic transmission fluid ...................... 11-29
Checking the fluid level .................................... 11-29
Recommended fluid ......................................... 11-31
Front differential gear oil (AT vehicles) ...... 11-32
Checking the oil level ....................................... 11-32
Recommended grade and viscosity ............... 11-32
Rear differential gear oil ............................... 11-33
Checking the gear oil level .............................. 11-33
Recommended grade and viscosity ............... 11-35
Power steering fluid ...................................... 11-36
Checking the fluid level .................................... 11-36
Recommended fluid ......................................... 11-37
Brake fluid ..................................................... 11-38
Checking the fluid level .................................... 11-38
Recommended brake fluid ............................... 11-39
Clutch fluid (MT vehicles) ............................ 11-39
Checking the fluid level .................................... 11-39
Recommended clutch fluid .............................. 11-40
Brake booster ................................................ 11-41
Brake pedal .................................................... 11-41
Checking the brake pedal free play ................ 11-41
Checking the brake pedal reserve distance ... 11-42
Clutch pedal
(Manual transmission vehicles) ............... 11-42
Checking the clutch function .......................... 11-42
Checking the clutch pedal free play ............... 11-43
Replacement of brake pad and lining ......... 11-43
Breaking-in of new brake pads and linings .... 11-44
Parking brake stroke .................................... 11-45
Tires and wheels ........................................... 11-45
11-2
Maintenance and service
Types of tires .................................................... 11-45
Tire inspection .................................................. 11-46
Tire pressures and wear .................................. 11-46
Wheel balance ................................................... 11-49
Wear indicators ................................................. 11-49
Tire rotation ....................................................... 11-50
Tire replacement ............................................... 11-50
Wheel replacement ........................................... 11-51
Aluminum wheels ......................................... 11-52
Windshield washer fluid .............................. 11-52
Replacement of windshield wiper blades .. 11-53
Battery ........................................................... 11-56
Fuses ............................................................. 11-57
Main fuse ....................................................... 11-60
Installation of accessories .......................... 11-60
Replacing bulbs ............................................ 11-61
Headlight ........................................................... 11-64
Front fog light ................................................... 11-68
Front turn signal light, parking light and side
marker light .................................................... 11-69
Rear combination lights ................................... 11-70
Tail light (on the tailgate) ................................. 11-72
License plate light ............................................ 11-74
Map light, dome light and door step light ...... 11-76
High mount stop and cargo light assembly ... 11-77
Sport activity lights (if equipped) .................... 11-79
11-3
Maintenance and service
– CONTINUED –
Maintenance a nd service
Maintenance schedule
The scheduled maintenance items required to be ser-
viced at regular intervals are shown in the “Warranty
and Maintenance Booklet”.
For details of your maintenance schedule, read the
separate “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.
Maintenance precautions
When maintenance and service are required, it is rec-
ommended that all work be done by an authorized
SUBARU dealer.
If you perform maintenance and service by yourself,
you should familiarize yourself with the information
provided in this section on general maintenance and
service for your SUBARU.
Incorrect or incomplete service could cause improper
or unsafe vehicle operation. Any problems caused by
improper maintenance and service performed by you
are not eligible for warranty coverage.
y Testing of an All-Wheel Drive vehicle must
NEVER be performed on a single two-wheel dy-
namometer or similar apparatus. Attempting to
do so will result in transmission damage and in
uncontrolled vehicle movement and may cause
an accident or injuries to persons nearby.
y Always select a safe area when performing
maintenance on your vehicle.
y Always be very careful to avoid injury when
working on the vehicle. Remember that some of
11-4
Maintenance and service
the materials in the vehicle may be hazardous if
improperly used or handled, for example, bat-
tery acid.
y Your vehicle should only be serviced by per-
sons fully competent to do so. Serious person-
al injury may result to persons not experienced
in servicing vehicles.
y Always use the proper tools and make certain
that they are well maintained.
y Never get under the vehicle supported only
by a jack. Always use a safety stands to sup-
port the vehicle.
y Never keep the engine running in a poorly
ventilated area, such as a garage or other
closed areas.
y Do not smoke or allow open flames around
the fuel or battery. This will cause a fire.
y Because the fuel system is under pressure,
replacement of the fuel filter should be per-
formed only by your SUBARU dealer.
y Wear adequate eye protection to guard
against getting oil or fluids in your eyes. If
something does get in your eyes, thoroughly
wash them out with clean water.
y Do not tamper with the wiring of the SRS air-
bag system or seatbelt pretensioner system, or
attempt to take its connectors apart, as that
may activate the system or it can render it inop-
erative. The wiring and connectors of these
systems are yellow for easy identification. NEV-
ER use a circuit tester for these wiring.
If your SRS airbag or seatbelt pretensioner
needs service, consult your nearest SUBARU
dealer.
Before checking or servicing in the en-
gine compartment
y Always stop the engine and set the parking
brake firmly to prevent the vehicle from mov-
ing.
y Always let the engine cool down. Engine
parts become very hot when the engine is run-
ning and remain hot for some time after the en-
gine is stopped.
y Do not spill engine oil, engine coolant, brake
fluid or any other fluid on hot engine compo-
nents. This may cause a fire.
y Always remove the key from the ignition
switch. When the ignition switch is in the “ON”
position, the cooling fan may operate suddenly
11-5
Maintenance and service
– CONTINUED –
even when the engine is stopped.
When you do checking or servicing in
the engine compartment while the en-
gine is running
A running engine can be dangerous. Keep your
fingers, hands, clothing, hair and tools away
from the cooling fan, belts and any other mov-
ing engine parts. Removing rings, watches and
ties is advisable.
Engine hood
0
To open the hood:
1. If the wiper blades are lifted off the windshield, re-
turn them to their original positions.
2. Pull the hood release knob under the instrument
panel.
UBB008EA
11-6
Maintenance and service
3. Release the secondary hood release located under
the front grille by moving the lever toward the left.
4. Lift up the hood, release the hood prop from its re-
tainer and put the end of the hood prop into the slot in
the hood.
To close the hood:
1. Lift the hood slightly and remove the hood prop
from the slot in the hood and return the prop to its re-
tainer.
2. Lower the hood until it approaches about 6 in (15
cm) from the closed position and let it drop.
3. After closing the hood, be sure the hood is securely
locked.
If this does not close the hood, release it from a slightly
higher position. Do not push the hood forcibly to close
UBB094BA UBB003BA
11-7
Maintenance and service
– CONTINUED –
it. It could deform the metal.
Always check that the hood is properly locked
before you start driving. If it is not, it might fly
open while the vehicle is moving and block
your view, which may cause an accident and
serious bodily injury.
11-8
Maintenance and service
Engine compartment overview
Non-turbo models
12 34567
8910111213
UBB106BB
1) Manual transmission oil level
gauge (MT) (page 11-27) or Dif-
ferential gear oil level gauge
(AT) (page 11-32)
2) Air cleaner element (page 11-
23)
3) Clutch fluid reservoir (page 11-
39)
4) Automatic transmission fluid lev-
el gauge (page 11-29)
5) Brake fluid reservoir (page 11-
38)
6) Windshield washer tank (page
11-52)
7) Fuse box (page 11-57)
8) Battery (page 11-56)
9) Engine oil filler cap (page 11-10)
10) Engine coolant reservoir (page
11-18)
11) Radiator cap (page 11-18)
12) Engine oil level gauge (page 11-
10)
13) Power steering fluid reservoir
(page 11-36)
11-9
Maintenance and service
– CONTINUED –
Turbo models
1
11 10 9 81213
234567
UBB098CB
1) Air cleaner element (page 11-
23)
2) Manual transmission oil level
gauge (MT) (page 11-27) or Dif-
ferential gear oil level gauge
(AT) (page 11-32)
3) Clutch fluid reservoir (page 11-
39)
4) Automatic transmission fluid lev-
el gauge (page 11-29)
5) Brake fluid reservoir (page 11-
38)
6) Windshield washer tank (page
11-52)
7) Fuse box (page 11-57)
8) Battery (page 11-56)
9) Engine oil filler cap (page 11-10)
10) Engine coolant reservoir (page
11-18)
11) Engine oil level gauge (page 11-
10)
12) Radiator cap (page 11-18)
13) Power steering fluid reservoir
(page 11-36)
11-10
Maintenance and service
Engine oil
Checking the oil level
Check the engine oil level at each fuel stop.
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and stop the en-
gine.
Non-turbo models
Turbo models
2. Pull out the dipstick, wipe it clean, and insert it
again.
3. Be sure the dipstick is correctly inserted until it
stops with the graphic symbol on its top appear-
ing as shown in the illustration.
UBB004MA
HGB056BA
11-11
Maintenance and service
– CONTINUED –
Non-turbo models
1) Notch
2) Upper level
3) Lower level
Turbo models
1) Notch
2) Upper level
3) Lower level
4. Pull out the dipstick again and check the oil level on
it. If it is below the lower level, add oil to bring the level
up to the upper level.
Use only engine oil with the recommended
grade and viscosity.
1
2
3
UGB081BB
1
2
3
UGB082BB
11-12
Maintenance and service
If you check the oil level just after stopping the engine,
wait a few minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil
pan before checking the level.
To prevent overfilling the engine oil, do not add any
additional oil above the upper level when the engine is
cold.
The dipstick has a notch above the upper level.
Just after driving or while the engine is warm, the en-
gine oil level reading may be in a range between the
upper level and the notch mark. This is caused by ther-
mal expansion of the engine oil.
Changing the oil and oil filter
Change the oil and oil filter according to the mainte-
nance schedule in the “Warranty and Maintenance
Booklet”.
The engine oil and oil filter must be changed more fre-
quently than listed in the maintenance schedule when
driving on dusty roads, when short trips are frequently
made, or when driving in extremely cold whether.
1. Warm up the engine by letting the engine idle for
about 10 minutes to ease draining the engine oil.
2. Park the vehicle on a level surface and stop the en-
gine.
3. Remove the oil filler cap.
1) Drain plug
4. Drain out the engine oil by removing the drain plug
while the engine is still warm. The used oil should be
drained into an appropriate container and disposed of
properly.
Be careful not to burn yourself with hot engine
oil.
1
UBB005BB
11-13
Maintenance and service
– CONTINUED –
1) Sealing washer
2) Drain plug
5. Wipe the seating surface of the drain plug with a
clean cloth and tighten it securely with a new sealing
washer after the oil has completely drained out.
6. Remove three clips at the front of the cover under
the oil filter.
1
2
UBB051BB UBB054BA
11-14
Maintenance and service
7. Slide the cover toward the vehicle front to remove
it.
8. Remove the oil filter with an oil filter wrench.
9. Before installing a new oil filter, apply a thin coat of
engine oil to the seal.
10.Clean the rubber seal seating area of the bottom of
engine and install the oil filter by hand turning. Be
careful not to twist or damage the seal.
11.Tighten the oil filter by the amount indicated in the
following table after the seal makes contact with the
bottom of engine.
Never over tighten the oil filter because that can
result in an oil leak.
12.Reinstall the cover under the oil filter.
13.Pour engine oil through the filler neck.
Oil capacity (Guideline):
4.2 US qt (4.0 liters, 3.5 Imp qt)
UBB055BA
Model Oil filter color Part number
Amount of
rotation
Non-turbo
models
Black 15208AA080 1 rotation
Light blue 15208AA024
2/3 – 3/4
rotation
White
15208AA09A
15208AA060
Turbo
models
Black 15208AA080 1 rotation
White 15208AA09A
2/3 – 3/4
rotation
11-15
Maintenance and service
– CONTINUED –
The oil quantity indicated above is only a guideline.
The necessary quantity of oil depends on the quantity
of oil that has been drained. The quantity of drained oil
differs slightly depending on the temperature of the oil
and the time the oil is left flowing out. After refilling the
engine with oil, therefore, you must use the dipstick to
confirm that the level is correct.
14.Start the engine and make sure that no oil leaks ap-
pear around the filter’s rubber seal and drain plug.
15.Run the engine until it reaches the normal operat-
ing temperature. Then stop the engine and wait a few
minutes to allow the oil drain back. Check the oil level
again and if necessary, add more engine oil.
Recommended grade and viscosity
Use only engine oil with the recommended
grade and viscosity.
Oil grade:
ILSAC GF-3, which can be identified with the new
API certification mark (Starburst mark)
or API classification SL with the words “ENERGY
CONSERVING” (if you cannot obtain the oil with
SL grade, you may use SJ grade “ENERGY CON-
SERVING” oil).
These recommended oil grades can be identified by
looking for either or both of the following marks dis-
played on the oil container.
New API Certification Mark (Starburst Mark)
A
M
E
R
I
C
A
N
P
E
T
R
O
L
E
U
M
I
N
S
T
I
T
U
T
E
C
E
R
T
I
F
I
E
D
HSB023AA
11-16
Maintenance and service
API Service label
1) Indicates the oil quality by API designations
2) Indicates the SAE oil viscosity grade
3) Indicates that the oil has fuel saving capabilities
In choosing an oil, you want the proper quality and vis-
cosity, as well as one that will add to fuel economy.
The following table lists the recommended viscosities
and applicable temperatures.
When adding oil, different brands may be used togeth-
er as long as they are the same API classification and
SAE viscosity as those recommended by SUBARU.
SAE viscosity No. and applicable temperature
*: 5W-30 is preferred.
Engine oil viscosity (thickness) affects fuel economy.
Oils of lower viscosity provide better fuel economy.
However, in hot weather, oil of higher viscosity is re-
quired to properly lubricate the engine.
Recommended grade and viscosity
under severe driving conditions
If the vehicle is used in desert areas, in areas with very
high temperatures, or used for heavy-duty applica-
tions such as towing a trailer, use of oil with the follow-
ing grade and viscosities is recommended.
A
P
I
S
E
R
V
I
C
E
S
L
E
N
E
R
G
Y
C
O
N
S
E
R
V
I
N
G
SAE
5W
30
1
2
3
HSB022BB
5W-30*
10W-30, 10W-40
-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40
-20
06020 80 10040
HSB024BA
11-17
Maintenance and service
– CONTINUED –
API classification SL (or SJ):
SAE viscosity No.:
30, 40, 10W-50, 20W-40, 20W-50
Cooling system
Never attempt to remove the radiator cap until
the engine has been shut off and has cooled
down completely. Since the coolant is under
pressure, you may suffer serious burns from a
spray of boiling hot coolant when the cap is re-
moved.
y The cooling system has been filled at the fac-
tory with a high quality, corrosion-inhibiting,
year-around coolant which provides protection
against freezing down to –33°F (–36°C). For
adding, use genuine SUBARU coolant or an
equivalent: a mixture of 50% soft water and 50%
ethylene-glycol basis coolant. Use of improper
coolants may result in corrosion in the cooling
system. It is important to maintain protection
against freezing and corrosion, even if freezing
temperatures are not expected. Never mix dif-
ferent kinds of coolant.
y Do not splash the engine coolant over paint-
11-18
Maintenance and service
ed parts. The alcohol contained in the engine
coolant may damage the paint surface.
Hose and connections
Your vehicle employs an electric cooling fan which is
thermostatically controlled to operate when the engine
coolant reaches a specific temperature.
If the radiator cooling fan does not operate even when
the engine coolant temperature gauge exceeds the
normal operating range, the cooling fan circuit may be
defective. Check the fuse and replace it if necessary.
If the fuse is not blown, have the cooling system
checked by your SUBARU dealer.
If frequent addition of coolant is necessary, there may
be a leak in the engine cooling system. It is recom-
mended that the cooling system and connections be
checked for leaks, damage, or looseness.
Engine coolant
T Checking the coolant level
1) “FULL” level mark
2) “LOW” level mark
Check the coolant level at each fuel stop.
1. Check the coolant level on the outside of the reser-
voir while the engine is cool.
2. If the level is close to or lower than the “LOW” level
mark, add coolant up to the “FULL” level mark. If the
reserve tank is empty, remove the radiator cap and re-
fill as required.
FULL
LOW
1
2
UBB004FB
11-19
Maintenance and service
– CONTINUED –
1) Rubber gaskets
3. After refilling the reserve tank and the radiator, re-
install the caps and check that the rubber gaskets in-
side the radiator cap are in the proper position.
T Changing the coolant
Always add genuine SUBARU cooling system condi-
tioner whenever the coolant is replaced.
Change the engine coolant and add genuine SUBARU
cooling system conditioner using the following proce-
dures according to the maintenance schedule in the
“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.
1. Remove the under cover.
Non-turbo models
1
HSB026BB UBB006CA
11-20
Maintenance and service
Turbo models
2. Place a proper container under the drain plug and
loosen the drain plug.
Never attempt to remove the radiator cap until
the engine has been shut off and has cooled
down completely. Since the coolant is under
pressure, you may suffer serious burns from a
spray of boiling hot coolant when the cap is re-
moved.
3. Loosen the radiator cap to drain the coolant from
the radiator. Then drain the coolant from the reserve
tank. Tighten the drain plug securely.
NOTE (Turbo models)
The cap (without tabs) on top of the radiator does
not need to be removed. To add coolant, remove
the cap (with tabs) on the coolant tank on top of
the engine.
Non-turbo models
1) Filler neck
2) Fill up to here
UBB104BA
1
2
UBB007CB
11-21
Maintenance and service
– CONTINUED –
Turbo models
1) Filler neck
2) Fill up to here
4. Slowly pour the coolant and fill up to just below the
filler neck, allowing enough room to add genuine
SUBARU cooling system conditioner in the radiator.
Add genuine SUBARU cooling system conditioner un-
til the coolant level reaches the filler neck. Do not pour
the coolant too quickly, as this may lead to insufficient
air bleeding and trapped air in the system.
Coolant capacity (Guideline):
Non-turbo models:
MT. 7.2 US qt (6.8 liters, 6.0 Imp qt)
AT. 7.1 US qt (6.7 liters, 5.9 Imp qt)
Turbo models:
MT. 8.1 US qt (7.7 liters, 6.8 Imp qt)
AT. 8.0 US qt (7.6 liters, 6.7 Imp qt)
y Be careful not to spill engine coolant when
adding it. If coolant touches the exhaust pipe, it
may cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or a fire.
y Do not splash the engine coolant over paint-
ed parts. The alcohol contained in the engine
coolant may damage the paint surface.
1
2
USB518BB
11-22
Maintenance and service
1) “FULL” level mark
2) “LOW” level mark
5. Pour the coolant and fill to the reservoir tank’s
“FULL” level mark.
1) Rubber gaskets
6. Put the radiator cap back on and tighten firmly. At
this time, make sure that the rubber gasket in the radi-
ator cap is correctly in place.
7. Start and run the engine for more than five minutes
at 2,000 to 3,000 rpm.
8. Stop the engine and wait until the coolant cools
down (122 to 140°F [50 to 60°C]). If there is any loss
of coolant, add coolant to the radiator’s filler neck and
to the reserve tank’s “FULL” level.
9. Put the radiator cap and reservoir cap back on and
tighten firmly.
FULL
LOW
1
2
UBB004FB
1
HSB026BB
11-23
Maintenance and service
– CONTINUED –
Air cleaner element
Do not operate the engine with the air cleaner
element removed. The air cleaner element not
only filters intake air but also stops flames if the
engine backfires. If the air cleaner element is
not installed when the engine backfires, you
could be burned.
The air cleaner element functions as a filter screen.
When the element is perforated or removed, engine
wear will be excessive and engine life shortened.
The air cleaner element is a viscous type. It is unnec-
essary to clean or wash the element.
Replacing the air cleaner element
T Non-turbo models
Replace the air cleaner element according to the
maintenance schedule in the “Warranty and Mainte-
nance Booklet”. Under extremely dusty conditions, re-
place it more frequently. It is recommended that you
always use genuine SUBARU parts.
0
1) Bolt
1. Remove the bolt securing the rear air cleaner ele-
ment case.
2. Unsnap the three clamps holding the rear air clean-
er element case.
1
UBB063BB
11-24
Maintenance and service
1) Air cleaner element
3. Separate the rear air cleaner element case from
the front air cleaner element case and remove the air
cleaner element.
4. Clean the inside of the front and rear air cleaner el-
ement cases with a damp cloth and install a new air
cleaner element.
5. Insert the four projections on the rear air cleaner el-
ement case into the slits on the front air cleaner ele-
ment case and snap the three clamps on the rear air
cleaner element case and then tighten the bolt.
T Turbo models
1. Unsnap the two clamps holding the air cleaner
case cover.
1
UBB064BB
USB521BA
11-25
Maintenance and service
– CONTINUED –
1) Air cleaner case cover
2) Air cleaner element
2. Open the air cleaner case cover and remove the air
cleaner element.
3. Clean the inside of the air cleaner cover and case
with a damp cloth and install a new air cleaner ele-
ment.
To install the air cleaner case cover, insert two projec-
tions on the air cleaner case into the slits on the air
cleaner case cover and then snap the two clamps on
the air cleaner case cover.
Spark plugs
y When disconnecting the spark plug cables,
always grasp the spark plug cap, not the ca-
bles.
y Make sure the cables are replaced in the cor-
rect order.
It may be difficult to replace the spark plugs. It is rec-
ommended that you have the spark plugs replaced by
your SUBARU dealer.
2
1
USB522BB
HSB032BA
11-26
Maintenance and service
The spark plugs should be replaced according to the
maintenance schedule in the “Warranty and Mainte-
nance Booklet”.
Recommended spark plugs
Non-turbo models:
RC10YC4 (Champion)
BKR6E-11 (NGK)
BKR5E-11 (NGK)
Turbo models:
ILFR6B (NGK)
Drive belts
The alternator, power steering pump, and air condi-
tioner compressor depend on drive belts. Satisfactory
performance requires that belt tension be correct.
1) Power steering pump pulley
2) Air conditioner compressor pulley
3) Crank pulley
2
3
A
B
1
HSB033BB
11-27
Maintenance and service
– CONTINUED –
in (mm)
To check belt tension, place a straightedge (ruler)
across two adjacent pulleys and apply a force of 22 lbs
(98 N, 10 kg) midway between the pulleys by using a
spring scale. Belt deflection should be the amount
specified.
Manual transmission oil
Checking the oil level
0
Non-turbo models
1) Yellow handle
Deflection
New belt Used belt
A 0.28 – 0.35 (7.0 – 9.0) 0.35 – 0.43 (9.0 – 11.0)
B 0.30 – 0.33 (7.5 – 8.5) 0.35 – 0.40 (9.0 – 10.0)
1
UBB004DB
11-28
Maintenance and service
Turbo models
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and stop the en-
gine.
2. Pull out the dipstick, wipe it clean, and insert it
again.
1) Upper level
2) Lower level
3. Pull out the dipstick again and check the oil level on
it. If it is below the lower level, add oil through the dip-
stick hole to bring the level up to the upper level.
Recommended grade and viscosity
Each oil manufacturer has its own base oils and addi-
tives. Never use different brands together.
Oil grade:
API classification GL-5
UGB001JA
L
F
FL
1
2
1
2
USB526BB
11-29
Maintenance and service
– CONTINUED –
SAE viscosity No. and applicable temperature
Automatic transmission fluid
Checking the fluid level
The automatic transmission fluid expands largely as
its temperature rises; the fluid level differs according to
fluid temperature. Therefore, there are two different
scales for checking the level of hot fluid and cold fluid
on the dipstick.
Though the fluid level can be checked without warm-
ing up the fluid on the “COLD” range, we recommend
checking the fluid level when the fluid is at operating
temperature.
T Checking the fluid level when the fluid is hot
Check the fluid level monthly.
1. Drive the vehicle several miles to raise the temper-
ature of the transmission fluid up to normal operating
temperature; 158 to 176°F (70 to 80°C) is normal.
2. Park the vehicle on a level surface and set the park-
ing brake.
3. First shift the selector lever in each position. Then
shift it in the “P” position, and run the engine at idling
speed.
-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40
-20 0 6020
80W
75W/90
80 10040
85W
90
HSB036BA
11-30
Maintenance and service
1) Yellow handle
1) Yellow handle
1
UBB004KB
HSB018MB
1
11-31
Maintenance and service
– CONTINUED –
A) HOT range
B) COLD range
1) Upper level
2) Lower level
4. Pull out the dipstick and check the fluid level on the
gauge. If it is below the lower level on the “HOT”
range, add the recommended automatic transmission
fluid up to the upper level.
T Checking the fluid level when the fluid is cold
When the fluid level has to be checked without time to
warm up the automatic transmission, check to see that
the fluid level is between the lower level and upper lev-
el on the “COLD” range. If it is below that range, add
fluid up to the upper level. Be careful not to overfill.
Recommended fluid
“Dexron III” Type Automatic Transmission Fluid
LF
LF
1
2
1
2
B
A
HGB061BB
11-32
Maintenance and service
Front differential gear oil (AT vehi-
cles)
Checking the oil level
1) Yellow
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and stop the en-
gine.
2. Pull out the dipstick, wipe it clean, and insert it
again.
1) Upper level
2) Lower level
3. Pull out the dipstick again and check the oil level on
it. If it is below the lower level, add oil to bring the level
up to the upper level.
Recommended grade and viscosity
Each oil manufacturer has its own base oils and addi-
tives. Never use different brands together.
Oil grade:
API classification GL-5
1
UBB004EB
L
F
1
2
HSB040BB
11-33
Maintenance and service
– CONTINUED –
SAE viscosity No. and applicable temperature
Rear differential gear oil
Checking the gear oil level
If the vehicle requires frequent refilling, there
may be an oil leak. If you suspect a problem,
have the vehicle checked at your SUBARU deal-
er.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a rear differential
protector. The differential protector provides protec-
tion to the rear differential assembly during off-road
use. Removal of the rear differential protector is not re-
quired when checking the oil level.
-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40
-20 0 6020
80W
75W/90
80 10040
85W
90
HSB036BA
11-34
Maintenance and service
Non-turbo AT
1) Filler plug
2) Drain plug
1) Filler hole
2) Drain hole
3) Oil level
1
2
OM-U0213
1
2
3
OM-U0214
11-35
Maintenance and service
– CONTINUED –
Others
1) Filler plug
2) Drain plug
1) Filler hole
2) Drain hole
3) Oil level
Remove the plug from the filler hole and check the oil
level. The oil level should be kept even with the bottom
of the filler hole. If the oil level is below the bottom
edge of the hole, add oil through the filler hole to raise
the level.
Recommended grade and viscosity
Each oil manufacturer has its own base oils and addi-
tives. Never use different brands together.
2
1
HSB042BB
3
1
2
HSB043BB
11-36
Maintenance and service
Oil grade:
API classification GL-5
SAE viscosity No. and applicable temperature
Power steering fluid
Checking the fluid level
1) Reservoir tank
Be careful not to burn yourself because the flu-
id may be hot.
y When power steering fluid is being added,
-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40
-20 0 6020
80W
75W/90
80 10040
85W
90
HSB036BA
1
UBB030BB
11-37
Maintenance and service
– CONTINUED –
use only clean fluid, and be careful not to allow
any dirt into the tank. And never use different
brands together.
y Avoid spilling fluid when adding it in the tank.
The power steering fluid expands greatly as its tem-
perature rises; the fluid level differs according to fluid
temperature. Therefore, the reservoir tank has two dif-
ferent checking ranges for hot and cold fluids.
Check the power steering fluid level monthly.
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface, and stop the en-
gine.
1) Specified range
2. Check the fluid level of the reservoir tank.
When the fluid is hot after the vehicle has been run:
Check that the oil level is between “HOT MIN” and
“HOT MAX” on the surface of the reservoir tank.
When the fluid is cool before the vehicle is run: Check
that the oil level is between “COLD MIN” and “COLD
MAX” on the surface of the reservoir tank.
3. If the fluid level is lower than the applicable “MIN”
line, add the recommended fluid as necessary to bring
the level between the “MIN” and “MAX” line.
If the fluid level is extreme low, it may indicate possible
leakage. Consult your SUBARU dealer for an inspec-
tion.
Recommended fluid
“Dexron III” Type Automatic Transmission Fluid
1
1
HSB045BB
11-38
Maintenance and service
Brake fluid
Checking the fluid level
y Never let brake fluid contact your eyes be-
cause brake fluid can be harmful to your eyes.
If brake fluid gets in your eyes, immediately
flush them thoroughly with clean water. For
safety, when performing this work, wearing eye
protection is advisable.
y Brake fluid absorbs moisture from the air.
Any absorbed moisture can cause a dangerous
loss of braking performance.
y If the vehicle requires frequent refilling, there
may be a leak. If you suspect a problem, have
the vehicle checked at your SUBARU dealer.
y Never use different brands of brake fluid to-
gether.
y When adding brake fluid, be careful not to al-
low any dirt into the reservoir.
y Never splash the brake fluid over painted sur-
faces or rubber parts. Alcohol contained in the
brake fluid may damage them.
Check the fluid level monthly.
1) “MAX” level mark
2) “MIN” level mark
Check the fluid level on the outside of the reservoir. If
the level is below “MIN”, add the recommended brake
fluid to “MAX”.
Use only brake fluid from a sealed container.
MAX
MAX
MIN
MIN
1
2
UBB004GB
11-39
Maintenance and service
– CONTINUED –
Recommended brake fluid
FMVSS No. 116, fresh DOT 3 or 4 brake fluid
Clutch fluid (MT vehicles)
Checking the fluid level
Never let clutch fluid contact your eyes be-
cause clutch fluid can be harmful to your eyes.
If clutch fluid gets in your eyes, immediately
flush them thoroughly with clean water. For
safety, when performing this work, wearing eye
protection is advisable.
y Clutch fluid absorbs moisture from the air.
Any absorbed moisture can cause improper
clutch operation.
y If the vehicle requires frequent refilling, there
may be a leak. If you suspect a problem, have
the vehicle checked at your SUBARU dealer.
y Never use different brands of clutch fluid to-
gether.
y When clutch fluid is added, be careful not to
allow any dirt into the tank.
11-40
Maintenance and service
1) “MAX” level mark
2) “MIN” level mark
1) “MAX” level mark
2) “MIN” level mark
Check the fluid level on the outside of the reservoir. If
the level is below “MIN” level mark, add the recom-
mended clutch fluid to “MAX” level mark.
Use only clutch fluid from a sealed container.
Recommended clutch fluid
FMVSS No. 116, fresh DOT 3 or DOT 4 brake fluid
M
A
X
M
I
N
1
2
UBB004HB
2
1
UBB004LB
11-41
Maintenance and service
– CONTINUED –
Brake booster
If the brake booster does not operate as described be-
low, have it checked by your SUBARU dealer.
1. With the engine off, depress the brake pedal sever-
al times, applying the same pedal force each time. The
distance the pedal travels should not vary.
2. With the brake pedal depressed, start the engine.
The pedal should move slightly down to the floor.
3. With the brake pedal depressed, stop the engine
and keep the pedal depressed for 30 seconds. The
pedal height should not change.
4. Start the engine again and run for about one minute
then turn it off. Depress the brake pedal several times
to check the brake booster. Brake booster operates
properly if the pedal stroke decreases with each de-
pression.
Brake pedal
Check the brake pedal free play and reserve distance
according to the maintenance schedule in the “War-
ranty and Maintenance Booklet”.
Checking the brake pedal free play
1) 0.04 – 0.12 in (1.0 – 3.0 mm)
Stop the engine and firmly depress the brake pedal
several times. Lightly press the brake pedal down with
one finger to check the free play with a force of less
than 2 lbs (10 N, 1 kg).
If the free play is not within proper specification, con-
1
HSB049BB
11-42
Maintenance and service
tact your SUBARU dealer.
Checking the brake pedal reserve dis-
tance
1) More than 2.56 in (65 mm)
Depress the pedal with a force of approximately 66 lbs
(294 N, 30 kg) and measure the distance between the
upper surface of the pedal pad and the floor.
When the measurement is smaller than the specifica-
tion, or when the pedal does not operate smoothly,
contact with your SUBARU dealer.
Clutch pedal (Manual transmission
vehicles)
Check the clutch pedal free play and reserve distance
according to the maintenance schedule in the “War-
ranty and Maintenance Booklet”.
Checking the clutch function
Check the clutch engagement and disengagement.
1. With the engine idling, check that there are no ab-
normal noises when the clutch pedal is depressed,
and that shifting into 1st or reverse feels smooth.
2. Start the vehicle by releasing the pedal slowly to
check that the engine and transmission smoothly cou-
ple without any sign of slippage.
1
HSB050BB
11-43
Maintenance and service
– CONTINUED –
Checking the clutch pedal free play
1) 0.16 – 0.51 in (4.0 – 13.0 mm)
Lightly press the clutch pedal down with your finger
until you feel resistance, and check the free play.
If the free play is not within proper specification, con-
tact your SUBARU dealer.
Replacement of brake pad and lining
If you continue to drive despite the scraping
noise from the audible brake pad wear indica-
tor, it will result in the need for costly brake ro-
tor repair or replacement.
The right front disc brake and the right rear disc brake
have an audible wear indicators on the brake pads. If
the brake pads wear close to their service limit, the
wear indicator makes a very audible scraping noise
1
HSB049BB
HS7012BA
11-44
Maintenance and service
when the brake pedal is applied.
If you hear this scraping noise each time you apply the
brake pedal, have the brake pads serviced by your
SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
Breaking-in of new brake pads and lin-
ings
When replacing the brake pad or lining, use only gen-
uine SUBARU parts. After replacement, the new parts
must be broken in as follows:
T Brake pad and lining
While maintaining a speed of 30 to 40 mph (50 to 65
km/h), step on the brake pedal lightly. Repeat this five
or more times.
T Parking brake lining
A safe location and situation should be select-
ed for break-in driving.
Pulling the parking brake lever too forcefully
may cause the rear wheels to lock. To avoid
this, be certain to pull the lever up slowly and
gently.
1. Drive the vehicle at a speed of about 22 mph (35
km/h).
2. With the parking brake release button pushed in,
pull the parking brake lever SLOWLY and GENTLY.
(Pulling with a force of approximately 33 lbs [147 N, 15
kg].)
3. Drive the vehicle for about 220 yards (200 meters)
in this condition.
4. Wait 5 to 10 minutes for the parking brake to cool
down. Repeat this procedure.
5. Check the parking brake stroke. If the parking
brake stroke is out of the specified range, adjust it by
turning the adjusting nut located on the parking brake
lever.
Parking brake stroke:
7 – 8 notches / 44 lbs (196 N, 20 kg)
11-45
Maintenance and service
– CONTINUED –
Parking brake stroke
Check the parking brake stroke according to the main-
tenance schedule in the “Warranty and Maintenance
Booklet”. When the parking brake is properly adjusted,
braking power is fully applied by pulling the lever up
seven to eight notches gently but firmly (about 44 lbs
[196 N, 20 kg]). If the parking brake lever stroke is not
within the specified range, have the brake system
checked and adjusted at your SUBARU dealer.
Tires and wheels
Types of tires
You should be familiar with type of tires present on
your vehicle.
T All season tires
The factory-installed tires on your new vehicle are all
season tires.
All season tires are designed to provide an adequate
measure of traction, handling and braking perfor-
mance in year-round driving including snowy and icy
road conditions. However all season tires do not offer
as much traction performance as winter (snow) tires in
heavy or loose snow or on icy roads.
All season tires are identified by “ALL SEASON” and/
or “M+S” (Mud & Snow) on the tire sidewall.
T Summer tires
Summer tires are high-speed capability tires best suit-
ed for highway driving under dry conditions.
Summer tires are inadequate for driving on slippery
roads such as on snow-covered or icy roads.
If you drive your vehicle on snow-covered or icy roads,
we strongly recommend the use of winter (snow) tires.
When installing winter tires, be sure to replace all four
tires.
UG7509CA
11-46
Maintenance and service
T Winter (snow) tires
Winter tires are best suited for driving on snow-cov-
ered and icy roads. However winter tires do not per-
form as well as summer tires and all season tires on
roads other than snow-covered and icy roads.
Tire inspection
Check on a daily basis that the tires are free from se-
rious damage, nails, and stones. At the same time,
check the tires for abnormal wear.
Contact your SUBARU dealer immediately if you find
any problem.
NOTE
y When the wheels and tires strike curbs or are
subjected to harsh treatment as when the vehicle
is driven on a rough surface, they can suffer dam-
age that cannot be seen with the naked eye. This
type of damage does not become evident until
time has passed. Try not to drive over curbs, pot-
holes or on other rough surfaces. If doing so is un-
avoidable, keep the vehicle’s speed down to a
walking pace or less, and approach the curbs as
squarely as possible. Also, make sure the tires are
not pressed against the curb when you park the
vehicle.
y If you feel unusual vibration while driving or find
it difficult to steer the vehicle in a straight line, one
of the tires and/or wheels may be damaged. Drive
slowly to the nearest authorized SUBARU dealer
and have the vehicle inspected.
Tire pressures and wear
Maintaining the correct tire pressures helps to maxi-
mize the tires’ service lives and is essential for good
running performance. Check and, if necessary, adjust
the pressure of each tire (including the spare) at least
once a month and before any long journey.
Check the tire pressures when the tires are cold. Use
a pressure gauge to adjust the tire pressures to the
UB8053BA
11-47
Maintenance and service
– CONTINUED –
values shown on the tire placard. The tire placard is lo-
cated on the door pillar on the driver’s side.
Driving even a short distance warms up the tires and
increases the tire pressures. Also, the tire pressures
are affected by the outside temperature. It is best to
check tire pressure outdoors before driving the vehi-
cle.
When a tire becomes warm, the air inside it expands,
causing the tire pressure to increase. Be careful not to
mistakenly release air from a warm tire to reduce its
pressure.
NOTE
y The air pressure in a tire increases by approxi-
mately 4.3 psi (30 kPa, 0.3 kgf/cm
2
) when the tire
becomes warm.
y The tires are considered cold when the vehicle
has been parked for at least three hours or has
been driven less than one mile (1.6 km).
Do not let air out of warm tires to adjust pres-
sure. Doing so will result in low tire pressure.
Incorrect tire pressures detract from controllability and
ride comfort, and they cause the tires to wear abnor-
mally.
y Correct tire pressure (tread worn evenly)
Roadholding is good, and steering is responsive. Roll-
ing resistance is low, so fuel consumption is also low-
er.
HSB052AA
11-48
Maintenance and service
y Abnormally low tire pressure (tread worn at
shoulders)
Rolling resistance is high, so fuel consumption is also
higher.
y Abnormally high tire pressure (tread worn in cen-
ter)
Ride comfort is poor. Also, the tire magnifies the ef-
fects of road-surface bumps and dips, possibly result-
ing in vehicle damage.
Driving at high speeds with excessively low tire
pressures can cause the tires to deform severe-
ly and to rapidly become hot. A sharp increase
in temperature could cause tread separation,
and destruction of the tires. The resulting loss
HSB053AA HSB054AA
11-49
Maintenance and service
– CONTINUED –
of vehicle control could lead to an accident.
Wheel balance
Each wheel was correctly balanced when your vehicle
was new, but the wheels will become unbalanced as
the tires become worn during use. Wheel imbalance
causes the steering wheel to vibrate slightly at certain
vehicle speeds and detracts from the vehicle’s
straight-line stability. It can also cause steering and
suspension system problems and abnormal tire wear.
If you suspect that the wheels are not correctly bal-
anced, have them checked and adjusted by your
SUBARU dealer. Also have them adjusted after tire re-
pairs and after tire rotation.
NOTE
Loss of correct wheel alignment* causes the tires
to wear on one side and reduces the vehicle’s run-
ning stability. Contact your SUBARU dealer if you
notice abnormal tire wear.
*: The suspension system is designed to hold each wheel at
a certain alignment (relative to the other wheels and to the
road) for optimum straight-line stability and cornering perfor-
mance.
Wear indicators
A) New tread
B) Worn tread
1) Tread wear indicator
Each tire incorporates a tread wear indicator, which
becomes visible when the depth of the tread grooves
decreases to 0.063 in (1.6 mm). A tire must be re-
placed when the tread wear indicator appears as a
solid band across the tread.
When a tire’s tread wear indicator becomes vis-
A
1
B
HSB055BB
11-50
Maintenance and service
ible, the tire is worn beyond the acceptable limit
and must be replaced immediately. With a tire
in this condition, driving at high speeds in wet
weather can cause the vehicle to hydroplane.
The resulting loss of vehicle control can lead to
an accident.
NOTE
For safety, inspect the tire tread regularly and re-
place the tires before their tread wear indicators
become visible.
Tire rotation
Tire wear varies from wheel to wheel. To maximize the
life of each tire and ensure that the tires wear uniform-
ly, it is best to rotate the tires every 7,500 miles
(12,500 km). Rotating the tires involves switching the
front and rear tires on the right hand side of the vehicle
and similarly switching the front and rear tires on the
left hand side of the vehicle. (Each tire must be kept on
its original side of the vehicle.)
Replace any damaged or unevenly worn tire at the
time of rotation. After tire rotation, adjust the tire pres-
sures and make sure the wheel nuts are correctly
tightened.
After driving approximately 600 miles (1,000 km),
check the wheel nuts again and retighten any nut that
has become loose.
Tire replacement
The wheels and tires are important and integral parts
of your vehicle’s design; they cannot be changed arbi-
trarily. The tires fitted as standard equipment are opti-
mally matched to the characteristics of the vehicle and
were selected to give the best possible combination of
running performance, ride comfort, and service life. It
is essential for every tire to have a size and construc-
tion matching those shown on the tire placard and to
have a speed symbol and load index matching those
HSB056BA
11-51
Maintenance and service
– CONTINUED –
shown on the tire placard.
Using tires of a non-specified size detracts from con-
trollability, ride comfort, braking performance, speed-
ometer accuracy and odometer accuracy. It also cre-
ates incorrect body-to-tire clearances and inappropri-
ately changes the vehicle’s ground clearance.
All four tires must be the same in terms of manufactur-
er, brand (tread pattern), construction, and size. You
are advised to replace the tires with new ones that are
identical to those fitted as standard equipment.
For safe vehicle operation, SUBARU recommends re-
placing all four tires at the same time.
y All four tires must be the same in terms of
manufacturer, brand (tread pattern), construc-
tion, degree of wear, speed symbol, load index
and size. Mixing tires of different types, sizes or
degrees of wear can result in damage to the ve-
hicle’s power train. Use of different types or siz-
es of tires can also dangerously reduce control-
lability and braking performance and can lead
to an accident.
y Use only radial tires. Do not use radial tires
together with belted bias tires and/or bias-ply
tires. Doing so can dangerously reduce control-
lability, resulting in an accident.
Wheel replacement
When replacing wheels due, for example, to damage,
make sure the replacement wheels match the specifi-
cations of the wheels that are fitted as standard equip-
ment. Replacement wheels are available from
SUBARU dealers.
Use only those wheels that are specified for
your vehicle. Wheels not meeting specifica-
tions could interfere with brake caliper opera-
tion and may cause the tires to rub against the
wheel well housing during turns. The resulting
loss of vehicle control could lead to an acci-
dent.
11-52
Maintenance and service
Aluminum wheels
Aluminum wheels can be scratched and damaged
easily. Handle them carefully to maintain their appear-
ance, performance, and safety.
y When any of the wheels is removed and replaced
for tire rotation or to change a flat, always check the
tightness of the wheel nuts after driving approximately
600 miles (1,000 km). If any nut is loose, tighten it to
the specified torque.
y Never apply oil to the threaded parts, wheel nuts, or
tapered surface of the wheel.
y Never let the wheel rub against sharp protrusions or
curbs.
y Be sure to fit tire chains on uniformly and completely
around the tire, otherwise the chains may scratch the
wheel.
y When wheel nuts, balance weights, or the center
cap is replaced, be sure to replace them with genuine
SUBARU parts designed for aluminum wheels.
Windshield washer fluid
Never use engine coolant as washer fluid be-
cause it could cause paint damage.
Check the level of the washer fluid at each fuel stop. If
the level is low, fill the fluid up to the neck of the reser-
voir.
Use windshield washer fluid. If windshield washer fluid
is unavailable use clean water.
In areas where water freezes in winter, use an anti-
UBB004IA
11-53
Maintenance and service
– CONTINUED –
freeze type windshield washer fluid. SUBARU Wind-
shield Washer Fluid contains 58.5% methyl alcohol
and 41.5% surfactant, by volume. Its freezing temper-
ature varies according to how much it is diluted, as in-
dicated in the following table.
Replacement of windshield wiper
blades
Grease, wax, insects, or other materials on the wind-
shield or the wiper blade results in jerky wiper opera-
tion and streaking on the glass. If you cannot remove
the streaks after operating the windshield washer or if
the wiper operation is jerky, clean the outer surface of
the windshield (or rear window) and the wiper blades
using a sponge or soft cloth with a neutral detergent or
mild-abrasive cleaner. After cleaning, rinse the wind-
shield and wiper blades with clean water. The wind-
shield is clean if beads do not form when you rinse the
windshield with water.
Do not clean the wiper blades with gasoline or
a solvent, such as paint thinner or benzene.
This will cause deterioration of the wiper
blades.
If you cannot eliminate the streaking even after follow-
ing this method, replace the wiper blades using the fol-
lowing procedures:
1. Raise the wiper arm off the windshield.
Washer Fluid Concentration Freezing Temperature
30% 10.4°F (–12°C)
50% –4°F (–20°C)
100% –49°F (–45°C)
11-54
Maintenance and service
1) Stopper
2. Remove the wiper blade assembly by holding its
pivot area and pushing it in the direction shown by the
arrow while depressing the wiper blade stopper.
1) Metal support
3. Grasp the locked end of the blade rubber assembly
and pull it firmly until the stoppers on the rubber are
free of the metal support.
1
UGB133BB
1
HSB059BB
11-55
Maintenance and service
– CONTINUED –
1) Metal spines
4. If the new blade rubber is not provided with two
metal spines, remove the metal spines from the old
blade rubber and install them in the new blade rubber.
5. Align the claws of the metal support with the
grooves in the rubber and slide the blade rubber as-
sembly into the metal support until it locks.
1
HSB060BB HSB061BA
11-56
Maintenance and service
1) Stopper
6. Be sure to position the claws at the end of the metal
support between the stoppers on the rubber as shown.
If the rubber is not retained properly, the wiper blade
may scratch the windshield.
7. Install the wiper blade assembly to the wiper arm.
Make sure that it locks in place.
8. Lower the wiper arm slowly while holding it with
your hand.
Battery
y Before beginning work on or near any bat-
tery, be sure to extinguish all cigarettes, match-
es, and lighters. Never expose a battery to an
open flame or electric sparks. Batteries give off
a gas which is highly flammable and explosive.
y For safety, in case an explosion does occur,
wear eye protection or shield your eyes when
working near any battery. Never lean over a bat-
tery.
y Do not let battery fluid contact eyes, skin,
fabrics, or paint because battery fluid is a cor-
rosive acid. If battery fluid gets on your skin or
in your eyes, immediately flush the area with
water thoroughly. Seek medical help immedi-
ately if acid has entered the eyes.
If battery fluid is accidentally swallowed, imme-
diately drink a large amount of milk or water,
and seek medical attention immediately.
y To lessen the risk of sparks, remove rings,
metal watchbands, and other metal jewelry.
Never allow metal tools to contact the positive
battery terminal and anything connected to it
WHILE you are at the same time in contact with
1
HSB062BB
11-57
Maintenance and service
– CONTINUED –
any other metallic portion of the vehicle be-
cause a short circuit will result.
y Keep everyone including children away from
the battery.
y Charge the battery in a well-ventilated area.
y Battery posts terminals and related accesso-
ries contain lead and lead compounds, chemi-
cals known to the State of California to case
cancer and reproductive harm. Batteries also
contain other chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer. Wash hands after
handling.
It is unnecessary to periodically check the battery fluid
level or periodically refill with distilled water.
Never use more than 10 amperes when charg-
ing the battery because it will shorten battery
life.
Fuses
Never replace a fuse with one having a higher
rating or with material other than a fuse be-
cause serious damage or a fire could result.
The fuses are designed to melt during an overload to
prevent damage to the wiring harness and electrical
equipment. The fuses are located in two fuse boxes.
One is located under the instrument panel behind the
coin tray on the driver’s seat side.
UBB008DA
11-58
Maintenance and service
The other one is housed in the engine compartment.
1) Fuse puller
2) Spare fuses
The fuse puller and spare fuses are stored in the main
fuse box cover in the engine compartment.
HSB065BA
1
2
HSB066BB
11-59
Maintenance and service
– CONTINUED –
A) Good
B) Blown
If any lights, accessories or other electrical controls do
not operate, inspect the corresponding fuse. If a fuse
has blown, replace it.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK” position and
turn off all electrical accessories.
2. Remove the cover.
(For behind the coin tray: open the coin tray and pull it
horizontally to remove it.)
3. Determine which fuse may be blown. The back side
of each fuse box cover and the “Fuses and circuits”
section in chapter 12 in this manual show the circuit for
each fuse.
1) Fuse puller
4. Pull out the fuse with the fuse puller.
5. Inspect the fuse. If it has blown, replace it with a
spare fuse of the same rating.
6. If the same fuse blows again, this indicates that its
system has a problem. Contact your SUBARU dealer
for repairs.
AB
HSB067BB
1
HSB068BB
11-60
Maintenance and service
Main fuse
Main fuse box
The main fuses are designed to melt during an over-
load to prevent damage to the wiring harness and
electrical equipment. Check the main fuses if any elec-
trical component fails to operate (except the starter
motor) and other fuses are good. A melted main fuse
must be replaced. Use only replacements with the
same specified rating as the melted main fuse. If a
main fuse blows after it is replaced, have the electrical
system checked by your nearest SUBARU dealer.
Installation of accessories
Always consult your SUBARU dealer before installing
fog lights or any other electrical equipment in your ve-
hicle. Such accessories may cause the electronic sys-
tem to malfunction if they are incorrectly installed or if
they are not suited for the vehicle.
UB8003CA
11-61
Maintenance and service
– CONTINUED –
Replacing bulbs
76
1423
5
UBF047CB
11-62
Maintenance and service
Wattage Bulb No.
1) Headlight
BAJA-S 12V-65/
55W
9007
(HB5)
BAJA, BAJA-B
Low beam 12V-55W H1
High beam 12V-60W 9005
(HB3)
2) Front turn signal 12V-27W 1156NA
(Amber)
3) Map light 12V-8W –
4) Dome light 12V-8W –
5) Door step light 12V-3.4W –
6) Front turn signal light/
parking and front side
marker light
12V-27/
8W
1157NA
(Amber)
7) Front fog light 12V-51W 9006
(HB4)
11-63
Maintenance and service
– CONTINUED –
14
1213
891011
UBB100BB
11-64
Maintenance and service
Headlight
Halogen headlight bulbs become very hot while
in use. If you touch the bulb surface with bare
hands or greasy gloves, finger prints or grease
on the bulb surface will develop into hot spots
and cause the bulb to break. If there are finger
prints or grease on the bulb surface, wipe them
away with a soft cloth moistened with alcohol.
NOTE
If headlight aiming is required, consult your
SUBARU dealer for proper adjustment of the head-
light aim.
Wattage Bulb No.
8) License plate light 12V-5W 168
9) Cargo light 12V-13W 912
10) High mount stop light 12V-13W 912
11) Backup light 12V-21W 7440
12) Brake rear turn signal/
tail light
12V-21/
5W
7443
13) Tail light 12V-5W 168
14) Sports activity lights 12V-55W H3
11-65
Maintenance and service
– CONTINUED –
T BAJA-Sport
1) Electrical connector
2) Push
1. Disconnect the electrical connector while pressing
the lock release tab.
2. Remove the bulb holder from the headlight assem-
bly by turning it counterclockwise.
3. Remove the bulb from the headlight assembly.
4. Install the new bulb.
5. Install the bulb holder in the headlight assembly by
turning it clockwise until it locks.
6. Remove the electrical connector.
1
2
UBB045BB
UBB046BA
11-66
Maintenance and service
T BAJA, BAJA-Turbo
1) Low beam light bulb
2) High beam light bulb
Remove the headlight bulb cover, by turning it coun-
terclockwise.
UBB039BA
1
2
UBB040BB
11-67
Maintenance and service
– CONTINUED –
T Low beam light bulbs
0
1) Electrical connector
2) Red cable
3) Black cable
1. Disconnect the electrical connector for the black
cable.
2. Remove the retainer spring.
3. Replace the bulb, then set the retainer spring se-
curely.
4. Reconnect the electrical connector for black cable.
5. Install the headlight bulb cover.
1
2
3
UBB041BB
UBB042BA
11-68
Maintenance and service
T High beam light bulbs
0
1) Push
1. Disconnect the electrical connector from the bulb.
2. Remove the bulb from the headlight assembly by
turning it counterclockwise.
3. Replace the bulb with new one.
4. Reconnect the electrical connector. At this time,
use care not to touch the bulb surface.
5. To install the bulb to the headlight assembly, turn it
clockwise until it clicks.
6. Install the headlight bulb cover.
Front fog light
It may be difficult to replace the bulbs. Have your
UBB043BA
1
UBB044BB
11-69
Maintenance and service
– CONTINUED –
SUBARU dealer replace the bulbs if necessary.
Front turn signal light, parking light
and side marker light
The headlight assembly must be removed before the
front turn signal light and parking light bulbs can be re-
placed. When the headlight assembly has been re-
moved and then reinstalled, it may become necessary
to make a headlight aiming adjustment. After a bulb
has been replaced, it is recommended that the head-
light aiming adjustment be made at a SUBARU dealer.
1. Remove the headlight assembly mounting screws
located at the top of and the front of the headlight as-
sembly using a Phillips screwdriver or an open-end
wrench.
2. Move the headlight assembly forward.
1) Front turn signal light bulb
2) Front turn signal light bulb/parking and front side
marker light bulb
3. Remove the bulb socket from the headlight assem-
bly by turning it counterclockwise.
UBB016BA
1
2
UBB039CB
11-70
Maintenance and service
4. Remove the bulb from the socket by pushing it and
turning counterclockwise. Install a new bulb in the
socket.
5. Set the bulb socket into the headlight assembly and
turn it clockwise until it locks.
6. Set the headlight assembly into the vehicle body.
Tighten the mounting screws.
Rear combination lights
Rear combination lights are composed of the rear turn
signal/brake/tail light and back up lights.
T Rear turn signal/Brake/Tail and Back up lights
The rear turn signal/brake/tail light is one bulb with two
filament types.
If any one of them malfunctions, replace the bulb with
a new one.
1. Open the tailgate.
2. Pry the cover from the side of the rear combination
light.
UBB020BA
UBB083BA
11-71
Maintenance and service
– CONTINUED –
3. Remove the rear combination light mounting bolts.
Then, slide the rear combination light assembly to the
rear and remove it from the vehicle.
1) Back up light bulb
2) Brake/turn/tail/light bulb
4. Remove the bulb socket from the rear combination
light assembly by turning it counterclockwise.
5. Remove the bulb from the socket by pulling it.
6. Install a new bulb into the socket by pushing it.
7. Set the bulb socket into the rear combination light
assembly and turn it clockwise until it stops.
8. Mount the rear combination light assembly into the
vehicle body with two mounting bolts.
9. Install the cover by inserting the knobs into the
places.
UBB084BA
2
1
UBB085BB
11-72
Maintenance and service
Tail light (on the tailgate)
1. Open the tailgate.
2. Remove the tailgate trim by loosening the installa-
tion screws.
3. Remove the tail light cover by loosening the instal-
lation screws.
UBB086BA
UBB087BA
11-73
Maintenance and service
– CONTINUED –
4. Remove the bulb socket from the tail light by turn-
ing it counterclockwise.
5. Remove the bulb from the socket by pulling it.
6. Install a new bulb into the socket by pushing it.
7. Install the bulb socket into the tail light by turning it
clockwise until it stops.
8. Install the tail light cover and the tailgate trim.
UBB088BA UBB048BA
11-74
Maintenance and service
License plate light
0
1. Push two release buttons and pull the license plate
bracket up until it clicks.
2. Remove the two cover installation screws.
3. Push the license plate bracket back to the original
position.
UBB096BA
UBB097BA
11-75
Maintenance and service
– CONTINUED –
4. Remove the screw from the side of the cover.
5. Remove the cover.
6. Remove the bulb socket from the license plate
bracket by turning it counterclockwise.
7. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
8. Install a new bulb in the socket by pushing it.
9. Install the bulb socket into the license plate bracket.
10.Install the covers by reversing procedures for re-
moval.
UBB092BA UBB093BA
11-76
Maintenance and service
Map light, dome light and door step
light
Map light
Dome light
UBB068BA
HSB088BA
11-77
Maintenance and service
– CONTINUED –
Door step light
1. Remove the lens by prying the edge of the lens with
a flat-head screwdriver.
2. Pull the bulb out of the socket. Install a new bulb.
3. Reinstall the lens.
High mount stop and cargo light as-
sembly
1. Remove the high mount stop light mounting
screws.
UBS037AA
UBB089BA
11-78
Maintenance and service
1) Cargo lights
2) High mount stop lights
2. Remove the bulb socket from the light assembly by
turning it counterclockwise.
3. Remove the bulb from the socket by pulling it.
4. Install a new bulb in the socket by pushing it.
5. Set the socket into the light assembly and turn it
clockwise until it clicks.
6. Mount the light assembly with the mounting
screws.
1
2
UBB090BB UBB048BA
11-79
Maintenance and service
– CONTINUED –
Sport activity lights (if equipped)
1. Remove front lamp screw and remove the lens and
reflector.
2. Disconnect the two wires from the lamp electrical
connector.
3. Squeeze the bulb retainer spring to remove.
4. Replace the bulb, then reset the retainer spring se-
curely.
5. Reconnect the bulb wire to the electrical connector.
6. Install the lens and reflector in the housing and se-
cure with the screw.
NOTE
Other bulbs may be difficult to replace. Have your
SUBARU dealer replace these bulbs if necessary.
UBB081BA
UBB082BA
12-1
12
Specifications
Specifications ................................................ 12-2
Dimensions ....................................................... 12-2
Engine ................................................................ 12-2
Electrical system .............................................. 12-3
Capacities .......................................................... 12-3
Tires ................................................................... 12-4
Wheel alignment ............................................... 12-4
Fuses and circuits ........................................ 12-5
Fuse panel located behind the coin tray ........ 12-5
Fuse panel located in the engine
compartment .................................................. 12-6
Bulb chart ...................................................... 12-8
Vehicle identification .................................... 12-9
12-2
Specifications
Specifications
Specifications
These specifications are subject to change without notice.
Dimensions
in (mm)
Engine
Model BAJA, BAJA-Sport BAJA-Turbo
Overall length 199.3 (4,910)
Overall width 70.1 (1,780)
Overall height 62.1 (1,760) 62.6 (1,775)
Wheelbase 104.3 (2,650)
Tread Front 57.7 (1,465)
Rear 57.7 (1,465)
Ground clearance 8.4 (213)
Item Non-turbo Turbo
Engine model EJ251 EJ255
Engine type Horizontally opposed, liquid cooled 4 cylinder, 4 stroke gasoline engine
Displacement cc (cu-in) 2,457 (150)
Bore × Stroke in (mm) 3.92 × 3.11 (99.5 × 79.0)
Compression ratio 10.0 : 1 8.2 : 1
Firing order 1 - 3 - 2 - 4
12-3
Specifications
– CONTINUED –
Electrical system
Capacities
Battery type and capacity (5HR) MT 55D23L (12-48AH)
AT 75D23L (12-52AH)
Alternator 12V-90A
Spark plugs Non-turbo RC10YC4 (Champion)
BKR6E-11 (NGK)
BKR5E-11 (NGK)
Turbo ILFR6B (NGK)
Fuel tank 16.9 US gal (64 liters, 14.1 Imp gal)
Engine oil 4.2 US qt (4.0 liters, 3.5 Imp qt)
Transmission oil (MT) 3.7 US qt (3.5 liters, 3.1 Imp qt)
Transmission fluid (AT) 9.8 US qt (9.3 liters, 8.2 Imp qt)
AT differential gear oil 1.3 US qt (1.2 liters, 1.1 Imp qt)
Rear differential gear oil 0.8 US qt (0.8 liters, 0.7 Imp qt)
Power steering gear fluid 0.7 US qt (0.7 liters, 0.6 Imp qt)
Engine coolant Non-turbo MT 7.2 US qt (6.8 liters, 6.0 Imp qt)
AT 7.1 US qt (6.7 liters, 5.9 Imp qt)
Turbo MT 8.1 US qt (7.7 liters, 6.8 Imp qt)
AT 8.0 US qt (7.6 liters, 6.7 Imp qt)
12-4
Specifications
Tires
Wheel alignment
Type Steel belted radial, Tubeless
Tire size P225/60R16 97H
Wheel size 16 × 6
1
/
2
JJ
Pressure Front 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm
2
)
Rear 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm
2
)
Temporary spare tire Size T145/80R16
Pressure 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm
2
)
Toe Front 0 in (0 mm)
Rear 0 in (0 mm)
Camber Front 0°40’
Rear –0°05’
12-5
Specifications
– CONTINUED –
Fuses and circuits
Fuse panel located behind the coin
tray
19
18
17
16
20
15
14
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
13
UBC001BB
Fuse panel Fuse rating Circuit
1 15A y Heater fan
2 15A y Heater fan
3 15A y Power door lock
y Keyless entry
4 20A y Mirror heater
y Cigarette lighter
y Remote controlled rear
view mirrors
5 10A y Tail light
y Parking light
6 15A y SRS airbag
7 15A y Front fog light
8 30A y ABS solenoid
9 15A y Radio
y Clock
10 15A y Trailer
11 15A y Engine ignition system
y SRS airbag
12-6
Specifications
Fuse panel located in the engine com-
partment
A) FWD socket
B) Main fuse
12 10A y Illumination brightness
control
13 15A y Fuel pump
14 10A y Rear window wiper and
washer
15 30A y Windshield wiper and
washer
16 20A y Brake light
17 15A y Air conditioner
18 15A y Backup light
y Cruise control
y ABS control
19 20A y Wiper deicer
y Sports activity light
y Cargo lamp
20 20A y Accessory power outlet
y Seat heater
Fuse panel Fuse rating Circuit
A
B
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
UBC003BB
12-7
Specifications
– CONTINUED –
Fuse panel Fuse rating Circuit
1 20A y Radiator cooling fan
(Main)
2 20A y Radiator cooling fan
(Sub)
3 30A y ABS motor
4 20A y Rear window defogger
5 15A y Hazard warning flasher
y Horn
6 15A y Meter
y SRS airbag system
warning light
7 10A y Automatic transmis-
sion control unit
y ABS UNIT
8 10A y Alternator
9 15A y Headlight (right side)
10 15A y Headlight (left side)
11 20A y Lighting switch
12 15A y Clock
y Interior light
Fuse panel Fuse rating Circuit
12-8
Specifications
Bulb chart
Description Wattage Bulb No.
Headlight
S models 12V-65/55W 9007 (HB5)
Except S models
Low beam 12V-55W H1
High beam 12V-60W 9005 (HB3)
Front turn signal 12V-27W 1156NA
(Amber)
Spot light 12V-8W –
Dome light 12V-8W –
Door step light 12V-3.4W –
Parking and front
side marker light
12V-27/8W 1157NA
(Amber)
Front fog light 12V-51W 9006 (HB4)
Backup light 12V-21W 7440
High mount stop light 12V-13W 912
Brake·Rear turn sig-
nal light/Tail light
12V-21/5W 7443
Rear finisher light 12V-5W 168
License plate light 12V-5W 168
Cargo light 12V-13W 912
Sports activity light 12V-55W H3
12-9
Specifications
– CONTINUED –
Vehicle identification
2
1
7
6
5
4
3
UBC010BB
1) Emission control label
2) Vehicle identification number
3) Radio noise label (Canada mod-
el)
4) Tire inflation pressure label
5) Certification and bar code label
6) Vehicle identification number
plate
7) Model number plate
13-1
13
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
Tire information ............................................. 13-2
Tire labeling ....................................................... 13-2
Recommended tire inflation pressure ............ 13-5
Glossary of tire terminology ............................ 13-6
Tire care – maintenance and safety
practices ......................................................... 13-8
Vehicle load limit – how to determine ............. 13-8
Determining compatibility of tire and vehicle
load capacities ............................................... 13-13
Adverse safety consequences of overloading
on handling and stopping and on tires ........ 13-13
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit ..... 13-13
Uniform tire quality grading standards ....... 13-14
Treadwear .......................................................... 13-14
Traction AA, A, B, C .......................................... 13-15
Temperature A, B, C ......................................... 13-15
Reporting safety defects (USA) ................... 13-16
13-2
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
Consumer inf ormation and R eporting saf ety defects
For U.S.A.
The following information has been compiled accord-
ing to Code of Federal Regulations “Title 49, Part
575”.
Tire information
Tire labeling
Many markings (e.g. Tire size, Tire Identification
Number or TIN) are placed on the sidewall of a
tire by tire manufacturers. These marking can
provide you with useful information on the tire.
T Tire size
Your vehicle comes equipped with P-Metric tire
size. It is important to understand the sizing sys-
tem in selecting the proper tire for your vehicles.
Here is a brief review of the tire sizing system
with a breakdown of its individual elements.
V P Metric
With the P-Metric system, Section Width is mea-
sured in millimeters. To convert millimeters into
inches, divide by 25.4. The Aspect Ratio (Sec-
tion Height divided by Section Width) helps pro-
vide more dimensional information about the tire
size.
Example:
(1) P = Certain tire type used on light duty vehi-
cles such as passenger cars
(2) Section Width in millimeters
(3) Aspect Ratio (= section height ÷ section
width).
(4) R = Radial Construction
(5) Rim diameter in inches
V Load and Speed Rating Descriptions
The load and speed rating descriptions will ap-
pear following the size designation.
They provide two important facts about the tire.
First, the number designation is its load index.
Second, the letter designation indicates the tire’s
speed rating.
P 225 / 60 R 16
(1)
(2)
(3) (4) (5)
13-3
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
– CONTINUED –
Example:
(6) Load Index: A numerical code which speci-
fies the maximum load a tire can carry at the
speed indicated by its speed symbol, at maxi-
mum inflation pressure.
For example, “97” means 1,609 lbs (730 kg)
Load indices apply only to the tire, not to
the vehicle. Putting a load rated tire on any
vehicle does not mean the vehicle can be
loaded up to the tire’s rated load.
(7) Speed Rating: An alphabetical system de-
scribing a tire’s capability to travel at established
and predetermined speeds.
For example, “H” means 130 mph (210 km/h)
y Speed ratings apply only to the tire, not
to the vehicle. Putting a speed rated tire on
any vehicle does not mean the vehicle can
be operated at the tire’s rated speed.
y The speed rating is void if the tires are
worn out, damaged, repaired, retreaded, or
otherwise altered from their original condi-
tion. If tires are repaired, retreaded, or oth-
erwise altered, they may not be suitable for
original equipment tire designed loads and
speeds.
T Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Tire Identification Number (TIN) is marked on the
intended outboard sidewall. The TIN is com-
posed of four groups. Here is a brief review of the
TIN with a breakdown of its individual elements.
(1) Manufacturer’s Identification Mark
P 225 / 60 R 16 97 H
Size designation
(6) (7)
DOT XX XX XXX XXXX
(1) (2)
(3)
(4)
13-4
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
(2) Tire Size
(3) Tire Type Code
(4) Date of Manufacture
The first two figures identify the week, starting
with “01” to represent the first full week of the cal-
endar year; the second two figures represent the
year. For example, 0101 means the 1st week of
2001.
T Other markings
The following makings are also placed on the
sidewall.
V Maximum permissible inflation pressure
The maximum cold inflation pressure to which
this tire may be inflated. For example, “300 kpa
(44 PSI) MAX. PRESS”
V Maximum load rating
The load rating at the maximum permissible
weight load for this tire. For example, “MAX.
LOAD 730 kg (1609 LBS) @ 300 kpa (44 PSI)
MAX. PRESS.”
Maximum load rating applies only to the
tire, not to the vehicle. Putting a load rated
tire on any vehicle does not mean the vehi-
cle can be loaded up to the tire’s rated
load.
V Construction type
Applicable construction of this tire.
For example, “TUBELESS STEEL BELTED RA-
DIAL”
V Construction
The generic name of each cord material used in
the plies (both sidewall and tread area) of this
tire.
For example, “PLIES: TREAD 2 STEEL + 2
POLYESTER + 1 NYLON SIDEWALL 2 POLY-
ESTER”
V Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)
For details, refer to “Uniform tire quality grading
standards” in this chapter.
13-5
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
– CONTINUED –
Recommended tire inflation pressure
T Recommended cold tire inflation pressure
Recommended cold tire inflation pressure for
your vehicle’s tires is as follows,
T Vehicle placard
The vehicle placard is affixed to the driver’s side
B-pillar.
Tire size P225/60 R16 97H
Wheel size 16 × 6 1/2JJ
Pressure Front 33 psi (230 kPa,
2.3 kgf/cm
2
)
Rear 33 psi (230 kPa,
2.3 kgf/cm
2
)
Temporary
spare tire
Size T145/80R16
Pres-
sure
60 psi (420 kPa,
4.2 kgf/cm
2
)
UB8053BA
13-6
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
Example:
The vehicle placard shows original tire size, rec-
ommended cold tire inflation pressure on each
tire at maximum loaded vehicle weight, seating
capacity and loading information.
T Adverse safety consequences of under-in-
flation
Driving at high speeds with excessively low tire
pressures can cause the tires to flex severely
and to rapidly become hot. A sharp increase in
temperature could cause tread separation, and
failure of the tire(s). Possible resulting loss of ve-
hicle control could lead to an accident.
T Measuring and adjusting air pressure to
achieve proper inflation
Check and, if necessary, adjust the pressure of
each tire (including the spare) at least once a
month and before any long journey. Check the
tire pressures when the tires are cold. Use a
pressure gauge to adjust the tire pressures to the
specific values. Driving even a short distance
warms up the tires and increases the tire pres-
sures. Also, the tire pressures are affected by the
outside temperature. It is best to check tire pres-
sure outdoors before driving the vehicle. When a
tire becomes warm, the air inside it expands,
causing the tire pressure to increase. Be careful
not to mistakenly release air from a warm tire to
reduce its pressure.
Glossary of tire terminology
y Cold tire pressure
The pressure in a tire that has been driven less
than 1 mile or has been standing for three hours
or more.
y Maximum inflation pressure
TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION
SEE OWNER’S
MANUAL FOR
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
SEATING CAPACITY
ORIGINAL TIRE SIZE
COLD TIRE INFLATION PRESSURE
COLD TIRE INFLATION PRESSURE
FRONT
REAR
230 kPa,33 PSI
230 kPa,33 PSI
420 kPa,60 PSI
COMPACT SPARE TIRE
T145/80R16
P225/60R16
The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 363kg or 800 lbs.
TOTAL 4 FRONT 2 REAR 2
UBD004AA
13-7
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
– CONTINUED –
The maximum cold inflation pressure to which a
tire may be inflated.
y Recommended inflation pressure
The cold inflation pressure recommended by a
vehicle manufacturer.
y Intended outboard sidewall
1)The sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears
white lettering or bears manufacturer, brand,
and/or model name molding that is higher or
deeper than the same molding on the other
sidewall of the tire, or
2)The outward facing sidewall of an asymmet-
rical tire that has a particular side that must al-
ways face outward when mounting on a vehi-
cle.
y Accessory weight
The combined weight (in excess of those stan-
dard items which may be replaced) of floor mats,
leather seats, cross bars and cargo bed extender
to the extent that these items are available as
factory-installed equipment (whether installed or
not).
y Curb weight
The weight of a motor vehicle with standard
equipment including the maximum capacity of fu-
el, oil, and coolant and air conditioning.
y Maximum loaded vehicle weight
The sum of curb weight, accessory weight, vehi-
cle capacity weight and production options
weight.
y Normal occupant weight
150 lbs (68 kg) times the number of occupants (2
occupants).
y Occupant distribution
Distribution of occupants in a vehicle, 2 in front.
y Production options weight
The combined weight of those installed regular
production options weighing over 5.1 lbs (2.3 kg)
in excess of those standards items which they
replace, not previously considered in curb weight
or accessory weight.
y Vehicle capacity weight
The total weight of cargo, luggage and occu-
pants that can be added to the vehicle.
y Vehicle maximum load on a tire
Load on an individual tire that is determined by
distributing to each axle its share of the maxi-
mum loaded vehicle weight and dividing by two.
y Vehicle normal load on a tire
Load on an individual tire that is determined by
13-8
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
distributing to each axle its share of the curb
weight, accessory weight, and normal occupant
weight and dividing by two.
Tire care – maintenance and safety
practices
y Check on a daily basis that the tires are free
from serious damage, nails, and stones. At the
same time, check the tires for abnormal wear.
y Inspect the tire tread regularly and replace the
tires before their tread wear indicators become
visible. When a tire’s tread wear indicator be-
comes visible, the tire is worn beyond the ac-
ceptable limit and must be replaced immediately.
With a tire in this condition, driving at even low
speeds in wet weather can cause the vehicle to
hydroplane. Possible resulting loss of vehicle
control can lead to an accident.
y To maximize the life of each tire and ensure
that the tires wear uniformly, it is best to rotate
the tires every 7,500 miles (12,500 km). Rotating
the tires involves switching the front and rear
tires on the right hand side of the vehicle and
similarly switching the front and rear tires on the
left hand side of the vehicle. (Each tire must be
kept on its original side of the vehicle.) Replace
any damaged or unevenly worn tire at the time of
rotation. After tire rotation, adjust the tire pres-
sures and make sure the wheel nuts are correct-
ly tightened. A tightening torque specification
and a tightening sequence specification for the
wheel nuts can be found “Flat tires” in Chapter 9.
Vehicle load limit – how to determine
The load capacity of your vehicle is determined
by weight, not by available cargo space. The
load limit of your vehicle is shown on the vehicle
placard attached to the driver’s side B-pillar. Lo-
cate the statement “The combined weight of oc-
cupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg
or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s placard.
The vehicle placard also shows seating capacity
of your vehicle.
The total load capacity includes the total weight
of driver and all passengers and their belong-
ings, any cargo, any optional equipment such as
a trailer hitch, roof rack or bike carrier, etc., and
the tongue load of a trailer. Therefore cargo ca-
13-9
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
– CONTINUED –
pacity can be calculated by the following method.
Cargo capacity = Load limit – (total weight of oc-
cupants + total weight of optional equipment +
tongue load of a trailer (if applicable))
For towing capacity information and weight lim-
its, refer to “Trailer towing” in Chapter 8.
T Calculating total and load capacities vary-
ing seating configurations
Calculate the available load capacity as shown in
the following examples:
Example 1A
Vehicle capacity weight of the vehicle is 800 lbs
(363 kg), which is indicated on the vehicle plac-
ard with the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 363
kg or 800 lbs”.
For example, if the vehicle has one occupant
weighing 154 lbs (70 kg) plus cargo weighing
551 lbs (250 kg).
1. Calculate the total weight.
2. Calculate the available load capacity by sub-
tracting the total weight from the vehicle capacity
weight of 800 lbs (363 kg).
UBD005BA
Total weight
= 154 lbs (70 kg) + 551 lbs (250 kg)
= 705 lbs (320 kg)
(Occupant) (Cargo)
13-10
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
3. The result of step 2 shows that a further 95 lbs
(43 kg) of cargo can be carried.
Example 1B
For example, if a person weighing 176 lbs (80
kg) now enters the same vehicle (bringing the
number of occupants to two), the calculations
are as follows:
1. Calculate the total weight.
2. Calculate the available load capacity.
3. The total weight now exceeds the capacity
weight by 81 lbs (37 kg), so the cargo weight
must be reduced by 81 lbs (37 kg) or more.
Available Load Capacity
= 800 lbs (363 kg) – 705 lbs (320 kg)
= 95 lbs (43 kg)
(Vehicle
capacity weight)
(Total weight)
UB8055BA
Total weight
= 154 lbs (70 kg) + 176 lbs (80 kg)
+ 551 lbs (250 kg)
= 881 lbs (400 kg)
(Occupant)
(Cargo)
A
vailable Load Capacity
= 800 lbs (363 kg) 881 lbs (400 kg)
= 81 lbs ( 37 kg)
(Vehicle
capacity weight)
(Total weight)
13-11
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
– CONTINUED –
Example 2A
Vehicle capacity weight of the vehicle is 800 lbs
(363 kg), which is indicated on the vehicle plac-
ard with the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 363
kg or 800 lbs”.
For example, the vehicle has one occupant
weighing 165 lbs (75 kg) plus cargo weighing
265 lbs (120 kg). In addition, the vehicle is fitted
with a trailer hitch weighing 22 lbs (10 kg), to
which is attached a trailer weighing 1,764 lbs
(800kg). 10% of the trailer weight is applied to
the trailer tongue (i.e. Tongue load = 176 lbs (80
kg)).
1. Calculate the total weight.
2. Calculate the available load capacity.
3. The result of step 2 shows that a further 172
lbs (78 kg) of cargo can be carried.
UBD006BA
Total weight
= 165 lbs (75 kg) + 265 lbs (120 kg)
+ 22 lbs (10 kg) + 176 lbs (80 kg)
= 628 lbs (285 kg)
(Occupant) (Cargo)
(Trailer hitch)
(Tongue load)
Available Load Capacity
= 800 lbs (363 kg) – 628 lbs (285 kg)
= 172 lbs (78 kg)
(Vehicle
capacity weight)
(Total weight)
13-12
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
Example 2B
For example, if a person weighing 143 lbs (65
kg) and a child weighing 40 lbs (18 kg) now enter
the same vehicle (bringing the number of occu-
pants to three), and a child restraint system
weighing 11 lbs (5 kg) is installed in the vehicle
for the child to use, the calculations are as fol-
lows:
1. Calculate the total weight.
2. Calculate the available load capacity.
3. The total weight now exceeds the capacity
weight by 22 lbs (10 kg), so the cargo weight
must be reduced by 22 lbs (10 kg) or more.
UBD007BA
Total weight
= 165 lbs (75 kg) + 143 lbs (65 kg) + 40 lbs (18 kg)
+ 11 lbs (5 kg) + 265 lbs (120 kg)
+ 22 lbs (10 kg) + 176 lbs (80 kg)
= 822 lbs (373 kg)
(Occupant)
(Cargo)
(Trailer hitch)
(Child restraint)
(Tongue load)
A
vailable Load Capacity
=
800 lbs (363 kg) 822 lbs (373 kg)
=
22 lbs ( 10 kg)
(Vehicle
capacity weight)
(Total weight)
13-13
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
– CONTINUED –
Determining compatibility of tire and
vehicle load capacities
The sum of four tires’ maximum load ratings
must exceed the maximum loaded vehicle
weight (“GVWR”). In addition, sum of the maxi-
mum load ratings of two front tires and of two
rear tires must exceed each axle’s maximum
loaded capacity (“GAWR”). Original equipment
tires are designed to fulfill those conditions.
The maximum loaded vehicle weight is referred
to Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). And
each axle’s maximum loaded capacity is referred
to Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). The
GVWR and each axle’s GAWR are shown on the
vehicle certification label affixed to the driver’s
door.
The GVWR and front and rear GAWRs are de-
termined by not only the maximum load rating of
tires but also loaded capacities of the vehicle’s
suspension, axles and other body parts.
Therefore, this means that the vehicle cannot
necessarily be loaded up to the tire’s maximum
load rating on the tire sidewall.
Adverse safety consequences of over-
loading on handling and stopping and
on tires
Overloading could affect vehicle handling, stop-
ping distance, vehicle and tire as shown below.
This could lead to an accident and possibly result
in severe personal injury.
y Vehicle stability will deteriorate.
y Heavy and/or high-mounted loads could in-
crease the risk of rollover.
y Stopping distance will increase.
y Brakes could overheat and fail.
y Suspension, bearings, axles and other body
parts could break or experience accelerated
wear that will shorten vehicle life.
y Tires could fail.
y Tread separation could occur.
y Tire could separate from its rim.
Steps for Determining Correct Load
Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight
of occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX pounds” on your vehicle’s placard.
13-14
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver
and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX
pounds.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For
example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs
(635 kg). and there will be five- 150 lb (68 kg)
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of avail-
able cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1,400 – 750 (5 × 150) = 650 lbs.)
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available car-
go and luggage load capacity calculated in Step
4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load
from your trailer will be transferred to your vehi-
cle. Consult this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and luggage load
capacity of your vehicle.
Uniform tire quality grading stan-
dards
This information indicates the relative perfor-
mance of passenger car tires in the area of
treadwear, traction, and temperature resistance.
This is to aid the consumer in making an in-
formed choice in the purchase of tires.
Quality grades can be found where applicable on
the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
The quality grades apply to new pneumatic tires
for use on passenger cars. However, they do not
apply to deep tread, winter type snow tires,
space-saver or temporary use spare tires, tires
with nominal rim diameters of 12 inches or less,
or to some limited production tires.
All passenger car tires must confirm to Federal
Safety Requirements in addition to these grades.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
13-15
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
– CONTINUED –
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified gov-
ernment test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one
and one-half (1-1/2) times as well on the govern-
ment course as a tire graded 100. The relative
performance of tires depends upon the actual
conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in
driving habits, service practices and differences
in road characteristics and climate.
Traction AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent the
tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as mea-
sured under controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and con-
crete. A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
Temperature A, B, C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,
and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the material of the
tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and exces-
sive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of perfor-
mance which all passenger car tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-
dards No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher
levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel than the minimum required by law.
The temperature grade for this tire is es-
tablished for a tire that is properly inflated
13-16
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
and not overloaded. Excessive speed, un-
derinflation, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
Reporting safety defects (USA)
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause in-
jury or death, you should immediately inform
the National Highway Traffic Safety Admin-
istration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying
Subaru of America, Inc.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a
safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your
dealer, or Subaru of America, Inc. To con-
tact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393
(or 366-0123 in the Washington D.C. area)
or write to: NHTSA, U.S. Department of
Transportation, Washington, D.C. 20590.
You can also obtain other information about
motor vehicle safety from the Hotline.
14-2
Index
A
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) ........................... 7-33
Warning light ................................................. 3-12
Accessories .............................................. 5-4, 11-60
Air cleaner element ......................................... 11-23
Air conditioner operation ................................... 4-10
Air filtration system ............................................ 4-13
All-Wheel Drive warning light ............................ 3-14
Aluminum wheels ............................................ 11-52
Antenna system .................................................. 5-2
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ........................... 7-33
Ashtray .............................................................. 6-12
AT OIL TEMPerature warning light ................... 3-12
Audio set ............................................................. 5-4
Auto-dimming mirror/compass .......................... 3-29
Automatic transmission ............................ 7-15, 7-21
Capacities ..................................................... 12-3
Fluid ............................................................ 11-29
Selector lever ....................................... 7-16, 7-22
Shift lock release ................................. 7-20, 7-30
SPORTSHIFT mode – Turbo models ........... 7-21
Temperature warning light ............................ 3-12
Automatic/Emergency Locking Retractor
(A/ELR) .......................................................... 1-16
AWD warning light ............................................. 3-14
B
Battery ............................................................. 11-56
Jump starting ................................................ 9-18
Replacement (Remote keyless entry
system) ...................................................... 2-10
Bed extender ..................................................... 6-17
Brake
Booster ....................................................... 11-41
Fluid ............................................................ 11-38
Pad and lining ............................................. 11-43
Pedal .......................................................... 11-41
Brake pedal
Free play .................................................... 11-41
Reserve distance ........................................ 11-42
Brake system .................................................... 7-32
Warning light ................................................ 3-13
Braking .............................................................. 7-32
Breaking-in of new brake pads and
linings ....................................................... 11-44
Tips ............................................................... 7-32
Bulb
Chart ............................................................. 12-8
Replacing ................................................... 11-61
C
Capacities ......................................................... 12-3
14-3
Index
Cargo
Bed ............................................................... 6-16
Lamp ............................................................. 6-20
Lamp indicator light ...................................... 3-16
Net hooks ..................................................... 6-13
Tie-down hooks ............................................ 6-17
Catalytic converter ............................................... 8-4
Center
Console .......................................................... 6-5
Ventilators ....................................................... 4-2
Changing
Flat tire .......................................................... 9-12
Oil and oil filter ............................................ 11-12
Charge warning light ......................................... 3-11
CHECK ENGINE warning light/
Malfunction indicator lamp ............................. 3-10
Checking
Brake pedal free play .................................. 11-41
Brake pedal reserve distance ..................... 11-42
Clutch function ............................................ 11-42
Clutch pedal free play ................................. 11-43
Engine oil level ........................................... 11-10
Fluid level ................. 11-29, 11-36, 11-38, 11-39
Gear oil level .................................... 11-27, 11-33
Child restraint systems ...................................... 1-28
Installation with seatbelt ............................... 1-32
Lower and tether anchorages ....................... 1-40
Child safety ............................................................. 5
Locks ............................................................ 2-21
Chime
Key ................................................................. 3-4
Seatbelt ................................................. 1-17, 3-9
Cigarette lighter socket ........................................ 6-9
Cleaning
Aluminum wheels ......................................... 10-4
Fog light lens ................................................ 10-4
Interior .......................................................... 10-6
Ventilator grille .............................................. 4-11
Clock ................................................................. 3-17
Clutch fluid ....................................................... 11-39
Clutch pedal .................................................... 11-42
Coat hook .......................................................... 6-13
Coin compartment ............................................... 6-6
Convenience hook ............................................. 6-13
Cooling system ................................................ 11-17
Corrosion protection .......................................... 10-5
Cover
Soft bed ........................................................ 6-21
Cruise control .................................................... 7-38
Set indicator light .......................................... 3-16
Cup holder ........................................................... 6-7
D
Daytime running light system ............................ 3-20
14-4
Index
Differential gear oil
Front ........................................................... 11-32
Rear ............................................................ 11-33
Dimensions ........................................................ 12-2
Disarming the system ............................... 2-17, 2-19
Disc brake pad wear warning indicators ............ 7-33
Dome light ................................................ 6-2, 11-76
Door ajar warning lights ..................................... 3-14
Door locks ........................................................... 2-3
Drive belts ....................................................... 11-26
Driving
Car phone/mobile phone ................................... 8
Drinking ............................................................. 7
Drugs ................................................................. 7
Foreign countries ............................................ 8-6
Pets ................................................................... 8
Snowy and icy roads .................................... 8-13
Tips ..................................... 7-14, 7-19, 7-29, 8-7
Tired or sleepy ................................................... 8
E
Electrical system ............................................... 12-3
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) ................. 1-16
Engine
Compartment overview ................................. 11-8
Coolant ....................................................... 11-18
Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) .................... 8-3
Hood ............................................................. 11-5
Oil ............................................................... 11-10
Overheating .................................................. 9-21
Starting ........................................................... 7-9
Stopping ....................................................... 7-12
Exterior care ...................................................... 10-2
F
Flat tires ............................................................ 9-12
Floor mat ........................................................... 6-15
Fluid level
Automatic transmission .............................. 11-29
Brake .......................................................... 11-38
Clutch ......................................................... 11-39
Power steering ........................................... 11-36
Fog light button ................................................. 3-23
Folding down the rear seat ................................ 1-10
Front
Differential gear oil ..................................... 11-32
Fog light ...................................................... 11-68
Seatbelt pretensioners ................................. 1-24
Seats .............................................................. 1-2
Turn signal light, parking light and
side marker light ....................................... 11-69
Fuel ..................................................................... 7-2
Economy hints ................................................ 8-2
Filler door and cap .......................................... 7-4
14-5
Index
Gauge ............................................................. 3-8
Requirements ................................................. 7-2
Fuses ............................................................... 11-57
Fuses and circuits ............................................. 12-5
G
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) ................... 8-19
Glove box ............................................................ 6-5
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) .............. 8-19
H
Hazard warning flasher ....................................... 3-5
Head restraint adjustment (Front) ........................ 1-6
Headlight flasher ............................................... 3-19
Headlights .............................................. 3-18, 11-64
Heater operation .................................................. 4-7
High beam indicator light ................................... 3-16
High mount stop and cargo light assembly ...... 11-77
Horn ................................................................... 3-34
Hose and connections ..................................... 11-18
I
Ignition switch ...................................................... 3-2
Illuminated entry .................................................. 2-9
Illumination brightness control ........................... 3-21
Indicator light
High beam .................................................... 3-16
Selector lever position .................................. 3-15
Turn signal .................................................... 3-16
Inside mirror ...................................................... 3-28
Interior light .......................................................... 6-2
J
Jack and tools ..................................................... 9-3
Jump starting ..................................................... 9-18
K
Key
Interlock release ............................................. 3-4
Number ........................................................... 2-2
Reminder chime ............................................. 3-4
Keys .................................................................... 2-2
L
Leather seat materials ....................................... 10-6
License plate bracket ........................................ 2-26
License plate light ............................................ 11-74
Light control switch ............................................ 3-18
Limited slip differential (LSD) ............................ 7-31
Loading your vehicle ......................................... 8-16
Lower tether anchorages ................................... 1-40
14-6
Index
LSD (Limited slip differential) ............................ 7-31
M
Main fuse ......................................................... 11-60
Maintenance
Precautions .................................................. 11-3
Schedule ...................................................... 11-3
Seatbelt ........................................................ 1-21
Malfunction indicator lamp
(Check Engine light) ...................................... 3-10
Manual transmission ......................................... 7-12
Manual transmission oil ................................... 11-27
Map light .............................................................. 6-3
Maximum load limits .......................................... 8-25
Meters and gauges ............................................. 3-6
Mirrors ............................................................... 3-28
Moonroof .................................................. 2-31, 9-28
N
New vehicle break-in driving –
the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) ....................... 8-2
O
Odometer/Trip meter ........................................... 3-6
Off road driving .................................................... 8-9
Oil level
Engine ........................................................ 11-10
Front differential (AT vehicles) ................... 11-32
Manual transmission .................................. 11-27
Rear differential .......................................... 11-33
Oil pressure warning light .................................. 3-12
Outside mirrors .................................................. 3-30
Overheating engine ........................................... 9-21
P
Parking
Brake ............................................................ 7-36
Brake stroke ............................................... 11-45
Light switch ................................................... 3-22
Periodic inspections ............................................ 8-6
Power
Door locking switches ..................................... 2-5
Steering ........................................................ 7-31
Steering fluid .............................................. 11-36
Windows ....................................................... 2-22
R
Rear
Center console ............................................... 6-6
Combination lights ...................................... 11-70
Differential gear oil ..................................... 11-33
Seats .............................................................. 1-9
14-7
Index
Rear seat
Folding down ................................................ 1-10
Rear window
Defogger button ............................................ 3-26
Recommended
Automatic transmission fluid ....................... 11-31
Brake fluid ................................................... 11-39
Clutch fluid .................................................. 11-40
Oil grade and viscosity ....... 11-15, 11-16, 11-28,
11-32, 11-35
Power steering fluid .................................... 11-37
Spark plugs ................................................. 11-26
Remote keyless entry system .............................. 2-7
Replacement
Brake pad and lining ................................... 11-43
Windshield wiper blades ............................. 11-53
Replacing
Air cleaner element ..................................... 11-23
Battery (remote keyless entry system) ......... 2-10
Lost transmitters (keyless entry system) ...... 2-11
Replacing bulbs ............................................... 11-61
Cargo light assembly .................................. 11-77
Dome light .................................................. 11-76
Front fog light .............................................. 11-68
Front turn signal light .................................. 11-69
Headlight .................................................... 11-64
High mount stop light assembly .................. 11-77
License plate light ....................................... 11-74
Map light ..................................................... 11-76
Parking light ................................................ 11-69
Rear combination lights .............................. 11-70
Tail light ...................................................... 11-72
Rocking the vehicle ........................................... 8-16
Roof rail and crossbar ....................................... 6-24
S
Seat
Fabric ............................................................ 10-6
Heater ............................................................. 1-7
Seatbelt .................................................................. 4
Maintenance ................................................. 1-21
Pretensioners ............................................... 1-24
Safety tips ..................................................... 1-14
Warning light and chime ............................... 1-17
Seatbelts ........................................................... 1-14
Security system ................................................. 2-15
Selector lever ........................................... 7-16, 7-22
Position indicator .......................................... 3-15
Shift lock release ...................................... 7-20, 7-30
Side ventilators .................................................... 4-2
Snow tires .......................................................... 8-14
Soft bed cover ................................................... 6-21
Sounding a panic alarm .............................. 2-9, 2-18
Spark plugs ..................................................... 11-25
14-8
Index
Specifications .................................................... 12-2
Speedometer ....................................................... 3-6
Sport activity lights ................................. 6-30, 11-79
SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint
System airbag) .......................................... 4, 1-47
SRS airbag system monitors ............................. 1-60
SRS airbag system servicing ............................ 1-61
SRS airbag system warning light ...................... 3-10
SRS frontal airbag ............................................. 1-52
Starting the engine .............................................. 7-9
State emission testing (U.S. only) ....................... 7-7
Stopping the engine .......................................... 7-12
Storage compartments ........................................ 6-4
Sun shades ....................................................... 2-33
Sun visors ........................................................... 6-3
Supplemental Restraint System airbag
(SRS) ......................................................... 4, 1-47
Switchback door ................................................ 2-27
Switchback door indicator light ................. 2-31, 3-14
Synthetic leather upholstery .............................. 10-7
T
Tachometer ......................................................... 3-7
Tail light ........................................................... 11-72
Tailgate ............................................................. 2-25
Temperature gauge ............................................. 3-8
Temporary spare tire ......................................... 9-10
Tie-down hooks ................................................. 9-23
Tilt steering wheel ............................................. 3-33
Tire
Chains .......................................................... 8-15
Information ................................................... 13-2
Inspection ................................................... 11-46
Pressures and wear ................................... 11-46
Replacement .............................................. 11-50
Rotation ...................................................... 11-50
Tires .................................................................. 12-4
Types .......................................................... 11-45
Tires and wheels ............................................. 11-45
Top tether anchorages ...................................... 1-40
Towing ............................................................... 9-22
All wheels on the ground .............................. 9-27
Flat-bed truck ............................................... 9-27
Hooks ........................................................... 9-23
Trailer
Hitch ............................................................. 8-20
Hitches ......................................................... 8-30
Towing .......................................................... 8-24
Towing tips ................................................... 8-33
Turn signal
Indicator lights .............................................. 3-16
Lever ............................................................ 3-20
14-9
Index
V
Valet mode ........................................................ 2-18
Vanity mirror ........................................................ 6-4
Vehicle
Capacity weight ............................................ 8-18
Identification ................................................. 12-9
Ventilator ............................................................. 4-2
W
Warning and indicator lights ................................ 3-9
Warning lights
ABS .............................................................. 3-12
All-Wheel Drive ............................................. 3-14
Anti-lock Brake System ................................. 3-12
AT OIL TEMPerature .................................... 3-12
Brake system ................................................ 3-13
Charge .......................................................... 3-11
CHECK ENGINE .......................................... 3-10
Door ajar ....................................................... 3-14
Oil pressure .................................................. 3-12
Seatbelt ................................................. 1-17, 3-9
SRS airbag system ....................................... 3-10
Warranties and maintenance ............................ 8-24
Washing ............................................................ 10-2
Waxing and polishing ........................................ 10-3
Wear indicators ............................................... 11-49
Wheel
Alignment ...................................................... 12-4
Balance ....................................................... 11-49
Replacement .............................................. 11-51
Windows ............................................................ 2-22
Windshield
Washer fluid ................................................ 11-52
Wiper and washer switches .......................... 3-25
Wiper deicer ................................................. 3-27
Winter driving .................................................... 8-11
Wiper and washer ............................................. 3-23
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
11
12
13
HSF028AA
GAS STATION REFERENCE
Fuel:
T Non-turbo models
Use only unleaded gasoline with an octane rat-
ing of 87 AKI or higher.
T Turbo models
Use premium unleaded gasoline with an oc-
tane rating of 91 AKI or higher. If premium un-
leaded gasoline is not available, regular un-
leaded gasoline with octane rating of 87 AKI or
higher may be temporarily used. For optimum
engine performance and driveability, it is re-
quired that you use premium grade unleaded
gasoline.
Fuel octane rating
This octane rating is the average of the Re-
search Octane and Motor Octane numbers and
is commonly referred to as the Anti Knock In-
dex (AKI). Refer to “Fuel” section in this manu-
al.
Fuel capacity:
16.9 US gal (64 liters, 14.1 Imp gal)
Engine oil:
Use only API classification SL with the words
“ENERGY CONSERVING” and the New API
certification mark (starburst mark) displayed on
the container (ILSAC GF-3).
Engine oil capacity:
4.2 US qt (4.0 liters, 3.5 Imp qt)
Cold tire pressure:
Front 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm
2
)
Rear 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm
2
)
